Home

IP Office 3.2 Installation Manual

1. TI 02 Installing the IP Office Admin Applications 78 03 Control Unit Power Up 80 04 Connecting the Manager PC 82 05 Receiving a Configuration Pre 3 2 84 06 Checking the System Using System NONO piglio 86 07 Fitting VOM CardS 88 08 Fitting Modem CardS 90 09 Fitting Trunk Interface CardsS 92 Stage 9b Grounding E1R2 Coaxial CONNECtONS sciura 94 Stage 9c Fitting Small Office Edition TRUNK Card aiar 95 10 Rack Mounting Instructions 96 11 Adding Expansion Modules 98 12 Adding a WAN3 Module 100 13 Shelf Wall Mounting SOE 102 14 Grounding Earthing 104 15 Upgrading the Core Software 106 16 Configuring Security Settings 112 17 Receiving a Configuration 3 2 116 B Phone Installation 119 instaliingiPhones ela 119 19 Installing 2400 5400 Series Phones 120 Installing an EU24 Add On 125 Basic Button Programming 127 Changing Extension Numbers 129 Swapping Extension Users 131 C External Trunk Configuration
2. orangenmite 2 i 3 ERA White Green 3 _ 11 6 eRxB Green White 6 7 _ WhiterBrown _7_ e BrownWhite 8 e The IP Office So8 module BRI ports include 1000hm terminating resistors e Connection assumes that the ISDN device includes terminating resistors If this is not the case 1000hm 5 resistors must be connected across the receive wire pair and the transmit wire pair in the junction box immediately before the ISDN terminal e BRI ports found on the rear of control units fitted with Quad BRI trunk cards are BRI T interface ports for connection to external BRI trunk services see BRI Port Trunk Installation Manual Page 282 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 BRI Port System Components These ports are found on the rear of control units fitted with Quad BRI trunk cards They are BRI T interface ports for connection to external BRI trunk services BRI found on the So8 module are BRI S interface ports for connect to ISDN terminal devices see BRI Port So PRI BRI Trunk Cable This cable is used to connect from IP Office BRI PRI trunk ports to the line providers network termination equipment If that equipment does not use RJ45 sockets the cable may need to be stripped and rewired or an alternate cable used The appropriate signal pin outs and wire colours are detailed below IP Office PRIUBRI Port BRI RJ45 BRI Network Termination Point t a Meterz 9 84 Feet Wi
3. 4 Select whether only the current Windows logon account should be able to run the Admin Suite applications or whether they will be available to all users of the PC Click Next gt e The previous selection does not affect the IP Office Feature key server application if installed That application runs as a service whenever the PC is running 5 If required select the destination to which the applications should be installed We recommend that you accept the default destination Click Next gt 6 The next screen is used to select which applications in the suite should be installed Clicking on each will display a description of the application Click on the next to each application to change the installation selection Whe ou have selected the installations required click Next gt fe IP Office Admin Suite InstallShield Wizard Custom Setup Select the program Features you want installed Click on an icon in the list below to change how a Feature is installed Feature Description Provides a system view of all active calls cr System Monitor oe Feature key Server 3 This feature will be installed on local hard drive 8 This feature and all subFeatures will be installed on local hard drive 1 This Feature will be installed when required Install t xX This Feature will not be available C iPro m Ban Installshield Help lt Back Cancel a For IP Office system installations
4. Information Required 1 LJ Which IP Office Admin Suite applications are being installed The following list indicates those that are required for installation and configuration e O System Monitor Install Monitor is a tool intended primarily for Avaya technicians and engineers However it is able to report on the presence of hardware devices not reported by the IP Office Manager application and is therefore an important tool for installation e O Feature Key Server Optional The Feature Key Server should only be installed if the PC will host the parallel port or USB port Feature Key dongle for the IP Office system e O Manager Install This application is required to edit and manage the software on the IP Office system e LI Voicemail Mail Lite Optional Only install this application if no other voicemail such as Voicemail Pro or embedded voicemail is being installed e O Call Status Optional This is a useful tool for seeing all current calls in progress Parts Required 1 O IP Office Administrator Applications CD 2 O Windows PC This should meet the requirements of the administrator applications being installed If a server PC from the customer installation is available for example for Voicemail Pro use that PC The specification below is just for IP Office Manager If other applications are to be installed on the PC then their requirements should also be meet PC Minimum Recommended Requirements Processor 600MHz
5. Item Variant Country IP400 Phone V1 All Tee em BS1363 United Kingdom 700213374 NEMA1 15 700213390 700254519 700314172 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Installation Manual Page 206 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP400 So8 Module The So8 module is used to add ETSI BRI SO interface ports to the IP Office system These ports can then be used for the connection of ISDN devices Feature Details Supported on Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file nas0 16 bin Included sd Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The unit is supplied with an earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the unit s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit Older units were supplied with a 2 Pin 40W external power supply unit which used a locale specific locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord not supplied with the unit The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional
6. LAN These ports form an unmanaged layer 2 Ethernet switch The ports are full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing auto MDI MDIX Used for connection of analog phones Not suitable for out of building connections Four wire analog phones should be connected via a master socket containing ringing capacitors Used for trunk cards of all types except WAN port trunk card Normally Slot B should be SLOTB used first Dual PRI trunk cards supported in Slot A only Trunks cards are supplied with replacement external blanking plates suitable for the trunk card port connections 37 Way D Type socket Used for the connection of V 24 V 35 or X 21 WAN service Used for connection of a function or protective ground Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement All control units are available in either North America or Rest of World variants The choice controls various default settings of the unit For E911 support a North American variant control unit must be used The companding can be changed once a unit is installed Item VEET Country SAP Code IP406 V2 Office DS mee vaomens cere it EZIO NEMA5 15P 700289770 China 700261977 Rack Mounting Kit 700210800 Control units are supplied with an external power supply unit but not a locale specific power cord Installation Manual Page 180 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP406 V1 Control Unit IP406 Of
7. La Device type R Avaya 5410 Module BD Fort 1 d Click OK Manager will probably give a validation error message due to a user being associated with two extensions This can be ignored until all the user moves have been completed If changing several users repeat the process as required Click to revalidate the configuration and check that no conflicts between users and associated extensions 8 If the configuration changes are complete send the configuration back to the IP Office and select appropriate settings for the reboot Installation Manual Page 130 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 B Phone Installation Swapping Extension Users Occasionally for example for office moves users may want to move all their settings permanently to another extension E Objective Change the default user associated with an extension port 1 1 n Procedure 1 Swapping Analog and Digital Extension Users Using Structured Cabling For installations where structured cabling has been used the simplest way to swap users is to swap the cable connections are the RJ45 patch panel This moves the user settings between phones without requiring any change to the IP Office configuration If done this way ensure that records of the cable connections are updated iu Procedure 2 Swapping Avaya 4600 5600 Series IP Extensions These phones cannot be swapped through cabling as the phone retains its settings including
8. Variant RAM HD Pentium Celeron Phone Manager 64MB 160MB PIII Celeron 3 Athlon B Lite SOOMHz 800MHz 650MHz Phone Manager Pr 1GB e Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone also requires the user PC to have a speaker and microphone installed and the user associated with an IP extension on the IP Office Installation Manual Page 264 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components SAP 20 License Description RFA Name IP400 Phone Manager Pro Enables Phone Manager Pro for 1 5 10 20 50 100 or unlimited users The user s Phone Manager mode is set through the IP Office configuration User Telephony Phone Manager Type Phone Manager Pro per user 177471 unlimited 177474 Phone Manager Enables Phone Manager Pro IP softphone Pro IP Audio operation for a user Enabled per user Note Also requires the user to have a Phone Manager Pro license 10 Installation Manual Page 265 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation SoftConsole This is a licensed application It is intended for telephone system operators or receptionists Its displays details of calls directed to the user and allows them to quickly see the status of the callers required destination and transfer the call The SoftConsole user is able to access a range of details about the status of users and groups on the IP Office system
9. WARNING Due to the drastic nature of these actions they should only be performed if absolutely necessary to return a system back to working order In both cases you must make every effort to ensure that you have a backup copy of the system configuration The DTE ports on IP Office expansion modules are not used for any maintenance or diagnostics except under instruction from Avaya Installation Manual Page 167 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation DTE Port These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units and external expansion modules The DTE ports on the control units can be used for system maintenance and connection of serial terminal adaptors In the case of 9 pin DTE ports IP406 V2 and IP412 the port can also be used for connection of the IP Office serial port licence key dongle An asynchronous terminal program such as HyperTerminal is also required Configure this for operation via a PC serial port as follows Bits per second 33 400 Stop Bits Data bits Flow Control The DTE ports on external expansion modules are not used DTE Cables These cables are used for system maintenance and diagnostics under Avaya guidance They can also be used for connection of RS 232 serial terminal adaptor equipment to the IP Office control unit The cable required depends on the IP Office control unit IF Office DTE Port 25 ay g ii 25 Way day o D Type Flug
10. e Short Code 000 e Telephone No 000 e Function DialEmergency Connections to TS013 the following Bearer Capabilities shall not be used e kHz Audio Video Restricted Digital Information If unknown type of number is used in calling party number the network will use the default CLI The system must be configured for Point to Multi point connection to comply with Austel requirements for connecting to TS013 circuits As the IP Office does not support emergency dialing after loss of power the following warning notice should be recognized e WARNING This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails PRI Interface During the configuration ensure 000 emergency number is not barred by performing the following e Short Code 000 e Telephone No 000 e Function DialEmergency e WARNING This equipment will be inoperable during mains power failure Installation Manual Page 324 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Safety Statements Industry Canada Notification DoC This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment NOTICE The Ringer Equivalen
11. wf i i l e 2 The Small Office Edition control unit only supports T1 PRI It does not support E1 or E1R2 PRI trunk cards e 3 The IP406 V2 supports dual PRI trunk cards in Slot A only e 4 VCM channels are required for call setup and may be required for call duration A maximum of 50 T3 IP phones are supported Installation Manual Page 176 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP412 Control Unit The IP412 control unit supports up to 12 Expansion modules Its LAN ports act as a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch with optional internal firewall for traffic between the two ports Feature Capacity Maximum 360 of various types in combination Analog only 360 DS only 360 IP Extensions only 360 Conference Parties 128 2 banks of 64 Conferences cannot combine resources from both banks When a conference is started the bank with the most free resource is used Trunks Cards 2 Trunk card slots All types supported VCM Card Slots 2 up to maximum voice compression channels capacity of 60 channels Data Channels 100 of which 30 usable for Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV connection sessions subject to available Voicemail Pro Port and TAPI WAV licenses Locales Software Level e IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum e Bin file ip412 bin Power Supply The unit is supplied with an earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the un
12. 298 CD 48 during 40 existing 268 274 refer 40 Voicemail Pro 3 2 268 Voicemail Pro 3 2 CD 48 Voicemail Pro application 34 48 153 Contains 48 Voicemail Pro CD 298 Voicemail Pro Installation 7 40 Refer 40 Voicemail Pro Networked Messaging 268 274 276 298 Voicemail Pro PC 35 152 Voicemail Pro Port 177 179 181 183 185 Voicemail Pro ScanSoft Text to Speech 298 Voicemail Pro ScanSoft TTS CD s 48 Voicemail Pro Server 268 Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV 13 176 177 179 181 183 185 Voicemail Pro s TTS 48 Voicemail Server 86 Index Voicemail Type 62 VoIP 43 53 185 264 298 Voltage 280 291 VPN IPSec 276 298 VPNM 48 VS 158 W Wall Fixings 120 Wall Mounting 62 120 Wallboard 256 Wallboard Client 49 256 Wallboard Manager 46 256 270 Wallboard Server 49 256 Wallboard Server MUST 49 Wallboard 22 298 WAN 13 86 92 100 141 176 177 179 185 190 209 279 289 293 294 295 296 298 319 322 connect 141 209 fitting 92 WAN Cables 100 WAN Cards 195 WAN ID 293 WAN Link 141 Creating 141 WAN Port 86 293 Number 86 WAN Service 141 become 141 WAN Trunk Card 195 WAN1 62 WAN2 62 WAN3 10 12 20 26 72 98 100 106 164 165 209 277 279 287 289 293 294 295 296 298 Connect 100 except 20 98 287 excluding 72 including 106 power 100 rear 293 scanned 100 untick 106 WAN3 10 209 WANS 10 100 20 22 23 62 209 298 WANS 10 100 Expansion Module 38 WANS 10
13. Ctl B 293 296 Ctrl 273 CTS 168 286 293 294 295 CU 275 276 298 Current Clock Source 86 Current Service Pack 49 Customer Helpline 320 Customer Helpline 24 320 Customer Principal Contact 62 Customer Technical Contact 62 customer s 7 establish 7 D damage 125 249 250 EU24 EU24BL 125 249 250 dan 40 189 Danish 40 189 264 266 267 268 Data Carrier Detect 168 286 293 294 295 Data Channels 13 176 177 179 181 183 185 Data Set Ready 168 286 293 294 295 Data Terminal Ready 168 286 293 294 295 data telephony 62 existing 62 Database Integration 44 Datacenter Server 49 Date 49 Availability 49 DC 177 179 181 183 185 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 322 DC I P 177 179 181 183 185 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 DC I P Port 284 DC Input 322 DC Power Input 322 DCD 168 286 293 294 295 DCP 247 Dual Radio Module 247 Debug 169 172 Declaration 317 323 325 Conformity 317 323 325 DECT 36 211 271 DECT DCU 271 DECT Integration 48 271 298 DECT Wireless Phones 36 def06r1_ 8 3 bin 38 def24r1_8 3 bin 38 Default Music on Hold Tones 142 Default None 62 Default On 62 Default Short Codes 150 Defaulted IP Office Control Unit 82 Direct Connection 82 Defaulting 106 169 171 192 168 42 1 169 Configuration 171 IP Office 169 IP Office s 171 Security Settings 171 Validate 106 Delta 45 260 Delta Server 7 45 46 48 49 255 256 260 De
14. IP Office Installation PRI Port These ports are found on the rear of IP Office control units fitted with single or dual PRI trunk cards They are used for connection to PRI trunk services including E1 T1 and E1 R2 PRI BRI Trunk Cable This cable is used to connect from IP Office BRI PRI trunk ports to the line providers network termination equipment If that equipment does not use RJ45 sockets the cable may need to be stripped and rewired or an alternate cable used The appropriate signal pin outs and wire colours are detailed below IF Office Network Termination PRIUEBRI Port Faint 2 jo fl E Rds Rds a Meterz 9 64 Feet IP Office Wire Network Termination BRI RJ45 BRI PRI PIN RJ45 iz 1 _ erxsforangewnitel 2 EJ H I a etal White Green_ 6 atxB Greenwhite 6 _ r witerBrown _7 _ 8 _ BrownWwhite 6 _ e Supply IP Office control units pre fitted with BRI and or PRI trunk cards are normally supplied with the appropriate number of these cables BRI PRI trunks cards supplied separate do not include these cables e Cable Color Red e SAP Code 700213440 e Maximum Length 5m 16 5 This is the maximum length that should be used if the above cable is replaced with an alternate cable Installation Manual Page 292 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components WAN Port This port is found on the rear of most IP Office control units and the rear of the WANS ext
15. Phone 30 V2 203 205 Phone Add Ons 22 175 Phone Barrier Box 147 149 Phone Change 164 Phone Charger 218 219 298 Phone Display 40 Phone Expansion Module 38 Phone Manager 7 43 264 273 entering 273 number 273 Phone Manager IP Audio 36 Phone Manager iPro 264 Phone Manager Licenses 298 Phone Manager Lite 35 43 152 264 Phone Manager Lite Pro 49 Phone Manager PC Softphone 49 276 298 Phone Manager Pro 35 36 43 150 152 264 271 273 276 298 Phone Manager Pro IP Audio Enabled 264 273 298 Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone 43 264 Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone application 36 Phone Manager Type 264 273 Page 335 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Phone Manager PC Softphone Avaya 49 Phone Module V2 20 Phone Module V2 Connections 203 Phone V1 20 22 23 62 147 203 205 291 298 Phone V1 Module Connections 205 Phone V1 V2 291 Phone V2 20 22 23 28 62 98 104 147 203 205 291 298 Phone V2 Expansion Module 38 Phone16 V2 70 Phones0 V2 70 Phones 70 Phones V2 70 Phones 20 28 104 119 147 149 203 291 298 Installing 119 Phones Expansion 30 144 PIII 800MHz 254 255 256 260 261 263 264 266 PIN 151 282 283 288 292 293 Connect 293 respect 151 288 Pin 19 293 Pin Connections 283 Pin No 281 PIP 158 Planned System Location 62 Planning 120 Chart 120 playing 44 voicemail 44 plk 40 Plug 156 Fea
16. Up to 4 simultaneous SoftConsole users can be licensed Details IP Office 3 2 User and Admin CD Set x5 700407604 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 Languages Brazilian Chinese Simplified Danish Dutch English French Finnish German Italian Korean Latin Spanish Norwegian Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish License application See below Minimum PC Requirements XP 2000 2000 2003 Pro Pro Server Server Variant RAM HD Pentium Celeron SoftConsole 128MB 1GB PIII Celeron 3 Athlon B 800MHz 800MHz 650MHz License Description RFA Name SoftConsole so the first instance of IP Office SoftConsole to be IP400 171987 users SoftConsole eBLF Adds one additional SoftConsole user A maximum of IP400 174456 four SoftConsole user can be licensed SoftConsole 1 Installation Manual Page 266 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Voicemail Lite This application does not require an IP Office license It can be installed from the IP Office Administrator Applications CD to a Windows PC on the IP Office LAN It provides voicemail operation for all IP Office users and groups using the PC hard disk to store prompts and messages Only 4 simultaneous connections to leave or play messages are supported Details IP Office 3 2 User and Admin CD Set x5 700407604 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 Languages Chinese Mandarin Danish German Greek English UK English US
17. 1 Copyallofthe IP Office MIBs and standard MIBs from the IP Office Administrator Applications CD to the SNMPc mibfiles directory 2 Inthe SNMPc mibfiles directory open the files STANDARD mib and SNMPv2 SMI mib in Notepad In the SNMPv2 SMI mib file find the definition of zeroDotZero and copy this to the clipboard In the STANDARD MIB file find the SNMPv2 SMI section and paste in the definition of zeroDotZero from the clipboard before the end of this section just before the END statement save the modified STANDARD MIB file 6 Add the MIB file SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB mib to the MIB database using the instructions provided in the IP Office installation guide 7 Add all the MIB files listed in the instructions provided in the IP Office installation guide in the order given 8 Compile the MIBs ready for use The reason for this is The IRO PHONES MIB mib relies upon the DIFFSERV MIB mib for the definition of the textual convention of IndexInteger The DIFFSERV MIB needs the definition of the textual convention zeroDotZero which is normally defined in SNMPv2 SMI mib However including SNMPv2 SMI mib in the MIB file compilation list results in errors due to conflicts with what appear to be internal definitions within SNMPc and the SNMPv2 SMI section in its STANDARD mib file Therefore to resolve the issue the required definition of zeroDotZero must be placed in the SNMPv2 SMI section in SNMPc s STANDARD mib file Installation Manual Page 1
18. 262 Windows XP 2000 49 Wireless Cards 16 188 298 Wireless Keyboard Remote Control 298 Wireless Phone 215 216 217 298 Within Manager 120 WordPad 73 Workforce Management 46 256 World 177 179 181 183 185 298 319 Rest 177 179 181 183 185 298 319 www avaya learning com 54 X X 21 209 279 293 296 X 21 WAN 14 20 100 177 179 181 183 209 X 21 WAN Cable 296 X 21 WAN Service 296 X Y 38 x01d01a2_3 bin 38 x02d01a2_3 bin 38 x1 279 x10d01a2_3 bin 38 x16 279 x16 x30 279 x2 259 268 279 x20d01a2_3 bin 38 x3 279 x4 279 x5 254 255 260 261 262 263 264 266 267 268 x5 CD s Others x3 CD s 298 x8 279 x8 x16 x30 279 XM24 22 242 243 252 285 298 Connects 252 supporting 298 XM24 Phone add ons 22 XM24 Stand 242 243 252 298 XM24D M 298 XP 154 254 255 258 259 260 261 263 266 267 XP Pro 256 264 268 XX10 120 XX20 120 Y Yahoo Groups 55 Z Z bracket 102 fixing 102 zeroDotZero 161 zhh 40 Z shaped 102 Fit 102 Page 342 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from p
19. 312 4600 Series Phones Old Style 313 4600 Series Phones New Style 313 5400 Series Phones 314 5600 Series Phones 314 6400 Series Phones 314 T3 Series Phones Upn 315 T3 Series Phones IP 315 CCC WalboardS nesrin 316 Spalle 316 Safety Statements 1 ss 111s gt 317 Safety and Homologation Statements 317 Lithium Batere Sunio 317 Lightning Protection Hazard Symbols 318 Trunk Interface Modules 319 Further Information and Product Updates 320 Support Telephone Numbers 320 Compliance with FCC Rules 321 Port Safety Classification 322 EMC GdUulions iacii lacca 323 89 336 EEC EMC Directive CISPR 22 1993 including A1 A2 AS NZ 354871995 ROW 323 Federal Communications Commission FC 323 Canadian Department of Communications DOC ornan A ron 323 EMC Caution for China 323 Regulatory Instructions for Use 324 IP Office Operation in Australia 324 Industry Canada Notification DOC 325 IP Office Operation in EU 325 IP Office Operation in New Zealand 325 FCC N
20. 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Weight Unboxed 3 1Kg 6 94lbs Boxed 4 4Kg 9 7lbs Based on Phone 30 V2 Installation Manual Page 203 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Phone Module V2 Connections AMOI 1P400 Phone 20 21 22 23 24 eerta Tetee Te SEG eeta SEE EEGs DC IP Eca OTE EXPANSION 16 24V DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION V2 244 DO 15A PHONE W2 Description DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module RJ45 socket Used for connection of analog phones Intended for two wire analog phones F
21. 700289556 Wallboard manager Comms Cards Spares The following spares can be ordered from Avaya Item Color SAP Code Handset HIP QD CORD 4606 16 24 30 SETS 700414121 Cat 5 Cable specife o 4620__ 700261615 Dark Grey IP PHONE MOD CORD 1ft CAT5 408406932 IP PHONE MOD CORD 7ft CAT5 408406957 IP PHONE MOD CORD 14ft CAT5 408406940 Installation Manual Page 316 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Safety Statements aida and Homologation Statements The CE mark affixed to this equipment means that the module complies with the 1999 5 EC R amp TTE 89 336 EEC EMC and 72 23EEC LVD Directives e Declaration of Conformity The Declaration of Conformity DoC for the IP400 Office products is available within on the IP Office Documentation CD Engineer s Toolkit CD AN This warning symbol is found on the base of IP403 IP406 V2 IP412 modules and on the base of the IP400 Digital Station 80W PSU e Refer to Trunk Interface Modules for information concerning which Trunk Interface module variants are fitted in which country WARNING The Avaya IP400 Office modules are intended to be installed by Service Personnel and it is the responsibility of the Service Personnel to ensure that all subsidiary interconnected equipment is wired correctly and also meet the safety requirements of IEC60950 or UL60950 where applicable Lithium Batteries A lithium battery is fitted to t
22. Center SoftConsole Allows the first instance of IP Office SoftConsole to be IP400 171987 users run SoftConsole Compact Enables the CBC application for one user IP400 CBC 171993 Business Center Small Office Enables use of the wireless card with the Small Office 1P400 Access 182197 Edition WiFi Edition control unit Point MS CRM Allows operation between IP Office and MS CRM IP400 Microsoft 180588 server and clients CRM Intgr IPSec Tunneling Enables the IP Office to initiate and terminate IPSec IP400 IPSec VPN 182301 and L2TP tunnels eBLF Adds one additional SoftConsole user A maximum of 1P400 174456 four SoftConsole user can be licensed SoftConsole 1 Mobile Twinning Enables the use of the IP Office 3 2 mobile twinning Mobile 1 195569 features Twinning 195570 10 1195571 195572 IP End points Controls the number of 3rd party H 323 devices 1 5 IP400 IP 174956 10 20 50 or 100 supported by IP Office Endpoint E TZOS No license is required for Avaya 4600 and 5600 series A pr telephones IP enabled Phone Manager Pro is 174958 licensed separately 174959 Installation Manual Page 271 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation License Keys CTI License shows the name as it appears in the IP Office configuration RFA Name is the name used for the orderable item License Description RFA SAP Name CTI Link Enables CTI Link Pro functionality TAPI Link Pro and DEVLink
23. Create 141 Select 127 User Telephony 264 273 User Applications 43 User Applications CD 48 User Name 68 69 70 User Restriction Rights 73 User Setup 158 Users Using Configuration Change 131 Swapping 131 uses 34 153 189 512MB Compact Flash 189 64MB Compact Flash 189 dongle 34 153 Uses IEC60320 C13 298 Uses IEC60320 C7 298 Using 150 External Output 150 Using 14AWG 149 Using IP Office 150 Using IP Office Manager 127 Using Manager 92 100 106 127 USOC RJ45S 326 USOC RJ48C 326 UTP 26 277 V V 24 14 20 100 177 179 181 183 209 279 293 V 24 WAN 294 V 24 WAN Cable 294 Page 340 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 V 24 WAN Service 294 V 24 V 28 209 293 V 24 V 35 293 V 32 16 187 V 35 14 20 100 177 179 181 183 209 279 293 V 35 WAN 295 V 35 WAN Cable 295 V 35 WAN Service 295 V 90 16 90 187 incoming 16 V1 13 14 16 90 92 176 190 298 V1 V2 319 V2 13 14 16 20 90 92 106 176 190 203 298 V3 0 49 V3 1 49 V35 Gnd 293 V5 0 1 161 CastleRock SNMPc 161 VA 24 get 24 Valid 155 156 Validated 106 default 106 untick 106 Validated Upgrade 106 Various IP Office 10 34 35 152 153 VB Scripting 276 298 VCM 13 16 36 53 86 88 92 176 190 298 Number 16 86 88 190 require 16 VCM 10 298 VCM 16 298 VCM 20 298 VCM 20 on IP403 190 VCM 24 298 VCM 30 298 VCM Card Slots 177 179 181 183 185 VCM Cards 13 16 62 88 176 190 Fitting 88 Installi
24. External MOH An external music source can be connected to the IP Office control unit Connect a line out audio source to the 3 5mm port marked AUDIO on the back of the control unit e If the control unit downloads an internal holdmusic wav file the external audio port is ignored e The IP Office can be forced to use the external port and not download an internal music on hold file by selecting Use External Music on Hold System Telephony and restarting the IP Office Default Music on Hold Tones This option is only supported for systems set to the locale Italy On these systems if no external source is connected no internal music on hold file is available and Use External Music on Hold is not selected then the system will use a default tone for music on hold The tone used is 425Hz repeated 0 2 0 2 0 2 3 4 seconds on off cadence This option is supported on IP Office 3 0 50 and higher Installation Manual Page 142 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Checking Music on Hold The IP Office has a default system short code that allows you to listen to a system s current music on hold 1 Atan idle extension dial 34 2 You will hear the system s music on hold Installation Manual Page 143 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Grounding and Protection Devices Out of Building Connections Lightning Protection The following are the only suppor
25. Gain setting adjustment by unqualified personnel may result in violation of the FCC rules Qualified personnel may adjust gain settings above these levels only where 1 Measurement is made to ensure that the power levels sent to line at each network interface connected does not exceed the maximum levels specified in FCC part 68 section 68 308 b and TIA EIA IS 968 Section 4 5 for that specific interface type 2 Where gain adjustment away from the default values are made precautions should be taken to ensure that the connection of terminal equipment is controlled by qualified installation personnel Installation Manual Page 321 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Port Safety Classification The Avaya IP Office systems have the following ports e Expansion ports e 10 100 BaseT LAN ports e Telephone ports which are either DT A Law encoding or DS Mu Law encoding Note that use of DT ports is no longer supported in IP Office 3 0 or higher e ISDN ports e Analog ports e Power Fail ports e WAN ports e DTE ports e Audio I P port e DC Power Input port e External Control port These Ports are classified as follows Port Name PRI port BRI ports Analog ports Power fail ports DTE port Analog Telephone Ports Digital Telephone Ports WAN port LAN ports Expansion ports Audio port External Control port DC Input port Port Description Port Classification PRI ISDN c
26. HEADSET x 4 MUTE n ila VOLUME UP Xx Es MESSAGES amp HOLD C TRANSFER w VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CW CONFERENCE Variant SAP Code 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup usa 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Installation Manual Page 240 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 6408D These phones no longer available from Avaya Feature Detail Headset Socket Jx o Speaker Microphone 2 lines Upgradable Firmware Standard DCP Phone Keys 4 SPEAKER x amp HEADSET MUTE zm VOLUME UP x Es MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER Ww VOLUME DOWN x DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CONFERENCE Item SAP Code Installation Manual Page 241 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 6416D These phones no longer available from Avaya An additional 24 programmable buttons can be added using an XM24 and power supply unit Feature Detail Speaker Microphone x 2 lines Supported Add Ons Standard DCP Phone Keys SI SPEAKER d HEADSET v 4 MUTE fm VOLUME UP x Ea MESSAGES HOLD 4 f TRANSFER 7 x VOLUME DOWN 108807611 108807603 848219127 848219119 700406523 00406515 08272378 08272386 1151C1 Power Supply With CATS cable 00356447 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup With CATS cable 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 1088
27. IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Phone V1 Module Connections ay IP400 Phone POT if 18 13 20 21 22 23 eh POT 25 26 ST 28 23 3 LLELE ANRHRUAU CARACARA CE IAA MN LL LILLO ULILI J mr LI A LR DV E o O EXPANSION Description DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module DTE 25 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module RJ45 socket Used for connection of analog phones If connected to an out of building extension the connection must be made via additional IP Office Barrier Box devices in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground Function ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional ground if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead Must be connected if any out of building extensions are connected to this module All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system
28. POT ports are used for analog phones The Phone module is available in 8 16 and 30 port variants referred to as the Phone 8 Phone 16 and Phone 30 respectively The IP400 Phone Module has been superseded by the Phone Module V2 my el oa a a he 1 5 a n a nl ie n ta Lia a i 7 he a x x x fu k ee E s 1 ok Csi bm be e With IP Office 3 1 the message waiting indication MWI on each POT port can be configured for None On 51V Stepped 81V Line Reversal A or Line Reversal B On uses the default determined by the system locale POT ports on a Phone V2 module can additionally be configured for 101V operation Feature Details Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file napots16 bin Included Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a 2 pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Unboxed 3 1Kg 6 94lbs Boxed 4 4Kg 9 7lbs Based on Phone 30 V2 Installation Manual Page 205
29. ensure that at minimum System Monitor and Manager are selected b Only select Voicemail if this PC will also be the customer s Voicemail Lite server PC c Deselect Feature Key Server unless this PC will be hosting a Parallel port or USB port Feature Key dongle for the customer s IP Office system Click Install Installation of Windows Net2 components may be required If dialogs for this appear follow the prompts to install Net 9 If requested reboot the PC 10 Proceed to Stage 3 Control Unit Power Up Installation Manual Page 79 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 03 Control Unit Power Up This procedure starts a new IP Office control unit without the unit being connected to any LAN In this scenario the IP Office control unit will assume its default configuration settings E Objective To power up the IP Office control unit to a known state with a known set of defaults alia Fi Parts and Equipment Required 1 LJ Switched power outlet socket 2 O IP Office Control Unit All control units are supplied with an external power supply unit 3 O Locale Specific Power Cord 4 O LAN Cable e O IP Office Small Office Edition 1P403 IP406 V1 and IP406 V2 Control Units A standard RJ45 RJ45 LAN cable can be used e O IP412 Control Unit A RJ45 RJ45 cross over LAN cable is required Procedure 1 Remove the control unit from its box and check its condition
30. 133 Trunk Configuration 133 Clock Quality rase a 134 RUSE Gi TUNK Sonans 135 PIECE DIANO orisa enni 137 D Additional Processes 141 Creating a WAN Link 141 Music on Hold MOH n 142 Grounding and Protection Devices 144 Out of Building Connections Lightning Protection cenuen ea a ne 144 DS Phone IROB Installation 146 Analog Phone Barrier Boxes 147 Rack Mounting Barrier Boxes 149 External Output Port 150 Using the External Output Door Port 150 EXT O P POM aissei uton 151 LICENSING GL re alla 152 L IGENSEKEYS cenlenlintata habla 152 Feature Key Dongles 153 Installation Requirements 154 Serial Port Feature Key Installation 155 Page iii 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Parallel Port USB Feature Key Q2ODIDECI ea 211 INstalloloRisanirae iena 156 2 Dahl 212 S5009 BRI MOdUle siii 157 DAN OLD ili 213 soS amp Example1lL alain 157 24020 A Lila 214 So8 Example 2 Video Conference 158 0046 erbicidi 215 Polycom Video Module Settings 159 0020 adi 216 SNMP specialita 160 OZO ia 217 SNMP Introduction cc eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 160 Vla 218 Installing the IP Office MIB Files 161 Sla
31. 182302 IP400 Conferencing Center RFA Languages English French German Italian Latin Spanish Swedish ini Voicemail Pro server MS Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher Minimum Server PC sa XP 2000 2000 2003 Pro Pro Server Server Variant Pentium Celeron Conference 512MB ai P4 Not Athlon XP d d d d Center 2 4GHz tested 3000 Athlon64 e While Windows XP Professional or Windows 2000 Professional can be used but will typically support a maximum of 10 web clients e Client PC For conference booking and web conference access any Windows PC running Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher e For conversion of files to MHT format Microsoft Office is required on the client PC Installation Manual Page 258 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components ContactStore The Voicemail Pro can be used for manual and automatic call recording Those recording are placed into the mailbox specified for the user or hunt group whose call is being recorded and are then treated as normal messages Contact Store allows those recordings to be redirected into a database on the ContactStore PC This allows recordings to be archived and searched separately from user messages This application requires entry of a license into the IP Office configuration Source CD IP Office Voicemail Pro 3 2 CD s x2 700407588 2nd CD contains ContactStore DVD IP Office 3 1 Applications DVD 700407612 ill VMPro Recordings Administ
32. 213 214 224 225 227 229 230 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 298 ANALOG 10 20 98 131 185 197 280 290 Swapping 131 Analog 16 Module 24 Analog DECT 36 Analog Expansion 28 104 Analog Expansion Module 38 Analog Phone Barrier Boxes 147 Analog Phone Extensions 30 144 Analog Phones 13 26 36 176 277 ANALOG Port 280 Analog Ports 321 Analog Telephone Ports 322 Analog Trunk Card 193 Analog Trunk Card Universal 192 Analog Trunk Channels 86 Number 86 Analog Trunk Module Connections 197 Analog Trunks 30 98 135 137 144 165 192 193 279 290 298 326 rear 290 Analog Digital Station V1 62 and or 318 Any set 157 Appearance Button Requirements 127 Applications Overview 54 ARA 40 55 running 55 Archiver 46 256 270 Area Code 158 AS NZ 3548 323 Async Data 322 AT amp T 158 Athlon 49 254 255 256 260 261 263 264 266 Athlon 64 49 Athlon XP 49 Athlon XP 3000 49 256 258 259 268 Athlon64 258 ATM16 28 70 104 192 193 197 ATM16 Analog Trunk 280 ATM4 14 16 135 164 185 187 192 193 280 319 ATM4 Trunk 279 ATM4 Trunk Cards 193 ATM4 Uni 192 298 ATM4 ATM4U 28 104 ATM4U 14 16 187 192 ATM4U Trunk Card 192 AT X2 169 171 AT X3 169 171 AT X4 169 171 AU 7 AUDIO 142 Audio I P 322 Audio In 13 176 281 AUDIO Port 281 Audio Quality 158 Audix 86 AUDIX Voicemail 274 298 Austel 324 Australia 40 218 219 224 225 227 242 243 252 298 324
33. 24 V 35 and X 21 WAN services The module connects to the control unit via a LAN port rather than an expansion port e The WANS has been superseded by the WAN3 10 100 and is not supported by IP Office 3 2 and higher e IP Office systems are restricted to a maximum of 2 WANS modules regardless of the control unit type Installation Manual Page 21 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Power Supplies Each IP Office control and expansion module is supplied with its own external power supply unit PSU This requires a switched power outlet socket rated at 110 240V ac 50 60Hz The PSU s include an integral 1 5 meter lead for connection to the control unit or expansion module A power cord for connection from the PSU to the power outlet is not included as this varies by locale The appropriate power cord must be ordered separately or sourced locally Additional power supply units are required for 4450 EU24 XM24 and T3 DSS add on modules and may also be required for 4600 Series 5600 Series IP phones e Some units previously supplied with a 40W unearthed PSU are now approved for and supplied with a 60W earthed PSU That changes affects the IP412 So8 and WANS 10 100 units IP Office Units and Modules IP Phones and Phone Add Ons Details 40W PSU 45W Earthed 60W 1151C1 1151C2 PSU Earthed PSU SAP Code 700210792 700284938 700357387 700356447 700356454 Connector Type e Small Phones with XM24 Phone
34. 2410 However the 5410 phone is only supported on IP Office Feature Detail DS port 12 6 buttons x 2 pages ld 29 characters x 5 lines 168 x 80 pixels Supported Add Ons Standard DCP Phone Keys lt EA MESSAGES HOLD 4 l TRANSFER 7 w VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v E CONFERENCE _____ _ Variant SAP Code Installation Manual Page 234 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 5420D This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 2410 However the 5410 phone is only supported on IP Office Feature Detail DS port IP Office Release Programmable Buttons 24 8 buttons x 3 pages Speaker Microphone Supported Add Ons EU24 201B Standard DCP Phone Keys lt ST SPEAKER x HEADSET f MUTE ta VOLUME UP E MESSAGES HOLD 40 TRANSFER v w VOLUME DOWN DROP 4 REDIAL v WE CONFERENCE Variant SAP Code 700203797 700229735 Noisy Location Handset 700229743 700229727 700381635 700381650 700381817 700356447 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup With CATS cable 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord USA 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 Installation Manual Page 235 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 5601 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4601 However the 5601 phone is only support
35. 3 3 Interconnect Cable modules except WAN3 modules RJ45 to RJ45 Blue LAN Cable Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP 700213487 3m 9 10 100m 328 devices RJ45 to RJ45 Grey LAN Interconnect Connects WAN3 module to the control 700213465 1m 3 3 Cable unit Replace with a LAN crossover cable for 1P412 control units Green LAN Crossover Used for connection of IP devices to LAN 700213473 3m 9 10 100m 328 Cable ports on the IP412 control unit Black V 24 WAN Cable 37 Way D type plug to 25 way D type 700213416 3m 9 10 5m 16 5 plug V 35 WAN Cable 37 Way D type plug to 34 way MRAC 700213424 3m 9 10 5m 16 5 plug X 21 WAN Cable 37 Way D type plug to 15 way D type 700213408 3m 9 10 5m 16 5 plug The table below details the maximum total cable distances for DS and analog extensions using different cable types Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP Telephone AWG22 AWG24 AWG26 CW1308 0 65mm 0 5mm 0 4mm 2400 5400 Series 1670m 5500 110m 3500 670m 2200 400m 1310 4406D Phone 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 400m 1310 T3 Series Upn 1000m 8280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 Installation Manual Page 27 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Grounding Use of ground connections reduces the likelihood of problems in most telephony and data systems This is especially important in buildings where multiple items of equipme
36. 391mm 15 5 Other Control Units and External Expansion Modules Fimme 2 08 L 6ll d45mme 17 5 Unit 245rmm o 7 plus clearance 395mm 15 7 Installation Manual Page 59 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Environmental requirements The planned location must meet the following requirements If being installed into a rack system these are requirements for within the rack 1 OD a Oe ON oS oe N 2 11 12 13 14 L Temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F O Humidity 10 to 95 non condensing L Check there are no flammable materials in the area LI Check there is no possibility of flooding L Check that no other machinery or equipment needs to be moved first L Check that it is not an excessively dusty atmosphere L Check that the area is unlikely to suffer rapid changes in temperature and humidity L Check for the proximity of strong magnetic fields sources of radio frequency and other electrical interference L Check there are no corrosive chemicals or gasses O Check there is no excessive vibration or potential of excessive vibration especially of any mounting surface L Check that where telephones are installed in another building that the appropriate protectors and protective grounds are fitted see Out of Building Telephone Installation L Check there is suitable lighting for installation system programming and future maintena
37. 4 RJ45 sockets for ETSI BRI trunk connections with each trunk supporting 2B D channels e The trunk card ports include 100 ohm termination Country Control Unit SAP Code IP400 BRI All Supported on all control units 700185168 IP400 BRI 8 UNI All except China 700262017 e These cards include two plastic spacer pegs for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of the control unit The blanking plate is not required with the Small Office Edition which has removable sections in the rear panel T1 PRI Trunk Cards These trunk cards support 23B D primary rate US PRI trunks and 24B T1 robbed bit trunks The mode of operation is selected within the IP Office configuration The T1 PRI card includes an integral CSU DSU that can be activated through the IP Office Monitor application PRI Trunk Cards Country Control Units SAP Code IP400 PRI 24 North Supported on all control units 700185200 T1 America IP400 PRI 48 North Supported only on the IP412 and Slot A of 700185218 T1 America the IP406 V2 e These cards include two plastic spacer pegs for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of the control unit The blanking plate is not required with the Small Office Edition which has removable sections in the rear panel Installation Manual Page 194 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components E1 PRI Trunk Cards These cards support primary rate trunks providi
38. 5 The name and password request is displayed As the system has been upgrade to IP Office 3 2 software the name and password now requested are a Service User name and password stored within the IP Office The default name and password for security settings access are security and securitypwd IP Office Login IP Office 1P40642 P 406 DS Service User Password Installation Manual Page 113 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 6 The Manager should load and display the IP Office control unit s security settings w Avaya IP Office Manager 5 2 10 security File Edit Wiew Tools Help Rights Group Ad F Security Soa pee oper Fight i Services Uperator Group Read all configuration a pei RIONE Write all configuration Service Users i Menge configuration Default configuration Reboot immediately Reboot when tree Reboot at time of day Received BOOTP request For 001125465491 unable to process 7 Select Bd General On the tab displayed the Security Administrator section contains the default name and password used to access the IP Office s security settings Click Change and set a new password The default password is securitypwd Click OK 8 Click OK to save the changes to that tab 9 Select io Service Users This tab shows the settings for one of the Service Users who have names and passwords used for access to the configuration settings on the I
39. Additional Processes Requirement Connection from the expansion module to the phone must be via a surge protector at each end and via the primary protection point in each building IP Office Barrier Box The IP Office expansion module and Supports a control unit and IROB devices must be single connected to the protective ground point connection in their building Maximum of 16 on any expansion module Analog Phone Extensions l Phones Expansion module POT or PHONE ports only The between building connection must be via earthed ducting preferable underground The cable must not be exposed externally at any point Avaya 146C CO Line Protector Supports up to 4 two wire lines For installations in the Republic of South Africa the fitting of surge protection on analog trunks is a requirement Analog Trunks For other locations where the risk of lightning strikes is felt to be high additional protection of incoming analog trunks is recommended Avaya 146G Surge Protector Connections from an IP Office Ext O P port to an external relay device must be via a surge protector External Output Switch Page 145 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 IP Office Installation DS Phone IROB Installation When DS phone extensions are required in another building additional protective equipment must be used in the form of IROB 146E devices and protective earth connec
40. Answer 47 fra 40 189 Frame Relay 165 France 40 frb 40 frc 40 189 Free EXPANSION 98 Free LAN 100 Free Standing 62 free standing 32 stackable 32 French 40 48 258 264 266 267 268 French Canadian 40 267 268 French German 48 French Canadian 189 From To 190 frs 40 Functional Grounding 98 100 functions 230 232 233 234 235 236 239 240 2402D 233 2410 234 235 4601 236 4620SW 230 239 240 4621SW 232 Further Information 320 FWV 120 G Gain 321 Gang 217 GENT 226 228 231 298 GEN1 4606 298 GEN2 226 228 231 298 General Licenses 298 German 40 48 189 258 264 266 267 268 Germany 40 get 24 169 171 172 Loader 169 171 172 VA 24 grant 325 Telepermit 325 Greece 40 Greek 40 267 268 Green 289 Green White 282 283 289 292 green yellow 104 149 Connect 149 GREY 289 Ground Chassis 151 288 Grounding 92 98 100 E1R2 Coaxial Connections 92 Requirements 98 100 Group 73 H H 323 53 271 H 323 IP 53 H 323 IP Phones 36 38 HAC 120 Handset 247 Handset Cords 25ft 298 Handset HIP QD CORD 298 handsfree 43 264 Hard Disk Space 78 262 hardphones 36 Hardware Hardware 158 Hardware Software 158 Hazard Symbol 318 healthcare 216 Hearing 142 326 Aid Compatibility 326 system s 142 Hello 169 172 Help 273 Helpline 320 call 320 Hence Avaya IP Office 318 Page 332 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Highlands Ranch 320 HOLD RESET 131 holdmusic wav 142 hold
41. Check that an external power supply unit has been included with the control unit Connect the external power supply unit to the control unit Connect the power cord from the power supply outlet to the external power supply unit Switch on power to the control unit Observe the center LED on the front of the control unit on the far right on a Small Office Edition control unit Initially this LED will be red After approximately 10 seconds it should change to green During this time other LED s may flash as the unit goes through its power on self test cycle Go oe N 6 Proceed to 04 Receiving the Configuration Installation Manual Page 80 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation IP Office Default Settings The following are the basic default configuration settings for an IP Office system MAC address of the control unit License Server IP Address 255 255 255 255 LAN1 IP address 192 168 42 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 LAN2 AP Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Mode Server e Extensions and Users A user is automatically created for each physical extension port detected in the system That covers integral ports on the control unit and ports of any expansion modules detected during the control unit power up e Users are assigned extension numbers starting from 201 e User names take the form Extn201 Extn202 e Hunt Group A single hunt group 200 called Main is created and the first 10 users
42. Components IP406 V2 Control Unit The IP406 V2 includes 8 digital station DS and 2 analog phone PHONE ports It includes an eight port Ethernet LAN switch unmanaged Layer 2 and Compact Flash card slot for an optional embedded voicemail memory card It supports up to 6 external expansion modules plus IP extensions controlled through its LAN interface The IP406 V2 also includes automatic gain control AGC on its conference chip and performs IPSec tunneling through hardware rather than software Feature Capacity Maximum 190 of various types in combination Analog only 182 DS only 188 IP Extensions only 190 Conference Parties 64 Conference chip includes automatic gain control AGC i Trunks Cards 2 Trunk card slots All types supported Dual PRI trunk cards in Slot A only 40 of which 20 usable for Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV connection sessions subject to available Voicemail Pro Port and TAPI WAV licenses Software Level e IP Office core software level 2 1 27 minimum e Bin file ip406u bin Power Supply The unit is supplied with an earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the unit s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit The unit is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The unit can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system u
43. From main building via primary protection in both buildings Center Screw Connect to main building protective ground Use 18AWG minimum wire with a green and yellow sleeve Right Hand Screw Not used Installation Manual Page 147 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 1 The following wires must be kept apart that is not routed in the same bundle e Earth leads from the barrier box to the IP400 Phone modules e Internal wires for example extension leads going directly to the IP400 Phone modules e Wires from external telephone going directly to the barrier boxes IP Office Barrier Boxes SAP Code IP400 Phone Barrier Box 81V 700293897 Use with Phone V1 module Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and a functional earth lead IP400 Phone Barrier Box V2 101V 192228 Use with Phone V2 module Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and a functional earth lead Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit 700293905 Installation Manual Page 148 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Rack Mounting Barrier Boxes Where more than 3 Phone Barrier Boxes are used they must be rack mounted The Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit SAP Code 700293905 supports up to 8 Phone Barrier Boxes 1 Unscrew the two screws arranged diagonally at the front of each barrier box and use these same screws to reattach the barrier box to the rack mounting strip 2 Each barrier box is supplied with a
44. IP Office modules this is not recommend as the connection lock is not positive and may become disconnected DS ports on Digital Station V1 V2 expansion modules can be connected to out of building extensions If this is the case connection must be made via suitable protective devices IROB 146E at each end and via each building primary protection In addition the Digital Station module must be connected to a protective ground DS ports on IP Office control units must not be connected to out of building extensions Structured Cabling Line Cord This is an RJ45 to RJ11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ45 port to a DS phone It can also be used for two wire analog phone extensions This cable is not suitable for connection from an Avaya 1151C1 B2 power supply unit to a DS phone with a 4450 EU24 or XM24 add on module In those cases the cables supplied with the power supply unit and the add on module should be used RJ45 Rw 4 Meters 3 2 Feet 8 1 dig 3 th j 4 IP Office Phone DS Port Pin Description Pin Port LL pi Signal 1 3_ 6 Notused 5_ 7 Notused _ 6_ 8 Notused e SAP Code 700047871 Installation Manual Page 285 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation DTE Port These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units and external expansion modules The DTE ports on the control units can be used for system ma
45. June 2006 Pre Configuration Off Line Configuration Manager supports a number of methods by which the configuration of an IP Office system can be setup in advanced of the physical IP Office This allows pre configuration and speeds up the actual on site installation It also allows potential configuration questions to be raised and resolved with the customer in advance of the on site installation reducing the number of post installation changes required e Creating a New Configuration Manager can be used to create a new configuration specifying the locale control unit type expansion modules and trunk cards in the process This then gives a default configuration onto which the customer requirements can be prepared e Importing Settings Manager can import settings in the form a simple CSV files It can also be used to export the settings from another IP Office system s configuration and then import those settings into a different configuration Installation Manual Page 71 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Creating a New Configuration Manager can be used to create a new configuration without connecting to an IP Office system During the process you can specify the locale of the system what type of trunk cards it uses and what type of control unit and expansion modules to include This allows the creation of a configuration prior to installation of the real system and so can be used to speed
46. LAN Port 289 LAN1 62 80 289 LAN2 62 80 185 289 LANM 86 Large 4400 Series Stand 222 223 4412D 4424D 222 223 Large Stand 298 4412D 298 Latin Spanish 40 48 258 264 266 267 268 LAW 86 Layer 179 279 layer 2 LAN 289 layer 3 Ethernet 289 layer 3 LAN 289 lead 38 misoperation 38 LED 80 82 98 199 289 Left Channel 281 Legal Requirements 142 Level 2 0 106 levels 7 IP Office 7 LIC 276 298 Licence Keys 175 License 73 155 156 License Key Server 165 License Keys 35 152 License Keys CCC 270 License Keys CTI 272 License Keys General 271 License Keys Phone Manager 273 License Keys Voicemail 274 License Name 62 License Server IP Address 80 155 156 set 155 License License Key 73 Lightning 318 Protection Hazard Symbols 318 limits 322 323 Class 323 SELV 322 Line 134 135 137 146 Line Group 158 Incoming 158 Outgoing 158 Line Group ID 157 Line Group ID 701 157 Line Group ID 702 157 Repeat 157 LINE IN 125 Line Isolation Module 324 Line Number 158 Line Out 281 Line Reversal 203 205 Line Signalling Type 135 set 135 Line Sub Type 158 Link 165 244 245 246 251 Index T3 UPN 244 245 246 voicemail 165 linkDown 165 linkUp 165 listen 142 system s 142 Lite 40 43 49 264 Lithium 317 Lithium Batteries 317 Load Unload MIBs 161 Loader 169 171 172 get 169 171 172 Locale 40 72 Select 72 Locale Specific Power Cord 80 localhost 260 Locate 120 Manager 120 log 160 SNM
47. Manager select File Advanced Reboot and reboot the IP Office system Following the system restart the 2400 and 5400 Series phones will display Upgrading firmware please wait and then FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS Once all the phones have completed their upgrade double click on turn_off bat Installation Manual Page 124 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 B Phone Installation Installing an EU24 Add On The EU24 add on is supported on IP Office 3 0 and higher It provides an additional 24 programmable feature keys for the associated phone The action provided by each of these keys is set through the IP Office configuration The EU24BL is supported on IP Office 3 1 or higher and provides a backlight function that matches the same facility on the 4621 phone A single EU24 or Eu24BL is supported on the following phones A maximum of eight EU24 and or EU24BL per IP Office system Phone EU24 EU24BL oso 4 x e Use Only the Cables Supplied Only the cable supplied with the EU24 EU24BL should for connection to the EU24 EU24BL This cable should only be connected to the port marked EU24 on suitable phones Doing otherwise will cause damage to the EU24 EU24BL and the equipment to which it is attached e Additional Power Supply Must Be Used When used with DS port phones the EU24 and EU24BL require the phone to use an additional power supply unit either an Avaya 1151C1 or an Avaya 1151C2 For IP phones use of
48. Manual Page 213 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 2420D Feature Details DS port IP Office Release Programmable Buttons 24 8 buttons x 3 pages Speaker Microphone Display 29 characters x 7 lines Supported Add Ons EU24 201B Standard DCP Phone Keys H SPEAKER lt amp HEADSET lt MUTE zt VOLUME UP EA MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER w VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CW CONFERENCE VEET SAP Code Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 US 1151C1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 100356447 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700356454 Europe 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 Installation Manual Page 214 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 3616 This is an 802 11b WiFi phone It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor AVPP Feature Detail Message Waiting Lamp Upgradable Firmware E Variant SAP Code Installation Manual Page 215 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 3620 This is an 802 11b WiFi phone It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor AVPP The 3620 is similar to the 3616 but has been designed for use in healthcare environments It is waterproof and has a back lit display Detail Message Waiting Lamp etl
49. Mounting Instructions 96 Rack Mounting Kits 32 96 177 179 181 183 185 197 199 201 203 207 209 298 RAM 49 78 106 169 171 172 254 255 256 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 266 267 268 Page 336 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 RAM 256MB 254 256 262 263 RAS 80 141 name 141 routed 80 read 7 Avaya Technical Bulletins 7 realtime 46 256 Provides 46 256 rear 280 287 290 292 293 Analog Trunk 290 IP Office 280 287 292 WAN3 293 Reboot 120 Receive Clock 293 294 295 Receive Data 293 294 295 Receive Gain Settings 321 PRI T1 321 Receiving 84 116 155 Configuration 84 116 IP Office 155 records 45 260 SMDR file 45 260 Refresh 84 106 112 116 REL 120 Relabel 211 Relay Off 150 Relay On 150 Relay Pulse 150 Remote Access 55 Removal 8 297 Certain Hazardous Substances 8 297 Remove 156 Remove Programs 78 REN 280 291 325 326 sum 326 Renumber Extension 129 repacking 77 Repair 156 Repeat 157 Line Group ID 702 157 Report Manager 46 256 Report Viewer 256 270 298 representatives 317 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Republic 28 30 98 104 144 192 193 197 280 South Africa 28 30 98 104 144 192 193 197 280 Request 293 Send 293 Requirements 30 98 100 144 Cabling 30 144 Grounding 98 100 requires 16 44 47 92 106 116 129 131 196 267 298 BOOTP 106 IEC60320 C13 298 IP Office 44 92 129 131 196 267 Service User
50. Office Monitor application confirm that the correct number of modem channels are now reported They are shown by the value MDM when Monitor first connects to the control unit Installation Manual Page 91 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 09 Fitting Trunk Interface Cards e For Small Office Edition control units go to Stage 9c Fitting Trunk Cards Small Office Edition All trunk cards are supplied with 2 plastic snap in spacer pegs and a blanking plate appropriate to the cards ports E1R2 coaxial trunk cards include additional grounding strap screws and bolts Except where otherwise indicated it is recommended that Slot B is used first Di Warnings 1 Correct anti static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards 2 During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be switched off and disconnected CA Parts and Equipment Required 1 O Trunk Card or Cards Check that the correct card has been supplied The number and maximum capacity supported varies between different IP Office control units All cards are supplied with 2 plastic snap in spacer pegs Trunk Cards SOE 1P403 1P406 IP412 V1 v2 Analog Trunk Card ATM4 fal Mail ed be a Analog Trunk Card ATM4U EA Quad BRI Trunk Card gt Single E1 PRI Trunk Cards e MF ia Single E1R2 Trunk Cards Re e Dual PRI Trunk Cards libia ra Tools Required 1 O Cross head screwdriver
51. Page 219 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 3810 The phone uses a wireless 900MHZ digital protocol to connect to its base station The base station connects to an IP Office DS port The base station also requires a power outlet socket Additional power outlet sockets are required for the phone charger Depending on coverage overlap between three and five 3810 s can be connected to the same IP Office This phone is supported in North America only Feature Detail Connects via DS port IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Handsfree I Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp Upgradable Firmware ltem SAP Code 3810 Set Includes phone base station charger belt clip and power supply units for 700305105 charger and base station Installation Manual Page 220 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 4406D This phone is supported in North America only 4406D Feature Detail Speaker Microphone lines Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware Standard DCP Phone Keys SPEAKER x 4 HEADSET MUTE ita VOLUME UP x EA MESSAGES amp HOLD TRANSFER v w VOLUME DOWN x tt DROP 4 REDIAL KW CONFERENCE Item SAP Code Installation Manual Page 221 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 4412D This phone is supported in North America only 4412D Fe
52. Pro IP400 171988 Pro Also enables four TAPI WAV file ports CTI same pools as used for voicemail ports The maximum number of simultaneous TAPI WAV user calls and voicemail users is determined by the IP Office control unit type IP401 2 IP403 and Small Office Edition 10 IP406 20 IP412 30 Allows streaming of WAV files using TAPILink Pro for 3rd party voice IP400 177466 applications This is a per user license TAPI Note that TAPI WAV calls use system data channels taken from the a Installation Manual Page 272 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components License Keys Phone Manager License shows the name as it appears in the IP Office configuration RFA Name is the name used for the orderable item License Description RFA Name Phone Manager Enables Phone Manager Pro for 1 5 10 20 50 IP400 177468 Pro per seat 100 or unlimited users The user s Phone Manager Phone mode is set through the IP Office configuration Manager 177469 a INN User Telephony Phone Manager Type Pro ole a mr o pr Phone Manager Enables Phone Manager Pro IP softphone IP400 1 1 1992 Pro IP Audio operation for a user IPPRO Tfr 5 174463 piu per Note Also requires the user to have a Phone iano soli Manager Pro license 174464 e In addition to entering Phone Manager licenses each user is individually configured for the expected Phone Manager type e During operation the number of Phone Mana
53. Rack Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Unboxed 2 8Kg 6 3lbs Boxed 4 1Kg 9 2lbs Installation Manual Page 207 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation So8 Module Connections AMES P400 Sob EXPANSION RJ45 socket Used for connection of ISDN terminal devices Note These ports appear a lines within the IP Office configuration However they cannot be used for connection to external BRI lines DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module DTE 25 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module Function ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional ground if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power
54. Status 64MB RAM Pentium Ill Celeron 3 Athlon B For OS of Windows XP 50MB disk S00MHZ 800Mhz 650MHz minimum RAM increases to space 256MB System 128MB RAM Pentium Ill Celeron 3 Athlon B For OS of Windows XP Monitor 10GB disk S00MHZ 600Mhz 650MHz minimum RAM increases to space 256MB Contact 128MB RAM Pentium Ill Celeron 3 Athlon B For OS of Windows XP Center View 10GB disk 800MHz 800Mhz 650MHz minimum RAM increases to CCV space 256MB CCC Reporter Internet Any Any Any Any desktop machine can Explorer 6 0 be used as long as it is or above capable of running IE6 Wallboard 128MB RAM Any Any Any 1 4GHz The Wallboard Server Server 10GB free 1 4GHZ 1 7GHz MUST reside on the same disk space PC as the Delta Server Wallboard 128MB RAM Pentium III Celeron3 Athlon B For OS of Windows XP Client 10GB disk 600MHZ 600Mhz 650MHz minimum RAM increases to space 256MB PC Wallboard 128MB RAM Pentium Ill Celeron3 Athlon B For OS of Windows XP 10GB disk 800MHz 800Mhz 650MHz minimum RAM increases to space 256MB Installation Manual Page 51 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Operating Systems for IP Office 3 2 The range of Windows operating systems against which IP Office 3 2 applications are tested and supported has been expanded to include Windows 2003 server The following table gives a summary of the Server amp Client Operating Systems OS on which
55. Twisted ee Mc o TransmitA Twisted Tx B transmit B Pair 9 a eta ona ind E esca i m indicate A Twisted nd B Indicate B Pair 12 8 ecikcA CiockA__ Twisted 6 22 Clk B Clock B Pair 13 At the IP Office end pin 7 is connected to pin 6 At the IP Office end pin 19 is connected to the Screened Cable Drain Wire e Supply This cable is not supplied with the control unit or WAN3 module It must be ordered separately e SAP Code 700213408 e Cable 6 twisted pair screened cable each core is 7 0 203mm 24 AWG tinned copper stranded wire nominal capacitance of 98pF m impedance of 77ohms at 1MHz screened with aluminized tape and a tinned copper wire drain e Maximum Length 5m 16 5 This is the maximum length that should be used if the above cable is replaced with an alternate cable Installation Manual Page 296 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components SAP Codes Equipment Availability SAP codes and details of specific items within this documentation are for reference only Items available in any specific locale should be confirmed against the local Avaya IP Office price list for that locale The local price list may also include additional items relative to the installation requirements of that locale RoHS RoHS is an European Union directive for the Removal of Certain Hazardous Substances from Electrical and Electronic Equipment Similar legislation has
56. a device external to the building connection must be via an Avaya 146G Surge Protector and a protective ground connection must be provided on the IP Office control unit EXT O P Pin Description Switch 2 1 Switch 1 Ensure that this pin is always at a EXT a positive voltage with respect to Pin 3 O gt 35mm Stereo 2 Switch 2 Ensure that this pin is always at a 73 Jack Flug positive voltage with respect to Pin 3 _ 3 0 Volts Ground Chassis Switch 1 e Switching Capacity 0 7A e Maximum Voltage 55V d c e On state resistance 0 7 ohms e Short circuit current 1A e Reverse circuit current capacity 1 4A 3 5mm stereo audio jack plugs are frequently sold as pre wired sealed modules It may be necessary to use a multi meter to determine the wiring connections from an available plug Typically 3 common to both relays is the cable screen Page 288 Installation Manual 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office 3 2 System Components LAN Port These ports are found on the front of IP Office control units and the WAN3 expansion module They are used for connection to IP LAN s and IP devices On the WAN3 module the port is used for direct connection to a control unit All IP Office LAN ports are 10 100Mbps auto sensing Operation varies as follows IP403 and These modules have 8 ports acting as a half duplex LAN hub Port 8 can be switched IP406 V1 from MDIX to MDI operation using the UPLINK butt
57. and WAN3 10 100 H IP Addresses See Supported Country Locales Time Server IP Address E Default 255 255 255 255 TFTP Server IP Address A Default Blank E Default 192 168 42 1 ee ee Default 255 255 255 0 Default 192 168 43 1 LAN2 IP Address Subnet Mask ZZZ Default 255 255 255 0 LAN1 IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP Mode O Server O Dial In Only O Client Server L Disabled Number of DHCP Default 200 Addresses DHCP Mode O Server O Dial In Only O Client Server O Disabled Number of DHCP Default 200 Addresses Installation Manual Page 64 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Planning I Licenses Feature Key Type O Serial O USB Serial on Small Office Edition IP406 V2 and IP412 O Parallel only Feature Key Serial Feature Key Server IP Address License Name Key Default 255 255 255 255 Blank if using serial port Feature Key J Dial Plan Base Numbering Base Extension Number por ai 01 Base Line Number K Voicemail Voicemail Type O Embedded Integral Small Office Edition and IP406 V2 only L Voicemail Lite L Voicemail Pro L Centralized Voicemail Pro Requires SCN IP trunk to IP Office hosting Voicemail Pro C Centralized Intuity Audix Voicemail CS Server IP Voicemail Lite Pro Default 255 255 255 255 Address Installation Manual Page 65 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation L Call Handling
58. and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of the control unit Except where otherwise indicated it is recommended that Slot B is used first All versions of the Small Office Edition control include either two or four integral analog trunk ports on the front of the unit In addition a single trunk card can be fitted to the rear of the unit e Control units with analog trunk cards of any kind and coaxial E1R2 trunk cards must be grounded Installation Manual Page 14 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview The following trunk card types are available Trunk Cards SOE IP403 IP406 IP412 V1 V2 Analog Trunk Card ATM4 Provides 4 RJ45 loop start analog trunk ports The card is available in several locale specific variants This card has been superseded by the ATM4U card below Additional loop or ground start analog trunks can also be added using Analog Trunk external expansion modules Analog Trunk Card ATM4U Provides 4 RJ45 loop start analog trunk ports as per the ATM4 above but available in a single worldwide variant Also supports adjustable echo cancellation on IP Office 3 1 Additional loop or ground start analog trunks can also be added using Analog Trunk external expansion modules Quad BRI Trunk Card Provides support for 4 RJ45 BRI 2B D trunk ports These can be configured to ETSI or AusTS013 operation The ports include 1000hm termination Single PRI T1 Trunk Cards Supports P
59. are wearing an anti static wrist strap connected to a suitable ground point Remove the 7 screws fixing the IP Office control unit cover and slide the cover off the control unit Locate the position for the card and its jumper block Using the card as a template locate the two holes in the control unit circuit board Insert the spacer pegs into these holes Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located push the card onto the jumper block and spacer pegs If other cards are being fitted proceed to 08 Fitting Modem Cards Slide the control unit cover back on and replace the cover screws Reapply power to the control unit and check that it restarts correctly Using the IP Office Monitor application confirm that the correct number of voice compression channels are reported They are shown by the value VCOMP at the start of the Monitor trace Page 89 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 08 Fitting Modem Cards e Ifno modem card is being fitted into the system proceed to 09 Fitting Trunk Cards E Objective To fit and verify the presence of a modem card Di Warnings 1 Correct anti static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards 2 During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be switched off and disconnected Parts and Equipment Required 1 O Modem Card Check that the correct card has been supplied The number and
60. cases these are the minimum PC specifications Feature Key 256MB RAM Pentium III Celeron3 Athlon B Server PC 1MB free disk 800MHz 800Mhz 650MHz space For all voicemail servers also allow 1MB per minute for message and greeting storage Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Page 50 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Client Applications Dependencies Applications Minimum PC Intel Intel Resources ide sa Conferencing Internet a desktop machine can Web Client Explorer 6 or be used as long as it is above capable of running IE6 Phone 64MB RAM Pentium Ill Celeron3 Athlon B A sound card is needed if Manager 160MB free 800MHz 800Mhz 650MHz audio features are required Lite Pro disk space Phone 64MB RAM Pentium Ill Celeron3 Athlon B A sound card is needed SoftPhone space SoftConsole 128MB RAM Pentium Ill Celeron3 Athlon B A maximum of four with 1GB of 800MHz SoftConsole applications free disk can be run per system a space license controls the number of simultaneous SoftConsole users A sound card is needed if audio features are required ContactStore Internet Any Any Any Any desktop machine can Web client Explorer 6 0 be used as long as it is or above capable of running IE6 IP Office 128MB RAM Pentium4 Not AMD Opteron For Windows XP minimum Manager 1GB disk 600Mhz tested Athlon 64 or recommend RAM increases space Athlon XP to 256MB Call
61. channel is required for each Non IP Non IP No channel used Phone or Phone or Trunk Trunk Conference Calls 1 voice compression channel per IP phone Conference calls are managed by the conference chip which is on the IP Office s TDM bus Therefore a voice compression channel is required for each IP device involved in the conference Page Calls 1 voice compression channel per audio codec being used by any IP devices involved Voicemail Calls Calls to the IP Office voicemail servers Voice Mail Pro Voicemail Lite and Embedded Voicemail are treated as data calls from the TDM bus Therefore the servers can be treated as TDM devices to determine whether a VCM channel is required or not On the Small Office Edition each call to the embedded voicemail card uses a voice compression channel This is in addition to any voice compression channel required for the call to reach the TDM bus Installation Manual Page 191 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Trunks Cards Analog Trunk Card Universal ATM4U This card supersedes the previous Analog Trunk cards and is referred to as the ATM4U It can be identified by a label on the base of the card The card is supported on IP Office software 2 1 36 and higher Unlike the previous ATM4 card the same ATM4U card variant can be used in all locales For systems running IP Office software 3 1 or higher the echo cancellation used on each trunk can be sw
62. cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Item Country 700185077 CEE7 7 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P 700289770 I China China 700261977 Rack Mounting Kit 700210800 Installation Manual Page 208 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP400 WAN3 Module The IP400 WAN3 module can be used to add an additional 3 WAN ports to an IP Office system These ports are used for V 24 V 35 and X 21 WAN services Unlike other external expansion modules the WAN3 module connects to the IP Office control unit via LAN ports It has its own IP address which during initial setup is obtained by DHCP The WANS exists in two variants The original WAN3 only supported a 10Mbps LAN connection This has been superseded by the WAN3 10 100 which supports a 10Mbps 100Mbps LAN connection Feature Details Locales Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level WANS 10 IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file nawan3 bin WAN83 10 100 IP Office core software level 1 4 minimum Bin file ipwan3 bin Included Power supply unit see below and LAN Interconnect cable Power Supply The unit is supplied with an earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the unit s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit e Older units were
63. designed for use in call centers It provides a range of both real time and historical reporting options CCC consists of a CCC Server application that receives call information from the IP Office Delta Server and a number of client applications for the displaying of that information CCC and its clients are controlled by a range of licenses entered into the IP Office configuration e The CCC server applications are listed below They are installed onto the same PC e CCC Archiver The Archiver manages the collection and storage of call activity information e Wallboard Manager Wallboards provide current information on the number of calls waiting response times and service levels Wallboard Manager provides the ability to control both physical wallboards and PC wallboards e The CCC clients are e Call Center View CCV Provides a realtime information about call center activity e Alarm Reporter Provides real time and past 7 days information on alarms that have occurred within the call center e PC Wallboard The PC Wallboard allows call center agents and supervisors to display real time call center performance information on their Windows PC screen e Report Manager Provides in depth historical reporting on calls agents and groups e Workforce Management This application allows CCC to share information with a third party agent scheduling application Blue Pumpkin Installation Manual Page 46 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issu
64. for potential problems Installation Manual Page 42 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview User Applications Through its LAN interfaces the IP Office is able to let users run a number of Windows applications that operate in parallel with their telephones These applications are installed from the IP Office User Applications CD Some of them require licenses to be entered into the IP Office system s configuration to enable features or to set the number of simultaneous users IP Office Phone Manager Phone Manager allows a user to control and monitor their phone through their PC For Avaya phones that support handsfree operation Phone Manager can be used to make and answer calls During use Phone Manager records details of calls made answered and missed It can also be configured to show the status of other users on the system Phone Manager also allows the user to access and change many of the setting stored in the IP Office configuration that relate to their own phone operation for example their forwarding destination numbers Phone Manager software can operate in several modes e Phone Manager Lite The default mode of Phone Manager Requires no license this application can be installed for any IP Office user e Phone Manager Pro Users configured for Pro mode are able to access a range of additional features Phone manager Pro requires entry of licenses into the IP Office system The licenses also contr
65. for which the necessary prompts are not available Voicemail Lite will attempt the best match using a sequence of alternate locales e VM Pro Indicates that the locale is recognized by Voicemail Pro and appropriate language prompts are then used For an unsupported locale is used or one for which the necessary prompts are not available Voicemail Lite will attempt the best match using a sequence of alternate locales For example French Canadian frc fallback to French fra then US English enu and finally UK English eng Note that the languages available are selectable during Voicemail Pro installation For further details refer to the Voicemail Pro manual Installation Manual Page 41 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP Office Programming and Maintenance Applications The following Windows applications are used to program and maintain an IP Office system They run on PC s connected to the IP Office system via its LAN interface These applications are all provided on the IP Office Administrator Applications CD and don t require any licenses Typically with the exception of SNMP all these applications would be installed onto a single PC on the customer s LAN in order to ensure that each is available on site if required Due to the nature of the applications this should be a secure PC If a voicemail server PC is also being installed the same PC can be used for the programming and maintenanc
66. half duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing Port 8 can be switched from MDIX standard LAN to MDI crossover operation using the UPLINK button on the control unit In MDIX Out MDI Used for trunk cards of all types except Dual PRI trunk cards Normally Slot B should be SLOTB used first Trunks cards are supplied with replacement external blanking plates suitable ente for the trunk card port connections USB Notused WAN _ 37 Way D Type socket Used for the connection of V 24 V 35 or X 21 WAN service Used for connection of a function or protective ground Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement On older modules where this screw is not present the left hand fixing screw of Slot B can be used All control units are available in either North America or Rest of World variants The choice controls various default settings of the unit For E911 support a North American variant control unit must be used The companding can be changed once a unit is installed Item Variant Country SAP Code IP403 Office DS mosom nS fe Nor merca 700560680 Control units are supplied with an external power supply unit but not a locale specific power cord Installation Manual Page 184 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Small Office Edition The IP Office Small Office Edition control unit shares many of the features of the other IP Office control un
67. if the RAS settings are given the same name as the Service and User they are automatically linked and become a WAN Service Ensure that the Encrypted Password option is not checked when using a WAN Service Edit the WANPort Note Do not create a new WANPort this is automatically detected If a WANPort is not displayed connect the WAN cable reboot the Control Unit and receive the configuration The WANPort configuration form should now be added Create an IP Route In the IP Address field enter the network address of the remote end not the IP address of the Control Unit Under Destination select the Service created above At Site B on IP address 192 168 45 1 1 Repeat the above process but altering the details to create a route from Site B to Site A Installation Manual Page 141 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Music on Hold MOH he IP Office can provide music on hold MOH in from either an internally stored file or from an externally connected audio input Legal Requirements You must ensure that any MOH source you use complies with copyright performing rights and other local and national legal requirements Internal Music on Hold File The IP Office can use an internal music on hold file that it stores in its nonpermanent memory If the IP Office loses power or is restarted the file is loaded as follows e Following a reboot the IP Office will try using TFTP to download a file
68. instead of n to avoid problems with Main The minus sign means the number is processed from the left and so will wait for the whole number e Line Group ID 701 e Incoming Number 100x e Destination Repeat for Line Group ID 702 etc Create Short codes for example e Short Code 100x e Telephone Number e Line Group ID 701 e Feature Dial SO calls dialed without the area code are handled locally without network charges Calls with area calls will go via the network Installation Manual Page 157 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation So8 Example 2 Video Conference In this example calls are routed to a Polycom Viewstation module connected to a SO port of the IP Office system The following settings were used on 4 incoming data channels of a PRI line e Line Number 5 e Incoming Line Group 95 e Channel Allocation 23 gt e Outgoing Line Group 95 1 e Switch Type 5ESS e Line Sub Type PRI e Provider AT amp T e Channels 1 4 e Direction Bothway e Bearer Data Service Accunet this is a important e Admin In Service To route an incoming video call on the PRI lines configured above to an SO8 module requires the following 1 Create a dial short code that has the SO port as its destination Line Group For this example the following was used e Short Code 1500 e Number e Feature Dial e Line Group 601 the SO8 port number 2 Create an Incoming Call R
69. is applied for auto detection to work Connection to a Digital Leased Circuit is made by connecting the WAN port on the rear of the module to the existing Network Terminating Module NTU via the appropriate X 21 V 35 or V 24 cable These WAN ports are identical to those on the IP403 406 412 control units These WAN ports must be clocked externally the IP Office does not provide a clock signal The clock signal is usually provided by the service provider but under some circumstances for example laser microwave or baseband modems extra provision must be made by the installer Function ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional ground if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Item Variant Country SAP Code P400 WAN3 All 700185028 IP400 WAN3 10 100 700262009 IEC60320 C13 Power Cord CEE7 16 700289762 cs Sy BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P 700289770 Installation Manual Page 210 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Phones 20DT DECT System Components 20D
70. is not linear the same UPS would support a 500VA 50 load for 16 minutes Therefore the lower the percentage of capacity used the increasingly longer the UPS runtime typically up to 8 hours maximum Remember also that for most UPS s the ratio of discharge to full recharge time is 1 10 e How many output sockets does the UPS provide Multiple UPS units may be required to ensure that every item of supported equipment has its own supply socket Installation Manual Page 24 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview The web site http ups avayaups com provides a calculator into which you can enter the equipment you want supported on a UPS It will then display various UPS options The site uses VA values for typical IP Office systems However if more specific values are required for a particular system the table below can be used to enter values IP412 Control Unit 25 Analog 16 Module 88 Digital Station 16 Module Digital Station 30 Module WAN3 Module 17 Typical IP Office System VA Typical IP Office System V VI La Individual Equipment IP406 V1 V2 Control Unit A Individual Equipment VA Phone 8 Module Phone 16 Module 23 Phone 30 Module Typical Server PC 600 Typical Desktop PC Mid Span PSU 6 ports Mid Span PSU 12 24 ports 300 e The 1151C2 power supply unit for Avaya H 323 IP phones includes a backup battery This typically provides 15 minutes backup at maximum load 20 W
71. is used to add additional DS ports to an IP Office system The DS module is available in 16 and 30 port variants referred to as DS16 and DS30 modules respectively The IP400 Digital Station Module has been superseded by the IP400 Digital Station Module V2 Feature Details Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file nadcp 16 bin Included si Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a 2 pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions _ Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Weight Unboxed 3 5Kg 7 8lbs Boxed 4 8Kg 10 8lbs Based on DS30 Installation Manual Page 201 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Digital Station Module Connections DE it OF 25 26 ST 25 29 3 MOI ie EXPANSION Description DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya
72. items of equipment are interconnected using long cable runs for example phone and data networks Therefore it is recommended that all IP Office modules are connected to a functional ground In some cases such as ground start trunks this is a functional requirement In other cases it may be a locale regulatory requirement and or a necessary protective step for example areas of high lightning risk e WARNING During installation do not assume that ground points are correctly connected to ground Test ground points before relying on them to ground connected equipment Installation Requirements e Mandatory Grounding The IP Office system must be grounding in the following situations e Where required by local regulatory requirements e On all Analog Expansion modules ATM16 and any control units containing an analog trunk card ATM4 ATM4U e Onanycontrol unit using coaxial E1R2 trunks e On Digital Station V2 and Phone V2 expansion modules e Mandatory Ground plus additional protective equipment Additional equipment will be required in the following situations Refer to Out of Building Telephone Installations e On any Digital Station or Phones expansion module connected to an extension located in another building e On all Analog Expansion modules ATM16 and any control units containing an analog trunk card ATM4 ATM4U in the Republic of South Africa e Optional Grounding The uses of grounding connections for scenarios
73. maximum capacity supported varies between different IP Office control units All cards are supplied with 2 plastic snap in spacer pegs Modem Cards SAP Code SOE IP403 1P406 IP412 Internal Modem Card 700343452 Provides 12 V 90 modem channels 4 only in the IP403 control unit Modem 2 Card 700185226 Provides 2 V 90 modem channels E j Tools Required 1 LJ Cross head screwdriver 2 O Anti static wrist strap and ground point 3 LJ IP Office Monitor application Installation Manual Page 90 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation 1 Gi 2 2 0 Procedure Installing Modem Cards 1 Checkthat correct card has been supplied 2 Ensure that you are wearing a anti static wrist strap connected to a suitable ground point 3 Remove the 7 screws fixing the IP Office control unit cover and slide the cover off the unit 4 Locate the position for the card and its jumper block 5 Using the card as a template locate the two holes in the control unit circuit board Insert the spacer pegs into these holes Lit e ee 6 Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located push the card onto the jumper block and spacer pegs 7 If other cards are being fitted proceed to 09 Fitting Trunk Cards 8 Slide the control unit cover back on and replace the cover screws 9 Reapply power to the control unit and check that it restarts correctly 10 Using the IP
74. modules discovered at controller start up and those present in the system configuration Trunk Interfaces Trap Analog BRI E1 E1R2 T1 PRI fevcenerayranreeient x Tv vf v lt _ e Where ipoGenEntityFailureEvent and ipoGenEntityOperationalEvent traps are issued in relation to link status changes Integral Modules Trap Modem Voice Compressor jpoGenEntityFailureEvent a ooo oo ipoGenEntityOperationalEvent ox ooo oo e Where ipoGenEntityFailureEvent and ipoGenEntityOperationalEvent traps are issued for voice compressor modules in relation to data access problems that result in code reload Other Plug In Modules e The ipoGenEntityChangeEvent trap is issued for changes to the PCMCIA card slot population on the IP Office Small Office Edition control unit IPO PHONES MIB ipoPhonesChangeEvent Upon change of a DS or IP extension phone type after normal start up No traps are issued for PHONE POT extensions as the presence or absence of such phones cannot be established hence the ipoPhonesType for such extensions is always potPhone Installation Manual Page 166 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Maintenance DTE Port Maintenance DTE Port Overview The DTE port on the back of IP Office control units is not normally used when configuring an IP Office system However in extreme cases the DTE port can be used to default the system s configuration or to erase it core software if necessary e
75. on process includes a delay to ensure that if all modules in a system are started at the same time the expansion modules should complete their power up before the control unit Each module is supplied with an expansion connect cable and a power supply unit An appropriate locale specific power cord for the power supply unit and cables for the ports on the front of the module must be ordered separately Di Warnings e No cable other than an Expansion Interconnect cable should be used Use of any alternate cable will lead to system failure Installation Requirements 1 O Installation space either on or under the existing IP Office control unit 2 O Switched power outlet socket 3 O Free EXPANSION port on the rear of the control unit 4 O Grounding Requirements 1 O Functional Grounding Connection of a functional ground is e O Recommend for all modules e LI Connection of a functional ground is mandatory for Analog Trunk module 2 O Protective Grounding Connections of a protective ground via surge protection equipment is e LJ Mandatory for Analog trunk modules in the Republic of South Africa e LI Mandatory for Digital Station and Phone modules connected to out of building extensions e LJ Mandatory for Digital Station V2 and Phone V2 modules ra Tools Required 1 O Manager PC 2 O Tools for rack mounting optional Installation Manual Page 98 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic I
76. other than those listed above is optional but is recommended ra Tools Required 1 O M4 Cross Head Screwdriver 2 O Tools suitable for crimping a cable spade ne Parts and Equipment Required 1 O 14AWG Solid copper wire for ground connection 2 LI Cable sleeve matching local regulator requirements Typically green for a functional ground and green yellow for a protective ground Installation Manual Page 104 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation id Procedure The ground point on IP Office control units and expansion modules are marked with a rh or E symbol Ground connections to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve for a functional ground or green and yellow sleeve for a protective ground Small Office Edition On the Small Office Edition control unit the ground point is provided by a 3 5mm jack socket on the left of the rear panel Other Control Units On IP403 IP406 V1 V2 and IP412 control units the ground point is a 4mm screw located adjacent to trunk card Slot B o ey o ti EXPANSION 1 2 di 4 5 dii Mii gi gi i i On some older units the dedicated ground point screw is not present In those cases the left hand 3mm fixing screw on the Slot B blanking plate can be used as an alternate ground connection point A toothed washer should be added to ensure good contact Expansion Modules On expansion modules the ground point i
77. phone through applications running on their PC e Data traffic can be routed from the LAN interface to a telephony trunk interface for example a dial up ISP connection e Voice traffic can be routed across internal and or external data links This option is referred to as voice over IP VoIP The VoIP mode of operation can include IP trunks between customer systems and or H 323 IP telephones for users In either case the following factors must be considered e The IP Office control unit must be fitted with voice compression channels These channels are used whenever a IP device trunk or extension needs to start a call and or communicate with a non IP device trunk or extension e Onsystems except the Small Office Edition this is done by fitting Voice Compression Modules VCMs Small Office Edition systems are pre built with either 3 or 16 voice compression channels e A network assessment is a mandatory requirement For support issues with VoIP Avaya may request access to the network assessment results and may refuse support if those are not available or satisfactory A network assessment would include a determination of the following e A network audit to review existing equipment and evaluate its capabilities including its ability to meet both current and planned voice and data needs e A determination of network objectives including the dominant traffic type choice of technologies and setting voice quality objectives
78. ports are labeled as POT ports rather than PHONE ports PHONE POT ports on Phone V1 V2 expansion modules can be connected to out of building extensions If this is the case connection must be made via suitable protective devices IP Office Barrier Box at each end and via each building primary protection In addition the Phone module must be connected to a protective ground PHONE POT ports on IP Office control units must not be connected to out of building extensions PHONE Pin Description y 2 1P406 V2 and Phone V2 Not used TI IP403 and Phone V1 Pin 2 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor G d n IP406 V2 and Phone V2 Not used IP403 and Phone V1 Pin 6 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor 8 Notused s e REN 2 e Off Hook Current 25mA e Ring Voltage 40V rms e Minimum Wire Size AWG 26 e Maximum Cable Length The maximum cable length is dependant on the wire size used as follows e AWG26 0 5km 1640 feet AWG24 AWG22 1km 3280 feet Structured Cabling Line Cord This is an RJ45 to RJ11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ45 port to a DS phone It can also be used for two wire analog phone extensions 5 1 E Eh j 4 RJ45 RT 4 Meters 3 2 Feet IP Office Phone DS Port Pin Description Pin Port LL 3 E e SAP Code 700047871 Installation Manual Page 291 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006
79. to add 16 additional analog trunks to an IP Office system The module supports both loop start and with suitable grounding ground start trunks e IMPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment an Avaya 146G Surge Protector Feature Details Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition Supported in all IP Office locales IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file naatm16 bin Included _ Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a 2 pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Unboxed 2 9Kg 6 6lbs Boxed 4 2Kg 9 4lbs Installation Manual Page 197 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Of
80. up installation The configuration created must match the physical equipment in the IP Office system onto which the configuration will be loaded Doing otherwise may cause the IP Office system to reset and experience other problems The Create Configuration tool includes all control units external expansion modules and trunk cards supported by IP Office It is you responsibility to confirm what IP Office equipment is supported in your locale Creating a New Configuration 1 2 Select the Locale for the system This defines a range of features such as default telephony settings Click Next gt 3 Select the type of IP Office control unit Then select the expansion modules excluding WANS to also include in the system Click Next gt Create Offline Configuration Wizard Hardware Configuration 4 Select the trunks cards to be included and the IP address of a WAN3 module if required Click Finish The configuration is created and loaded into Manager Once this configuration has been edited as required it can be saved on the PC In order to send it to the matching IP Office system File Offline Send Configuration has to be used Installation Manual Page 72 Click in the main toolbar or select File Offline Create New Config from the menu bar IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Pre Configuration Importing and Exporting Settings This page is used for context sensitive help ID 32023 and 32025 M
81. v2 IP 406 DS 6 Successful receiving of the configuration is shown by the full configuration tree being shown in the left hand panel With no configuration loaded the navigation pane shows just BOOTP and Operator entries Installation Manual Page 117 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 B Phone Installation Installing Phones This section does not cover the installation of IP and wireless phones They are covered by the following separate documentation e IP Office 3600 Series Installation Manual e IP Office 4600 5600 IP Phones Installation Manual e IP Office Compact DECT Installation Manual e IP DECT Installation Manual This section assumes that phones are being connected to IP Office within an existing RJ45 structured cabling system If phone connections are being made through older punchdown wiring systems then the installer is expected to be qualified and approved for that type of installation Out of Building Connections Connection to analog and digital phones not located in the same building as the IP Office is only supported with the addition of additional protective equipment and additional installation requirements See Out of Building Telephone Installations Installation Manual Page 119 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 19 Installing 2400 5400 Series Phones Normally when the IP Office system is restarted and Manager is running the system will compare
82. various IP Office applications are tested and supported for IP Office 3 2 Microsoft Server IP Office CBC CCC v5 VM VM SMDR Conferencing OS s Manager Server Lite Pro Center Server inane Pose Pav RA Tx CA EA EE Microsoft Client IP Office CBC CCC VM VM Soft Phone Conferencing OS s MEET sts Clients Lite Pro Console Manager Center Client Windows XP Professional J i J F F F N P SP2 Windows 2000 F F uf ni uf wf wi ni Professional SP4 Windows Operating System Service Pack Support Operating System Current Service Next Update and Notes Pack and Date of Estimated Date of Availability Availability Windows 2000 SP4 Dependant upon Professional Windows June 26th 2003 Microsoft release 2000 Server Advanced and Support Server and Datacenter schedule Server Windows XP Home Edition SP2 August 9 2004 Windows XP Professional SP2 Details of how to configure IP August 9 2004 Office applications for operation with SP2 are contained with in the IP Office Tech Tip Bulletin 49 Windows Server 2003 N A Please see IP Office Tech Tip Bulletin 49 Installation Manual Page 52 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview VolP and Network Assessments The IP Office is a converged telephony system that is it combines aspects of traditional PABX telephone systems and IP data network systems This works at various levels e Individual phone users can control the operation of their
83. 00414766 700414774 700414790 700380363 Installation Manual Page 244 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components T3 Comfort This phone is supported in Europe only The T3 Classic has 2 Link ports for optional add on T3 Headset and or T3 DSS units up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS The IP Office supports T3 UPN and IP phones It does not support T3 IPN phones T3 phones are not supported in conjunction with other types of DS port phones Feature T3 Comfort Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp d Using optional T3 Headset Link unit Variant Colour SAP Code T3 UPN Comfort 700380280 T3 IP Comfort 700414758 T3 DSS Unit 700380322 T3 DSS Expansion Unit 700380348 White 700380355 00414766 700414774 700414790 700380363 N Installation Manual Page 245 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation T3 Compact This phone is supported in Europe only The T3 Classic has 1 Link port for optional add on T3 Headset or T3 DSS units up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS The IP Office supports T3 UPN and IP phones It does not support T3 IPN phones T3 phones are not supported in conjunction with other types of DS port phones Feature T3 Compact Handsfree fl Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp Upgradeable Firmware i Using optional T3 Headset Link unit Variant Colour SA
84. 0213382 LS i NE DEN a a sy ae Czech Republic Ireland 700213374 Digital Station V1 gar a i Phone V1 a North Central and South 700213390 America po Korea 700254519 po Chinas 700314172 Installation Manual Page 23 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Power Supply Backup UPS The use of an Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS with any telephone system is recommended Even at sites that rarely lose electrical power that power may occasionally have to be switched off for maintenance of other equipment In addition most UPS s also provide an element of power conditioning reducing spikes and surges The capacity of UPS systems and the total equipment load the UPS is expected to support are usually quoted in VA Where equipment load is quoted in Watts multiply by 1 4 to get the VA load The calculation of how much UPS capacity is required depends on several choices e What equipment to place on the UPS Remember to include server PC s such as the voicemail and Feature Key Server PC s It is recommended that the total load on a new UPS is never greater than 75 capacity thus allowing for future equipment e How many minutes of UPS support is required Actual UPS runtime is variable it depends on what percentage of the UPS s capacity the total equipment load represents For example a 1000VA capacity UPS may only support a 1000VA 100 load for 5 minutes This relationship
85. 0241664 COAX WAN 1P400 WAN Expansion A 700289713 F x LISIS defes Installation Manual Page 304 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Cables Cable Description SAP Code Length 25 Way DTE Cable Connects to a IP403 or IP406 V1 control unit 25 Way 700213432 2m 6 6 D type plug to 9 way D type socket 9 Way DTE Cable Connects to an SOE IP406 V2 or IP412 control unit 9 2m 6 6 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket Structured Cabling Connects from RJ45 sockets to RJ11 socketed DS and DS Line Cable analog phones BRI PRI Cable Connects BRI PRI trunk ports to the line providers 700213440 3m 9 10 eee network termination pont Raas o RUGS Red ameo Expansion Connects the control unit to expansion modules except 700213457 Interconnect Cable WAN3 modules RJ45 to RJ45 Blue LAN Cable Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP devices RJ45 700213487 3m 9 10 to RJ45 Grey LAN Interconnect Connects WAN3 module to the control unit Replace 700213465 1m 3 3 Cable with a LAN crossover cable for IP412 control units Green LAN Crossover Cable Used for connection of IP devices to LAN ports on the 700213473 3m 9 10 IP412 control unit Black V 24 WAN Cable 3 Way D type plug to 25 way D type plug 700213416 3m 9 10 V 35 WAN Cable 37 Way D type plug to 34 way MRAC plug 700213424 3m 9 10 X 21 WAN Cable 3 Way D type plug to 15 way D type plug 700213408
86. 06 Using Monitor Installation Manual Page 85 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 06 Checking the System Using System Monitor Monitor is a tool intended primarily for Avaya technicians and engineers However it is also able to report the presence of hardware devices that are not reported by the IP Office Manager application and is therefore an important tool during the installation process This process shows how System Monitor can be used to obtain information about the components installed with the IP Office control unit E Objective To introduce System Monitor so that it can be used during later stages of installation to confirm the correct installation of some components into the control unit Di Warnings 1 Running Monitor can create a high network load on the IP Office system Therefore it should only be used when necessary and should be closed when not needed Information Required 1 LI System IP Address For a new or defaulted system this will still be 192 168 42 1 2 O System Password For a new or defaulted system this is password Installation Manual Page 86 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 O rocedure Running Monitor A Basic Installation Select Start Programs IP Office Monitor If Monitor has been run before it will attempt to connect will the system which is monitored previously If you want to monitor a different system use the steps be
87. 07611 108807603 848219127 848219119 700406523 700356454 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 Installation Manual Page 242 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 6424D An additional 24 programmable buttons can be added using an XM24 and power supply unit Feature Standard DCP Phone Keys lt SPEAKER v amp HEADSET v 4 MUTE x Ea MESSAGES HOLD 4 f TRANSFER SAP Code 08807595 08807587 48219127 848219119 700406523 700406515 108272378 08272386 00345447 ope r 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup With CATS cable 700345454 Installation Manual Page 243 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation T3 Classic This phone is supported in Europe only The T3 Classic has 2 Link ports for optional add on T3 Headset and or T3 DSS units up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS The IP Office supports T3 UPN and IP phones It does not support T3 IPN phones T3 phones are not supported in conjunction with other types of DS port phones T3 Classic Feature Detail Message Waiting Lamp Upgradeable Firmware Using optional T3 Headset Link unit Variant Colour SAP Code T3 UPN Classic T3 IP Classic T3 DSS Unit 700380330 T3 DSS Expansion Unit 700380348 White 700380355 7
88. 0Mhz 650Mhz Installation Manual Page 261 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Manager This tool is used to access all parts of the IP Office configuration Different levels of access can be defined to control which parts of the configuration the Manager user can view and alter Manager is also used to upgrade the software files used by an IP Office system When running is also acts as a TFTP server from which some Avaya phones can request new software Note that IP Office Manager s software level is always two higher than the IP Office core software with which it is release For example IP Office 3 2 core software is release with IP Office Manager 5 2 IP Office Manager 5 2 is backwards compatible and can be used to manage IP Office systems running software from IP Office 2 1 to IP Office 3 2 Details IP Office 3 2 User and Admin CD Set x5 700407604 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 x No license required PC Requirements Minimum Recommended Operating System Windows XP Professional with SP2 Windows 2000 Professional with SP4 Windows 2000 Server with SP4 Windows 2003 Server Windows 2003 SBS Note 64 bit versions of the operating systems above are not supported Processor 600MHz Pentium or 800MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron AMD Opteron AMD Athlon64 AMD Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP AMD Athlon XP Hard Disk Space 1GB 800MB for NET2 1 4GB 800MB for NET 2 200MB for Ma
89. 100 Modules 100 106 Page 341 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation WANS Module 24 86 100 Adding 100 Number 86 WANS3 Module Connections 209 WANPort 141 Edit 141 wants 92 IP Office Rx1 92 warmStart 165 WARNING 28 104 154 167 169 171 192 193 197 280 287 317 323 324 WARNINGS 106 Watts 22 24 WAV 272 streaming 272 wav file 16 189 Wave User 272 298 Web Campaigns 49 268 Web Sites 55 website 48 160 Which IP Office Admin Suite 78 Whilst PC s 154 White Blue 282 283 289 292 White Brown 282 283 289 292 White Green 282 283 289 292 White Orange 282 283 289 292 Width 13 176 Windows 42 43 44 49 78 256 260 268 following 42 Windows 2000 49 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Windows 2000 Professional 49 78 258 262 Windows 2000 Server 49 78 262 Windows 2000 XP 49 Windows 2000 XP 2003 61 Windows 2003 49 Windows 2003 SBS 78 262 Windows 2003 Server 49 78 262 Windows 2003 server8 49 Windows 95 49 Windows 98 PCs 49 Windows Control Panel 78 Windows logon 78 Windows ME 49 Windows ODBC 44 Windows Operating system Service Pack Support 49 Windows PC 44 46 78 256 258 267 IP Office Administrator Applications CD 44 267 Windows Server 2003 49 Windows Servers 49 Windows Small Business Server 2003 49 Windows System Tray 156 Windows XP 49 254 256 262 263 OS 49 Windows XP Home Edition 49 Windows XP Professional 49 78 258
90. 116 TAPI WAV 47 VCM 16 Requires SCN IP 62 respect 151 288 Pin 151 288 respond 163 SNMP 163 Rest 177 179 181 183 185 298 319 World 177 179 181 183 185 298 319 restarting 88 142 IP Office 88 142 Restricted Digital Information 324 Restricted Numbers 62 Retain All Packaging TI RFA 35 152 RFA Name 256 264 266 268 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 298 RFC1215 Generic SNMP Traps 165 rfc2213 integrated services mib mib 161 rfc2737 entity mib mib 161 RFP LIC 275 298 RI 168 286 293 294 295 Right 281 Right Hand Screw 147 Rights Group 112 RIM 253 Ringer Equivalence Number 325 326 sum 325 RJ11 26 120 147 277 285 291 298 RJ11 285 RJ45 285 291 RJ11 Phone Connectors 26 277 RJ11 to RJ11 26 125 277 RJ11 to RJ11 Cable 120 RoHS 8 224 225 253 297 Rotary 73 routed 80 158 Polycom Viewstation 158 RAS 80 ROW 323 RS 232 168 286 RTS 168 286 293 294 295 ruggedized 217 Run Manager 172 Run Phone Manager 273 running 10 49 55 78 82 84 86 169 171 192 Admin Suite 78 ARA 55 IE6 49 IP Office 49 192 IP Office 3 2 171 IP Office 403 169 171 IP Office Feature Key 10 Monitor 86 pre 3 2 IP Office 84 rus 40 189 Russia 40 Russian 40 48 189 264 266 Rx 293 294 Rx1 92 196 Rx A 282 283 289 292 293 295 296 Rx B 282 283 289 292 293 295 296 RxClk 293 Rx Clk 294 RxCIk A 293 295 RxClk B 293 295 S S T Interface 158 s w 86 SO 134 135 137 1
91. 15 217 298 3616 215 298 3626 217 298 Package Damage 77 Check 77 Packet 190 Packet Bus 190 Packet Loss 53 Page Calls 190 panhead 102 Parallel 62 78 158 hosting 78 Parallel Port 154 156 Parallel Port Feature Key 154 298 PARK 275 PARK ID 298 ADMM 298 Park Time 62 part 7 38 42 106 112 156 262 Feature Key Server 156 IP Office 7 38 42 262 IP Office Manager application 38 Manager 112 Manager application 106 Part 15 323 FCC Rules 323 Parties 13 176 177 179 181 183 185 Parts Required 61 78 Password 86 116 PBX Tech 55 PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 236 237 238 239 240 PC Requirements 78 262 PC softphone 43 264 PC Wallboard 46 49 256 270 PC Terminal 168 286 PC s 49 PC Base Licensing 34 153 PC less 34 153 PC Less Licensing 34 153 PCM 142 PCMCIA 16 165 185 188 189 changes 165 PCs 154 PC s 24 42 49 62 156 261 PC s BIOS 154 PC s LAN 82 PDF 48 Pentium 49 254 255 256 258 260 261 263 264 266 268 Pentium III 49 Pentium Ill 800MHz 49 Pentium IV 259 267 Pentium4 49 Index Pentium4 2 8GHz 49 Pentium4 600Mhz 49 Peru 40 PF 290 PF Port 290 PF1 197 290 PF2 197 290 PHONE 13 20 30 68 69 98 120 125 144 147 165 176 179 185 190 203 205 211 290 291 Connect 147 POT 20 Phone 16 70 203 205 Phone 16 Module 24 Phone 30 70 203 205 Phone 30 Module 24
92. 166 42 1 Sro 192 168 42 203 vl 0x45 tos 0200 len 59 id 0x73a4 LAW Aor U law system PRI Number of PRI channels BRI Number of BRI channels ALOG Number of Analog Trunk Channels VCOMP Number of VCM channels installed MDM Size of Modem Card Fitted WAN Number of WAN Ports configured MODU Number of external expansion modules LANM Number of WAN3 Modules attached CkSRC Current Clock Source ISDN port number 0 Internal Clock Source VMAIL 1 if connected 0 if not connected VER the s w version of the voicemail server if obtainable TYP Type of Voicemail Server 0 None 1 PC Voicemail Lite or Pro 2 Line 3 Integral 4 Group 5 Audix CALLS Number of current calls TOT total number of calls made to date since last IP Office reboot Close Monitor until it is need again When restarted Monitor will attempt to reconnect using the last settings entered For Small Office Edition control units proceed to 09 Fitting Trunk Cards For all other control units proceed to 07 Fitting VCM Cards Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Page 87 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 07 Fitting VCM Cards e If no VCM card is being installed into the system proceed to 08 Fitting Modem Cards VCM cards are used to provide voice compression channels for calls between IP and non IP devices devices being both trunks and extensions VCM cards with dif
93. 171 IP Office s 169 Erase Configuration 169 erase_configuration htm 169 eraseconfig 169 erasenvconfig 169 Erasing 169 172 Configuration 169 Core Software 172 Operational Software 172 es 165 esl 40 esm 40 189 eso 40 esp 40 189 esr 40 ess 40 189 establish 7 customer s 7 Estimated Date 49 Availability 49 esv 40 Ethernet form 181 183 Ethernet LAN 179 Ethernet WAN 12 ETSI 14 ETSI BRI 20 194 ETSI BRI S0 interface 207 EU24 1XU A Expansion Module 249 298 EU24 Add On 125 Installing 125 EU24 EU24BL 125 249 250 damage 125 249 250 Installing 125 EU24 EU24BL Phone add ons 22 Index Page 331 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation EU24BL 125 229 230 232 237 238 239 240 250 298 EU24BL 2XU A Backlighted Expansion Module 250 298 EU24BL add ons 298 European 218 219 298 European ISDN 158 European Union 8 297 Europlug 23 298 Events 164 Select 164 EVM 40 Excel 73 except 14 20 32 53 96 98 190 192 193 196 287 Small Office Edition 14 32 53 96 190 192 193 196 WANS 20 98 287 Excessive RENs 326 Exchange 44 268 exp 73 Expansion 98 177 181 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 Expansion Interconnect 98 177 179 181 183 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 287 Expansion Interconnect Cable 287 Expansion Module 28 62 70 98 104 165 322 Adding 98 Expansion Module Ground Points 28 EXPANSION Ports 13 176 287 Expansion
94. 2 N N A 13 49 176 NA 223 naatm16 bin 38 197 nadcp 16 bin 38 201 nadcpV2 bin 38 199 Name 62 68 69 70 Name Extension 73 Name Number 73 napots16 bin 205 nas0 16 bin 38 207 nawan3 bin 209 Near Camera 158 Far Control 158 NEMA 5 15P 298 IEC60320 C13 298 NEMA1 15 23 181 183 197 201 205 298 NEMA5 15P 23 177 179 185 199 203 207 209 NET 78 322 NET2 78 262 Netherlands 40 Netlink OAI Gateway 298 Network 134 set 134 Network Assessments 53 Network Interface 158 Network Interface Type 158 Network Terminating Module 209 existing 209 Network Termination 283 292 Networked Messaging 268 274 298 New 100 New Calls 120 New Configuration 72 Creating 72 New Style 298 New Zealand 40 193 197 224 225 227 242 243 252 298 325 new defaulted IP Office 82 Next 72 78 Next Update 49 nlb 40 nid 40 189 No 8 102 No 8 panhead 102 Non Avaya 16 189 None 203 205 non IP 16 53 88 non IP Office 9 Non IP Phone 190 non SNMP 160 non telecommunications 325 Normal Business Hours 62 Normal Service 141 Create 141 Normally Slot 177 179 181 183 North America 36 177 179 181 183 185 194 220 221 222 223 298 North America CALA 298 North American 177 179 181 183 185 298 North Central 23 298 Norway 40 Page 334 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Norwegian 40 48 189 264 266 267 268 Notepad 161 NOTICE 323 325 NT4 Operating Systems 4
95. 200 400m 1310 4406D Phone 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 400m 1310 T3 Series Upn 1000m 3280 1000m 8280 400mM310 _ Installation Manual Page 278 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP Office Port Types The following port types are found on IP Office systems Port Found on Description ATM4 Trunk card x4 Used for the connection of external analog trunks Analog Trunk expansion module x16 AUDIO All IP Office control units Used for input of an external music on hold source x1 Quad BRI trunk card x4 Used for connection of BRI trunks Quad BRI trunk card So8 expansion module x8 and ISDN terminals devices So8 module All control units x1 Power input from external power supply unit All expansion modules x1 IP403 control unit x8 Connection of Avaya digital station phones supported by IP406 V2 control unit x8 IP Office Digital Station expansion modules x16 x30 All control units x1 Used for control unit maintenance under Avaya guidance All expansion modules x1 On expansion modules not used EXPANSION All control units x various Used for interconnection of external expansions modules All expansion modules and control units except WANS x1 EXT O P All control units x1 Used to control external relay systems The port provides two switchable on off and pulse controls All modules x1 Used for connection of func
96. 24 Stand 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup With CATS cable 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 Installation Manual Page 252 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 201B Recorder Interface Module The 201B Recorder Interface Module RIM is supported for use with 2420 and 5420 phones It provides the phone with a 3 5mm mini RCA jack socket for connection of recording devices It also provides two headset sockets which can be used in place of the phones existing headset socket the phone and the RIM sockets can not be used at the same time e The 201B is the RoHS compliant replacement for the 201A The 20B stand is the RoHS complaint replacement for the 20A stand To install the 201B the phones existing stand must be removed and be replace by a 20B stand also called the 20B Module Adapter Base This is an expanded stand that includes two slots into one of which the 201B can be inserted However only one 201B is supported per phone Use of the 20B and therefore the 201B requires the phone to be powered by a 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit Full installation instructions are included with the 20B Stand Variant SAP Code Multi Grey 700381817 With CAT5 cable 700356447 With CAT5 cable 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 Installation Manual Page
97. 253 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Applications Call Status This is a simple application that shows current calls in progress on the IP Office system It is intended for use by IP Office installers and maintainers Details IP Office 3 2 User and Admin CD Set x5 700407604 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 x No license required Minimum PC Requirements XP 2000 2000 2003 Variant RAM HD Pentium Celeron amp PO Pro Server Server Variant RAM HD Pentium Celeron Call 64MB 50MB PIII Celeron 3 Athlon B 65 Status 800MHz 800Mhz OMHZ e For Windows XP minimum RAM 256MB Installation Manual Page 254 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Compact Business Center CBC This is a licensed application It receives data from the IP Office Delta Server application The CBC is able to show details of calls handled by up to 3 selected hunt groups Its can also display details of IP Office trunk usage The CBC retains calls details for 31 days Details Minimum PC Requirements XP 2000 2000 2003 Pro Pro Server Server Variant RAM Pentium Celeron HD AMD CBC 256MB 10GB PIII Celeron 3 Athlon B d d d d 800Mhz 800Mhz 650Mhz e Also requires Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher Installation Manual Page 255 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Compact Contact Center CCC CCC is a reporting application desi
98. 26th June 2006 System Overview The following bin files are included in IP Office 3 1 This includes bin files used for phones that can upgrade their software IP Office Control Units and Modules ip401ng bin Small Office Edition Control Units ip403 bin IP403 Control Units ip406 bin IP406 V1 Control Units ip406u bin IP406 V2 Control Unit 4601dbte1_82 bin 4602dbte1_82 bin 4602sbte1_82 bin 5601bte1810 bin 5602dbte1806 bin 5602sbte1806 bin a01d01b2_3 bin a02d01b2_3 bin a10c01b2_3 bin a10d01b2_3 bin a20c01b2_3 bin a20d01a2_3 bin a20d01b2_3 bin a25d01a2_5 bin a25d01a2522 bin b01d01b2_3 bin b02d01b2_3 bin b10d01b2_3 bin b20d01a2_3 bin b20d01b2_3 bin b25d01a2_5 bin b25d01a2522 bin ip412 bin IP412 Control Unit ipwan3 bin WANS 10 100 Expansion Module avpots16 bin Phone Expansion Module dvpots bin Phone V2 Expansion Module naatm16 bin Analog Expansion Module nadcp Digital Station Expansion 16 bin Module nadcpv2 bin Digital Station V2 Expansion Module nas0 16 bin S08 Expansion Module Installation Manual Avaya H 323 IP Phones bbla0_83 bin cvt01_2_3 bin cvt02 2 3 bin cvt02sw _2_3 bin cvto_2_3 bin cvtosw_2_3 bin cvt51_2_3 bin def06r1 8 3 bin def24r1_ 8 3 bin dvppots bin 101d01a2_3 bin 1I02d01a2_3 bin i10c01a2_3 bin i10d01a2_3 bin i20c01a2_3 bin i20d01a2_3 bin x01d01a2_3 bin x02d01a2_3 bin x10d01a2_3 bin x20d01a2_3 bin Digital Phones 2410_R2 bin 2420 R4 bin 5410_R2 bin 5420_R
99. 3 108199050 4424D 108199076 108199084 DSS4450 108199407 108199696 Power Supply for 4450 108596412 Small Stand for 4406 or 4450 108541194 White 108541202 Large Stand for 4412D or 4424D 108541269 108541277 Installation Manual Page 312 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 4600 Series Phones Old Style US variants use just text labels on the phone keys International variants use both text labels and function icons on the keys GEN1 models do not support Power over Ethernet PoE unless fitted with the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base 700207376 Variant SAP Code 4606 GEN1 US ack 1085 6828 m hit 08576836 International Black 108627696 p hit 08627704 GEN2 US ac International Black 700059330 Mesi 00059322 4612 GEN1 US ac 08690447 ane hit 08690454 International Blac 08690462 p hite 108690470 D D Wi S Bp Si Bs Asi o ka o DIS 700059306 00059314 hit ack 7000059355 hite 700059348 Wy S W O S International Black 700059371 mee hite 700059363 4624 GEN1 US ac 08576894 m hite 108576802 International Black 108661273 Hihii hite 108661281 W x ack 700059397 GEN2 US m hite 700059389 International Black 700059413 hite 700059405 30A Switch Upgrade Base 700207376 4600 Series Phones New Style SAP Code 700381890 700221260 700381916 7003
100. 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation There are three methods that the IP Office may use for upgrading these are Validated Offline and Unvalidated e Validated Upgrade This is the preferred method and can be used with any IP Office system that already has IP Office 2 1 or higher software By default the Validate option within the Upgrade Wizard is pre selected During this process the required BIN files are first transferred to the IP Office s RAM memory Only when the files are received will the IP Office overwrite the existing software in its Flash memory and restart using the new files e Offline Upgrade On some systems it may not be possible for the validated upgrade to download all the BIN files required into the IP Office system s RAM memory If this is the case the IP Office will offer to reboot to Offline mode and then attempt to continue the validated upgrade In offline mode the IP Office only supports the service necessary to allow upgrading for example it does not support Small Community Networking SCN If in offline mode for more than 15 minutes without being upgraded the IP Office will reboot again back to normal operation e Unvalidated Upgrade This is the least preferred method It should only be used from a PC directly connected to the IP Office and with a fixed IP address on the same LAN domain as the IP Office LAN1 This method involves erasing the existing software in the IP Office s Flash me
101. 3m 9 10 Rack Mounting Rack Mounting Kits SAP Code Note Rack Mounting Kit 700210800 One per control unit or external expansion module Not Small Office Edition Barrier Box Rack 700293905 Up to 8 IP Office Barrier Boxes Mounting Kit Barrier Boxes IP Office Barrier Boxes SAP Code IP400 Phone Barrier Box 700293897 Use with Phone V1 module Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and functional earth lead IP400 Phone Barrier Box 700385495 Use with Phone V2 module Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable V2 101V and functional earth lead Feature Keys Dongles Feature Key Dongle SAP Code Parallel Port Feature Key 700185234 USB Port Feature Key 700261506 Serial Port Feature Key 700293095 Installation Manual Page 305 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation CCC Licenses License RFA Name SAP CCC Server IP400 CCC SV 1 1994 CCC Agents IP400 CCC AGT E CCC Supervisors IP400 CCC SUP 1 171996 CCC PC Wallboards IP400 CCC PCW Report Viewer CCC Agent Rostering IP400 CCC Rostering 171997 CCC Designer users IP400 CCC Designer 171999 Installation Manual Page 306 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components General Licenses License RFA Name SAP DECT Integration ports IP400 CTI DECT 8 171989 IP400 SoftConsole 1 174456 Mobile Twinning IPO Lic Mobile Twinning IP End points IP400 IP Endpoint CTI Licenses License RFA Name SA
102. 4 bin Page 39 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Supported Country Locales When a new or defaulted system s configuration is first opened in Manager the system s locale is set to match that of the PC running Manager This Locale System System Locale should be checked and changed if required The system s Locale sets factors such as the default ringing patterns and caller display settings The locale also controls the language that a voicemail server will use for prompts This following table indicates locale settings supported for different functions Note that this does not necessarily indicate support availability or approval for IP Office within that country This following table indicates locale settings used within 3 2 and higher for different functions Note that reference to a locale does not necessarily indicate support availability or approval for IP Office within that country Pre 3 2 Locale Language Telephony Phone Applications Voicemail Display Phones Manager Phone Soft Belgium Fr Brazil Brazilian J silylyg dan Denmark __ banist___ vs slx x a xe I fin Finland Suomi s s xJ x y y ysyj y s s fra France French wi df a nl i dd Ea deu_ Germany German s vy vy gs oe oe Pv tv lvl ell Greece Greek e w 4 4 4 wis lw zhh___ HongKong Cantonese s x x x x x x x xiv hun Hungary Hungarian x x x x x x x x
103. 400 PRI 30 CALA Supported only on the IP412 and 700241656 E1R2 COAX Slot A of the IP406 V2 IP400 PRI 60 700241664 E1R2 COAX e These cards include two plastic spacer pegs for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of the control unit The blanking plate is not required with the Small Office Edition which has removable sections in the rear panel e For E1R2 coaxial card a ground jumper cable and coaxial connector locking rings are also included E1R2 coax trunk cards must be grounded correctly and require the IP Office control unit to be connected to a protective ground Normally the ends of one connection is grounded For example if the exchange Tx1 is grounded the IP Office Rx1 should also be grounded However this must be confirmed with the line provider to establish which ends they want grounded 1 Connect the ground strap spade end B supplied with the card to the spade connection on the card and the other end C to the chassis with the long securing screw also supplied with the card 2 Use the two jumpers supplied with the card match the ground selection of the line provider For example if the line provider has grounded their Tx1 place a jumper across the two Rx1 pins of jumper block J6 Installation Manual Page 196 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Expansion Modules IP400 Analog Trunk Module The IP400 Analog Trunk module also known as the ATM16 is used
104. 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Digital Station port Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones If connected to an out of building extension the connection must be made via additional IROB 146E barrier devices in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground DTE 25 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only Ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional ground if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead Must be connected if any out of building extensions are connected to this module All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system Item Variant Country SAP Code IP400 Digital Station 16 Ports All 700184807 30 Ports 700184880 IEC60320 C7 Power Cord CEE7 16 700213382 SEY BS1363 United Kingdom 700213374 PE a I Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Installation Manual Page 202 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP400 Phone
105. 4400 Series Stand 221 223 248 4450 223 Small Community Networking 106 Small Office 12 13 16 20 176 189 190 Small Office Edition except 14 32 53 96 190 192 193 196 Small Office Edition 21 4A 69 Small Office Edition 4T 4A 8DS 69 185 298 Small Office Edition 4T 8A 69 Small Office Edition Connections 185 Small Office Edition Control Unit 38 58 69 Small Office Edition Trunk Cards 92 Fitting 92 Small Office Edition WIFi 271 298 Small Office Edition Wireless Card 16 188 Small Office WIFi 188 Small Stand 298 4406 298 SMDR 7 45 47 260 called 260 SMDR file 45 260 records 45 260 SMDR6 49 smnp_mibs 161 SMNPc 161 SMTP 160 email SNMP 160 SN 154 SNMP 42 160 161 163 164 165 called 160 Enabling 163 log 160 respond 163 select 163 164 SNMP Enabled 164 SNMP Introduction 160 SNMP MIB s 48 SNMP Port 163 SNMP Trap Sending 164 Enabling 164 SNMP v1 160 snmp_mibs IPOffice 161 snmp_mibs IPOffice on IP Office Admin CD 161 snmp_mibs standard 161 snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin CD 161 SNMPc 161 SNMPc mibfiles 161 IP Office Administrator Applications CD 161 SNMPc s STANDARD mib file 161 SNMPv2 SMI 161 SNMPv2 SMI mib 161 including 161 SNMPv2 SMI mib file 161 SO 158 S08 22 23 70 157 158 207 279 282 283 298 So8 Example 157 158 So8 Module 24 So8 Module Connections 207 SOC 326 SOE 12 14 26 62 88 90 92 102 277 298 Connects 26 277 298 SOE Only 62 SoftC
106. 46G Surge Protector and a protective ground connection must be provided on the IP Office control unit EXT O P Pin Description Switch 2 1 Switch 1 Ensure that this pin is always at a EXT a positive voltage with respect to Pin 3 O gt 35mm Stereo 2 Switch 2 Ensure that this pin is always at a 73 Jack Flug positive voltage with respect to Pin 3 _ 3 0 Volts Ground Chassis Switch 1 e Switching Capacity 0 7A e Maximum Voltage 55V d c e On state resistance 0 7 ohms e Short circuit current 1A e Reverse circuit current capacity 1 4A 3 5mm stereo audio jack plugs are frequently sold as pre wired sealed modules It may be necessary to use a multi meter to determine the wiring connections from an available plug Typically 3 common to both relays is the cable screen Page 151 Installation Manual 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office 3 2 IP Office Installation Licensing License Keys Various IP Office features and applications require entry of license keys into the system s configuration The license keys are unique 32 character codes based on the feature being activated and the serial number of the IP Office system s Feature Key dongle La Avaya IP Office Manager 5 2 10 File Edit View Tools Help i la a EHe A ei IPOFfice_1 7 Licence Voicemail Pro 4 Port IP Offices Licence 28 Incoming Call Rout Licence Type status 94 WanPott 4 Voicemail Pro 4 Ports Unknow
107. 57 158 298 contains 157 S08 62 165 S08 Expansion Module 38 Safety 317 Safety Extra Low Voltage 325 SAP 8 256 264 266 268 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 297 298 existing 8 297 SAP 700210800 32 96 SAP 700293905 32 96 SAP 700407612 48 Saudi Arabia 40 Save Configuration As 106 Save In 73 scans 100 106 IP Office 106 WANS 100 ScanSoft 268 274 298 ScanSoft TTS CD s 268 Schuko 23 298 SCN 106 Screened Cable Drain Wire 294 295 296 SCTE A 293 295 SCTE B 293 295 SDK 48 298 Secondary Building 147 Sector 169 171 Sector Erases 169 171 Security 112 Security Administration 112 Security Administrator 112 Security Settings 112 169 171 Configuring 112 Defaulting 171 understand 112 securitypwd 112 See Analog 197 See Training 7 Programming 127 Select Compile 161 Select Control Unit 100 Select Directory 106 Select Export 73 Select Extension 129 131 Select Features menu 156 Select File 73 86 106 112 Page 337 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Select General 112 Select Import 73 Select IP Office window 84 112 116 Select License 155 156 Select Load 161 Select OPTION 120 Select Options 161 Select Rights Groups 112 Select Self Test 120 Select Service Users 112 Select Start 82 84 86 112 116 Select System 155 156 Select Tools 129 Select Unit 86 Select Upgrade 106 Select User 129 Select View 172 Select WAN 100 Select Yes 106 Selling 54 SE
108. 6 2m 6 6 control unit 9 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket Structured Cabling Connects from RJ45 sockets to RJ11 700047871 4m 13 2 See table DS Line Cable socketed DS and analog phones below BRI PRI Cable Connects BRI PRI trunk ports to the line 700213440 3m 9 10 5m 16 5 providers network termination point RJ45 to RJ45 Red Expansion Connects the control unit to expansion 700213457 1m 3 3 1m 3 3 Interconnect Cable modules except WAN3 modules RJ45 to RJ45 Blue LAN Cable Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP 700213481 3m 9 10 100m 328 devices RJ45 to RJ45 Grey LAN Interconnect Connects WAN3 module to the control 100213465 1m 3 3 Cable unit Replace with a LAN crossover cable for P412 control units Green LAN Crossover Used for connection of IP devices to LAN 700213473 3m 9 10 100m 328 Cable ports on the IP412 control unit Black V 24 WAN Cable 37 Way D type plug to 25 way D type 700213416 3m 9 10 5m 16 5 plug V 35 WAN Cable 37 Way D type plug to 34 way MRAC 700213424 3m 9 10 5m 16 5 plug X 21 WAN Cable 3 Way D type plug to 15 way D type 700213408 3m 9 10 5m 16 5 plug The table below details the maximum total cable distances for DS and analog extensions using different cable types Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP Telephone AWG22 AWG24 AWG26 CW1308 0 65mm 0 5mm 0 4mm 2400 5400 Series 1670m 5500 110m 3500 670m 2
109. 62 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Enabling SNMP and Polling Support In order for the IP Office control unit to be discovered and polled by an SNMP manager its SNMP agent must be enabled and placed in the same read community as the SNMP manager To enable the SNMP agent 1 2 3 4 o I 9 In Manager receive the control unit s configuration Double click System from the Configuration Tree panel and select the SNMP tab Tick SNMP Enabled In SNMP Port enter the UDP port number used by the IP Office SNMP agent to listen for and respond to SNMP traffic The normal default is 161 In Community Read only enter the community to which the device belongs for read access This community name must match that used by the SNMP manager application when sending requests to the device The community public is frequently used to establish communication and then changed at both the SNMP agent and manager ends for security Click OK Send the configuration back to the IP Office and select reboot Following the IP Office reboot the SNMP manager should be able to discover the control unit The control unit s response will include details of the control unit type and the current level of core software Installation Manual Page 163 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Enabling SNMP Trap Sending In Manager receive the control unit s configuratio
110. 7 distributor supplier 320 Distributors 320 Disturb 47 DoC 317 323 325 Documentation 77 Documentation CDs 48 dongle 10 34 42 58 153 168 261 286 uses 34 153 dongles 10 Door 150 Door Release 150 Double click System 163 164 DRM D 247 connect 247 DS Phone Extensions 30 144 DS Phone IROB Installation 146 DS Ports 285 291 DS V1 199 223 DS V2 199 223 DS16 70 201 DS16 V2 70 199 DS30 70 201 DS30 V2 70 199 DSR 168 286 293 294 295 DSS 248 298 Power Supply Unit 298 DSS Add On 223 DSS4450 298 DT 13 176 183 185 322 DT Port Support 183 DTE 34 153 167 168 169 171 172 199 203 286 322 DTE Cables 168 286 DTE Port 13 168 176 286 DTE Port Overview 167 DTMF 47 DTR 168 286 293 294 295 Dual PCMCIA 185 Dual PRI 13 62 92 176 179 181 183 279 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Dual Radio Module 247 DCP 247 During 40 61 298 2006 298 Staging Installation 61 Voicemail Pro 40 Dutch 48 264 266 267 268 E E1 10 13 62 165 1 6 196 292 including 292 E1 PRI 135 137 195 298 E1 PRI Trunk Cards 195 E1R2 10 14 28 92 104 134 135 165 196 298 319 E1 R2 292 E1R2 Coaxial Connections 92 Grounding 92 E1R2 on Small Office Edition 62 E1R2 PRI 13 176 196 E1R2 PRI Trunk Cards 196 E1R2 Trunks 135 E1R2PRI 196 E911 177 179 181 183 185 298 earthed 30 104 144 149 154 298 earthed 3 Pin 177 179 199 203 207 209 earthed 3 pin 60W 199 203 E
111. 81957 700212186 700259674 700381544 700381551 700381817 700381825 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 Installation Manual Page 313 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 5400 Series Phones Variant SAP Code 5402 Multi grey 700345309 5410 Multi grey 700345291 5420 Multi grey 700339823 EU24 Multi grey 700381817 5600 Series Phones Variant SAP Code Multi grey Dark Grey Noisy Location Handset 6400 Series Phones These phones are no longer available from Avaya Variant SAP Code 6408D 6416D M 6424D M XM24D M 6408 Stand 6416 6424 Stand XM24 Stand Installation Manual Page 314 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components T3 Series Phones Upn Variant SAP Code T3 Compact Black 700380264 T3 Classic 700380314 T3 DSS Unit 700380322 700380330 T3 DSS Expansion Unit 700380348 700380355 T3 Headset Link Unit 700380363 T3 Series Phones IP Variant SAP Code T3 Compact 700414717 700414709 T3 Classic 700414733 700414725 T3 Comfort moe ae ome Power Supply Unit for DSS on T3 IP Phone 700414790 Installation Manual Page 315 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation CCC Wallboards CCC Wallboard Manager can support up to 16 physical wallboards A license key is required for every 4 physical wallboards Item Variant SAP Code Spectrum 3214C Wallboard Kit 700289507
112. 9 NTSC 158 NTSC UIS Interface 158 NTU 209 number 10 16 34 35 48 62 86 88 152 153 157 190 273 Analog Trunk Channels 86 BRI 86 CD s 10 48 DHCP Addresses 62 Feature Key dongle 10 34 153 Incoming 157 IP Office 35 152 Phone Manager 273 PRI 86 VCM 16 86 88 190 WAN Ports 86 WANS Modules 86 NV Config 169 171 NZ 193 298 O Off 289 Off Line Configuration 71 Off Hook Current 280 291 offline 72 73 106 Offline Upgrade 106 ohms km 294 OL13A 326 OL13B 326 OL13C 326 Old Style 298 on off 142 online 55 Only 125 Cables Supplied 125 Open Configuration 84 116 Open Door 150 OpenView Install CD 161 OpenView Network Node Manager 161 Start 161 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Operating 49 78 262 System 78 262 Systems 49 Operating Systems 49 Operational Software 172 Erasing 172 Operator 84 116 Optional 78 Optional Embedded Voicemail Card Slot 13 176 Optional Grounding 28 104 Orange White 282 283 289 292 order 73 163 IP Office 163 orderable item 270 271 272 273 274 OS 49 Windows XP 49 OS s1 9 49 Other Control Units 28 58 104 Other IP softphones 36 Other Non Avaya Web Sites 55 Other Plug In Modules 165 Out Service 135 Type 135 Outgoing 158 Line Group 158 Outlook 43 44 268 274 Outlook 2003 49 Out of Building Connections Lightnin g Protection 30 144 p P12 Loader 2 4 169 171 172 P4 2 4GHz 258 P4 2 8GHz 259 268 PABX 53 pack 2
113. 999 folder within the Manager program directory e The upgrade wizard should now list just the control unit as having upgrade software available For the remainder of the upgrade as detailed below the upgrade can be rerun again select the final software for the control unit Installation Manual Page 108 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation 9 For those modules which you want to upgrade tick the check box For modules where a later version of software is available the check box may have already been automatically ticked If doing a multistage upgrade only the control unit is selectable for the first stage e For systems including WAN3 modules untick the WAN3 modules Each WAN3 module should be upgraded separately once the control unit and modules in the same system have been upgraded 10 Select Upgrade 11 The system password will be requested Enter it and click OK Unit Login IP Office IPOffice_1 IP 406 DIS 12 Validated Upgrade If using the Validated option a number of actions take place as follows 1 Firstly the upgrade wizard performs initial checks on the amount of free RAM memory available in the IP Office system to temporarily store the new BIN files during the upgrade process If insufficient memory is available you will be prompted whether to continue with an off line upgrade or cancel upgrading e f offline is selected the IP Office is rebooted into offline mode It ma
114. AN Caples seeen 289 PEPE 290 PHONE POTYPotiLieble dle neliaa 291 Structured Cabling Line Cord 291 PRIPO4 4 rei 292 PRI BRI Trunk Cable 292 WAN Polleacinianle iaia 293 V 24 WAN Cable n 294 ViSS WAN Gableiilrerlein halo 295 XZT WAN Cable is 296 SAP COGES scenica 297 Equipment Availability 297 RORO alal 297 SAP COdes iaia 298 IP Office Control Units 298 External Expansion Modules 298 Power Supply UNItS 299 POWE COLAS iaa 301 Internal CardS 303 TUAKS Galdi 304 CADIES nrii i nN TEE E 305 Rack MOUNINGO alla 305 Bamer BOXES eai A 305 Feature Keys Dongles 305 CCC LICENSES ria 306 General LICENSES 307 CIILICCNSES sica 307 Phone Manager Licenses 308 Voicemail Licenses 308 IP DECT Licenses 309 45 Day Trial Licenses 309 IP Office Application CDs 310 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Table Of Contents 2400 Series Phones 311 3600 Series Phones 311 300 Series Phones uiciaina 312 56 10 PHOnesasanla dalia 312 4400 Series Phones
115. AVAYA IP Office 3 2 Installation Manual 2006 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya Inc can assume no liability for any errors Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases Documentation Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya Link Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this Documentation and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages License USE OR INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES THE END USER S ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN AND THE GENERAL LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE AT http support avaya com Licenselnfo GENERAL LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE PRODUCT S TO THE POINT OF PURCHASE WITHIN TEN 10 DAYS OF DELIVERY FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the li
116. Australia New Zealand 214 226 228 229 230 231 232 235 236 237 238 239 240 249 250 253 AusTS013 14 authenticationFailure 165 Page 327 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Auto Answer 158 auto attendants 44 Automatic Hold 62 auto MDI MDIX 179 185 289 Avaya 1151C1 B2 285 Avaya 1151C2 125 Avaya 146G Surge Protector 151 192 193 197 280 288 Avaya 40W 197 201 205 207 209 Avaya 4600 160 271 Avaya 4600 5600 Series IP Extensions 131 Swapping 131 Avaya Authorized Channel Partners 54 Avaya Business Partners 55 Avaya Compact DECT 211 connect 211 Avaya Contact Store 268 274 IP Office application 268 274 Avaya DECT 218 219 Avaya DS 40 IP Office 40 Avaya earthed 60W 181 183 185 199 203 Avaya Expansion Interconnect Cable 287 Avaya H 323 IP 24 Avaya Interchange 268 274 Avaya IP 298 including 298 Avaya IP DECT 160 218 219 271 275 298 Avaya IP DECT Mobility Manager 275 Avaya IP Office 7 8 297 318 322 housing 318 Avaya IP Office CD s 48 copies 48 Avaya IP Office voicemail 40 Avaya 1P400 Office 317 Avaya Messaging 276 298 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Avaya Technical Bulletins 7 read Avaya un earthed 45W 177 179 Avaya University 7 54 Avaya University site 54 Avaya Voice Priority Processor 215 216 217 avayagen mib mib 161 Avaya s Dealers 320 avpots16 bin 38 AVPP 36 215 216 217 AVPP 10 298 AVPP 20 298 AVPP Power
117. CW 174474 176196 Report Viewer Allows additional users 5 10 20 access to historic IP400 CCC 184726 reports Report 184727 184728 171997 50 for CCC reporting CCC Spectrum Wallboards Enables the operation of between 4 Spectrum wallboards IP400 CCC not Ferrograph Licenses are cumulative up to a Wallboard maximum of 16 wallboards CCC Agent Enables the Agent Rostering Interface for CCC which IP400 CCC Rostering provides connection to a 3rd party Agent Rostering Rostering package Blue Pumpkin No longer supported CCC Designer Enables CCC Report Designer which permits a IP400 CCC users supervisor to design and customize their own reports Designer One license per user Note requires the user to have Crystal Report Writer software CTI Link Pro Required for the CCC Email and CCC Chat licenses IP400 CTI 1 1988 above 1 1999 Installation Manual Page 270 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components License Keys General License shows the name as it appears in the IP Office configuration RFA Name is the name used for the orderable item License Description RFA Name SAP DECT Integration Enables enhanced DECT integration with the IP Office IP400 CTI oa 171989 ports system Used with Compact DECT and DECT DCU DECT Not used with Avaya IP DECT 174457 174458 Conferencing Enables the IP Office Conferencing Center application P400 Center Conferencing
118. Contact Centers 54 Contact Store 44 259 Contact Store Installation 7 ContactStore 49 259 268 274 access 259 ContactStore PC 44 259 ContactStore Web 49 contains 48 157 HTML 48 IP Office Administrator Applications CD 48 IP Office Phone Manager 48 SO 157 Voicemail Pro application 48 Contains IP Office Administration Applications CD 61 Page 329 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Control Unit Power Up 80 Control Unit Summary 13 176 Control Units 12 62 106 141 157 175 192 193 194 195 196 Controlling Ancillary 322 copy 42 48 55 106 169 171 263 Avaya IP Office CD s 48 CD 48 IP Office CD 55 IP Office s 169 171 Manager 106 Monitor 42 263 Core Software 106 172 Erasing 172 Upgrading 106 correct 161 CastleRock SNMPc V5 0 8 161 Country Code 158 Course Code 54 CPCS CCC 23 298 CPU Revision 0x0900 169 171 172 Create Configuration tool 72 Create New Config 72 Create Short 157 Creating 72 106 112 141 157 158 BOOTP 106 Incoming Call Routing 158 IP Route 141 New Configuration 72 Normal Service 141 Super User 112 System Short Code 157 User 141 WAN Link 141 Crystal Report Writer 256 270 CS 49 CS22 2 No 42 23 298 CSU DSU 194 CSV 71 73 CSV file 73 CSV File Formats 73 CTI 47 48 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 CTI Applications 47 CTI Licenses 298 CTI Link Pro 47 270 272 298 CTI Link Pro RFA 47 Purchasing 47 Ctl A 293 296
119. Contains an HTML and PDF collection of IP Office documentation Available in English French and German versions This CD set is split into the first CD for Voicemail Pro and 700407588 a second CD for the additional IP Office ContactStore application e CD 1 Contains the Voicemail Pro application including components for Campaigns IMS and VPNM e CD 2 Contains the software for the IP Office ContactStore application Contains various language text to speech engines for use 700293921 with Voicemail Pro s TTS functions Languages provided are Chinese Dutch English UK English US French German Italian Japanese Korean Voicemail Pro 3 2 CD Voicemail Pro ScanSoft TTS CD s Norwegian Brazilian Portuguese Russian Spanish and Latin Spanish Compact Contact 1 This CD contains Delta Server CBC and CCC 700330962 Center V5 0 CD Conference Center 1 Installs the IP Office Conference Center application 700407596 V3 2 CD Software Developers Contains documentation and sample code for 700188873 development of third party application that can interact with the IP Office system These applications will require Kit SDK CD CTI license and possible other licenses e Itis acceptable to make copies of the Avaya IP Office CD s and DVD s listed above However the content must remain intact unaltered and without change or addition Avaya does not accept any liability and responsibility for damage or problems arising fro
120. D Type Socket 2 Meter i6 57 Feet IP Office DTE Port Signal PC Terminal 25 Way 9 Way Adaptor 5 8 wCTS ClearToSend 8 6 6 DSR DataSetReady 6 8 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 1 22 9 Ri Ring Indicato 9 e SAP Code e 25 Way DTE Port 700213432 e Cable 2 core screened cable each core is 7 0 203mm 24 AWG tinned copper stranded wire nominal capacitance of 95pF m resistance of 92 km screened with tinned copper braid maximum working voltage of 440V rms and a Maximum current per core of 1A rms Installation Manual Page 168 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Maintenance Erasing the Configuration The following processes erases the configuration held in the IP Office control unit s memory That include both the current configuration in RAM memory and the backup configuration stored in non volatile Flash memory Following this the IP Office will restart with a default configuration This process should be performed from a PC with a fixed IP address directly connected to the IP Office control unit and with the IP Office system disconnected from any network Following this process the control unit s IP address will default to 192 168 42 1 Donot perform any of these processes unless absolutely necessary The IP Office s configuration settings can be default through Manager using the File Advanced Erase Configuration command 1 4 Procedure Erasing the Configuration via D
121. Database 161 MIB file 160 161 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 MIB file SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB mib 161 Add 161 Microsoft 47 49 Microsoft Client 49 Microsoft Exchange 5 5 49 Microsoft Explorer 5 5 259 Microsoft Explorer 6 0 260 Microsoft Office 258 Microsoft Server 49 Microsoft Telephony Application Program Interface 43 Microsoft Windows 2000 2003 XP Professional 49 Microsoft s MS CRM 43 Mid Span PSU 24 Minimum Assessment Target 53 Minimum PC Requirements 254 255 256 259 260 261 263 264 266 267 268 Minimum PC Resources 49 Minimum Server PC Requirements 258 Minimum Wire Size 290 291 misoperation 38 lead 38 Mobile Twinning 271 276 298 Modem 92 Modem Card Fitted 86 Modem Cards 16 62 90 187 298 Fitting 90 Installing 90 Modem2 164 Modify 156 MODU 86 Modular Messaging 274 voicemail 274 Module 22 24 38 58 172 MOH 13 142 176 190 Monitor 42 48 86 88 90 92 263 copies 42 263 Monitor Password 86 Running 86 start 88 Monitor Password 86 Monitor 86 Most Avaya 127 Most SMNP 160 Most SNMP 160 MP Mode 158 MS Exchange email 268 274 Enables synchronization 268 274 MS Internet Explorer 6 0 258 MS CRM 43 271 298 allows 43 MS CRM application 43 MS CRM Integration 48 MSP 47 Mu Law 322 Multi 324 Point 324 Multiple Managers 106 Multiple UPS 24 MultiPoint Setup 158 Multi Sector Erase 172 Multi Stage Upgrades 106 Music 142 Checking 142 Music on Hold 142 32
122. F ira 243 IP403 Control Unit 133 IoClassiGar ati 244 Small Office Edition 185 TS COMO serrana ae ETEEN 245 Internal Cards src nta 187 IS COMPaclapiciiaia dia 246 Modem Cards a 187 Trans FAIK GOAO o pueiss 247 Wireless Card aeaniino iridia 188 Phone Add ONS iron 248 Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards 189 740405 O PEPPE NSOE RE RO LITIO TETT 248 Voice Compression Module Cards DP RAR E NORRENA A ONN 249 Cia 190 EVU 24ABL rivelare 250 Trunks Cards ina 192 To DO Re a eee rere 251 Analog Trunk Card Universal ATM4U iar eh 192 PAVIA sia eo 252 Analog Trunk Card ATM4 193 201B Recorder Interface Module 293 BRI Trunk Cards Quad BRI 194 Applications allea 254 T1 PRI Trunk Cards 0 194 Call SfalUSiza zinco 254 E1 PRI Trunk Cards 195 Compact Business Center CBC 259 WAN Trunk Card 195 Compact Contact Center CCC 256 E1R2 PRI Trunk Cards 196 Conferencing Center 258 Expansion Modules e 197 COMACISIONC wets era 259 IP400 Analog Trunk Module 197 Delta Servef cll a ata 260 IP400 Digital Station V2 199 Feature Key Server 261 IP400 Digital Station V1 eeeeeeee
123. IAL SOFTCONSOLE BLF RFA LIC CU 189783 Phone Manager PC Softphone 10 user IPO TRIAL IPPRO RFA 10 LIC CU 189784 Phone Manager Pro 10 user IPO TRIAL PMGR PRO RFA 10 LIC CU 189785 Centralized Voicemail with Avaya Messaging IPO TRIAL ACM CENTRAL VM LIC DS 189786 Integrated Messaging Pro IPO TRIAL INTG MSGING PRO RFA LIC DS 1189787 Mobile Twinning IPO LIC MOBILE TWINNING TRIAL RFA 5 195574 VPN IPSec IPO TRIAL IPSEC VPN RFA LIC DS 189788 Installation Manual Page 276 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Ports and Cables Cables The IP Office is designed primarily for use within an RJ45 structured cabling system using CAT3 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling and RJ45 sockets A structured cabling system is one where cables are run from a central RJ45 patch panel in the communications data room to individual RJ45 sockets at user s desk All wires in each cable between the patch panel and the desk socket are connected straight through This arrangement allows devices connected at the patch panel to be swapped to match the type of device that needs to be connected at the user socket For example making one user socket a phone port and another user socket a computer LAN port without requiring any rewiring of the cables in between PA L I Rd4h Sockets Rd4G Sockets OOOO OR OO000000000mNoOo0 Patch Panel ogogooggpgggguougeooRE Building Structured x Line Providers Cabling Metwork Ter
124. LV 322 325 limits 322 Send 293 Clear 293 Request 293 Send Configuration 72 Sentinel System Driver 156 Serial Port Feature Key 298 Serial Port Feature Key dongle 154 Serial Port Feature Key Installation 155 Serial USB 62 Series 22 26 36 120 175 277 Series IP 160 298 Series IP Phone Installation 7 Series IP Phones 22 Series Phone 120 298 Series Wireless IP Installation 7 Series 5600 Series 16 189 Series 5600 Series IP 22 Server 49 256 264 268 Server Applications Dependencies 49 Server IP Address 62 Server Dial In Only 62 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Service 135 141 158 Out 135 Service Group Membership 112 Service Order Code 326 Service Personnel 317 Service User 112 116 require 116 Service User Details 112 Service User Name 116 Services Panel 156 Set 40 134 135 155 157 164 172 220 298 255 255 255 255 172 Any 157 Community 164 Fallback 134 License Server IP Address 155 Line Signalling Type 135 Network 134 PC 40 Trunk Type 135 Settings 73 Exporting 73 Importing 73 Settings Emulation 168 286 Setup RAS 141 setup exe 78 Shelf Wall Mounting 102 Shift 273 Short Code 62 157 158 324 Dialing 62 ShortCode 73 Simple Network Management Protocol 160 Single PRI 13 176 279 Single T1 PRI 185 Single WAN 319 Site Site 141 Site A on IP 141 Slave Socket 280 Slot 13 14 28 92 104 176 177 179 181 183 194 195 196 IP406 V2 92 194 195 196 Small
125. MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER 7 VOLUME DOWN 7 OR CONFERENCE Variant SAP Code 700221260 700381916 700356447 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 700203797 700229735 Noisy Location Handset 700229743 700229727 Installation Manual Page 225 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 4606IP The 4606IP is no longer available from Avaya This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or an 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source GEN1 models only support PoE if using the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base 46061P Feature DAEL Typical Off Hook Power Consumption a lines Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with F X Voice Priority Voice priority is supported if the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base is fitted Standard DCP Phone Keys 4 SPEAKER x 4 HEADSET MUTE a VOLUME UP x E MESSAGES v amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER v w VOLUME DOWN x DROP 54 REDIAL KW CONFERENCE Variant SAP Code 4606 GEN1 US International GEN2 US International 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 30A Switch Upgrade Base US variants use just text labels on the phone keys International variants use both text labels and function icons on the keys GEN1 models do not support Power ove
126. Module V2 The IP400 Phone V2 module also known as the Phone V2 module is used to add additional PHONE ports to an IP Office system PHONE ports are used for analog phones The Phone V2 module is available in 8 16 and 30 port variants referred to as the Phone 8 Phone 16 and Phone 30 respectively The Phone V2 module supersedes the original IP400 Phone module now referred to as the Phone V1 The module version is indicated by labels on both the base and the rear of the module Key changes are e The Phone V2 uses an earthed 3 pin 60W external power supply unit e With IP Office 3 1 the message waiting indication MWI on each POT port can be configured for None On 51V Stepped 81V Line Reversal A or Line Reversal B On uses the default determined by the system locale POT ports on a Phone V2 module can additionally be configured for 101V operation e The ports do not include a ringing capacitor Therefore for phones where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e The DTE serial port on the rear of the module has been changed to a 9 pin D type socket Feature Details Supported All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition on Supported in all IP Office locales IP Office core software level 2 1 36 minimum Bin file dvpots bin Level Included Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable The module is supplied with a Earthed 3 Pin
127. NMP polling including details about the responding device For example an IP Office control unit s response includes the control unit type level of software routing table information up time etc e Traps Supported by IP Office 2 0 and above When certain events occur a devices SNMP agent can send details of the event to the SNMP manager This is called an SNMP trap These appear in the event log of the SNMP manager Most SMNP manager s can be configured to give additional alerts in response to particular traps e Management Not supported by IP Office 2 0 and above Some SNMP agents support device management and configuration changes through the SNMP manager interface IP Office 2 0 and above allows IP Office Control Units to act as read only SNMP v1 agents It can include the sending of events traps to up to two different SNMP manager addresses e IP Office 3 2 supports the use of SMTP to email SNMP alarms This allows the IP Office s SNMP alarms to be used without having to setup an SNMP manager application IP Office SNMP operation has been tested against Castle Rock SNMPc EE 5 1 6c and HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6 41 e A MIB file exists for the SNMP monitoring of Avaya 4600 and 5600 Series IP phones The MIB file can be obtained from the Avaya support website http support avaya com e The Avaya IP DECT system can also be monitored using SNMP Refer to the IP DECT Installation manual Installation Manual Page 160 IP Off
128. OUICAION sia 326 ake A nee Ene nee sens inet nen Sant tenes ant astern area 327 Page v 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Installing IP Office This documentation is intended to assist with the installation of the core components of an Avaya IP Office telephone system It describes those components and factors that should be considered for an installation The IP Office is a converged voice and data communications system It should therefore only be installed by persons with telephony and IP data network experience Installers must be trained on IP Office systems Through its Avaya University AU Avaya provides a range of training courses including specific IP Office implementation and installation training It also provides certification schemes for installers to achieve various levels of IP Office accreditation See Training It is the installer s responsibility to ensure that all installation work is done in accordance with local and national regulations and requirements It is also their responsibility to accurately establish the customer s requirements before installation and to ensure that the installation meets those requirements You should read and understand this documentation before installation You should also obtain and read the Avaya Technical Bulletins relevant to recent IP Office software and hardware releases to ensure that you are familiar with any changes to the IP Office equipment and s
129. Office add ons Edition Phones with EU24 EU24BL Phone add ons unless using Digital Station Class 3 PoE Station V1 V2 4600 and 56000 Series IP Phone V1 Phone when not using a V2 Sos WANS 10 100 IP406 V1 Analog e The 1151C2 is the same as the 1151C1 except that it includes a backup battery that is charged during normal operation This can provide typically 15 minutes backup at maximum load 20 Watts and up to 8 hours at light load 2 Watts e Avaya 4600 Series and 5600 Series can use IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE power supplies Refer to the IP Office IP Phone Installation Manual for full details Installation Manual Page 22 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Power Cords Each IP Office control unit and external power supply module is supplied with the appropriate external power supply unit However a locale specific power cord is not included and must be ordered separately For locales not detailed below an appropriate power cord must be obtained locally Earthed Power Cords Power Outlet Plug Locales SAP IEC60320 C Codes Europe and South Africa 700289762 Small Office Edition IP406 V2 Czech Republic Ireland 700289747 IP412 _ United Kingdom Digital Station V2 eS Phone V2 Li So8 ny WANS 10 100 ag NEMA5 15P North Central and South 700289770 CS22 2 No 42 America pel Power Outlet Plug Locales SAP Codes LED 70
130. P CTI Link Pro IP400 CTI RFA 171988 IP400 TAPI WAV RFA 4 177466 Installation Manual Page 307 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Phone Manager Licenses License RFA Name SAP Phone Manager Pro per seat IP400 Phone Manager Pro 177468 100 177473 Phone Manager Pro IP Audio Enabled per user IP400 IPPRO 174463 174464 174465 174466 100 174467 Voicemail Licenses License RFA Name SAP Additional Voicemail Pro ports IP400 Voicemail Pro For 16 1 4462 Installation Manual Page 308 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP DECT Licenses These licenses are entered into the Avaya IP DECT system configuration not the IP Office configuration They are based on the PARK ID of the ADMM base station License RFA Name 1 Base Station IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 1 RFP LIC CU 700379027 2 Base Stations IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 2 RFP LIC CU 700379035 3 5 Base Stations IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 3 5 RFP LIC CU 700379043 gt 5 Base Stations IP DECT IPO MOBMGR gt 5 RFP LIC CU 700379050 Upgrade to 2 IP DECT IPO UPG TO A 2 BASE STATION LIC CU 700379068 Upgrade to 3 5 IP DECT IPO UPG TO A 2 BASE STATION LIC CU 700379076 Upgrade to gt 5 IP DECT IPO UPG TO A 2 BASE STATION LIC CU 700379084 45 Day Trial Licenses These licences start expiring from the day the license is generated not the date of installation Each license will only be generated once for
131. P 160 login 129 desking 129 look 142 holdmusic wav file 142 Look In 73 Loop Start 192 193 298 Lucent Blvd 320 LVD 317 325 Lycos Forum 55 M M3 102 120 M4 149 M4 Cross Head Screwdriver 104 M4 earthing 149 MAC 80 84 112 116 171 172 know 172 MAC Address 172 matches 172 Main 80 157 Main Building 147 maintain 42 IP Office 42 Maintenance 54 Maintenance Applications 42 Major 120 Management Information Base 161 Manager 40 42 48 72 73 78 84 98 106 112 116 120 129 142 155 156 163 164 169 172 262 200MB 78 262 Page 333 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation copy 106 IP Office 106 Locate 120 match 84 part 112 Manager Install 78 Manager application 73 84 106 part 106 Manager PC 82 98 100 106 120 Connecting 82 Manager PC s Local Area Network 82 Manager TFTP Log 172 Mandatory Grounding 28 104 Master 203 match 72 84 172 IP Office 72 84 MAC Address 172 Manager 84 Maximum 168 286 Maximum a c 281 Maximum Cable Length 290 291 Maximum Configuration Size 177 179 181 183 185 Maximum Extension Capacity 13 176 Maximum Extensions 177 179 181 183 185 Maximum Length 283 292 294 295 296 Maximum Time on Call 158 Maximum Voltage 151 288 MDF 325 MDI 177 181 183 289 LAN 181 183 MDIX 289 MDIX 181 183 289 MDI 289 MDM 86 90 92 Media Service Provider 47 MENU 120 Mexico 40 MHT 258 MIB 161 Compile 161 select 161 MIB
132. P Code T3 UPN Compact 700380264 T3 IP Compact 700414717 T3 DSS Unit 700380322 T3 DSS Expansion Unit 700380348 White 700380355 00414766 700414774 700414790 700380363 Installation Manual Page 246 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components TransTalk 9040 The TransTalk 9040 phone is no longer available as new from Avaya However it is still supported on IP Office Depending on coverage overlap between three and five 3810 s can be connected to the same IP Office The phone uses a wireless 900MHZ digital protocol to connect to a DRM D base station Dual Radio Module for DCP The base station connects to an IP Office DS port and can support two 9040 phones The base station also requires a power supply socket Feature Detail Upgradable Firmware Programmable buttons amp ri ba C ot a Pei ltem SAP Code 9040 Handset 108535998 Installation Manual Page 247 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Phone Add Ons 4450 Provides an additional 60 programmable buttons for 4424D phones Connects to the phone s ADJ port An additional power supply unit and power outlet socket are required for the phone A second 4450 can be chained from the first Feature Detail DSS port on phone Supported by 4424D Maximum per phone Maximum per IP 2 y Office Additional 4450 power supply unit on requirements phone IP Office Rele
133. P Office control unit Service User Details Name Administrator Service Group Membership Administrator Group _ Manager Group Operator Group 10 Click Change and set a new password The default password matches the name Click OK 11 Click OK to save the changes made on that tab 12 Click gt button to display the settings for the next Service User and repeat the process in the previous two steps to change their password 13 Click OK 14 The new security settings can now be sent to the IP Office control unit Click la 15 The original name and password used to load the settings will be requested Enter the details and click OK Installation Manual Page 114 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 1 Gi A Basic Installation Procedure Creating a Super User This process demonstrates creating a new security rights group and user who has access to both configuration and security settings In this case a Service User is created that can access both the IP Office s configuration settings and its security settings When such a user receives the configuration settings from a system if they then select File Advanced Security settings the security settings for the same system are automatically loaded 1 Repeat steps 1 to 6 of the previous process in order to access the IP Office s current security settings Select a Rights Groups Click G in the details pane Enter a name for the new Rights Grou
134. Parameters Automate Hoa Perauton Emergency Numbers DefeutNoe Restricted Numbers M Speed Dials Directory Name Dialing Short Code Telephone Number Installation Manual Page 66 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Planning N Account Codes Account Code Associate with Incoming Caller ID Installation Manual Page 67 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP403 IP406 V2 Control Unit Ports Port User Details Extension Number User Name Location Device Type Installation Manual Page 68 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Planning Small Office Edition Control Unit Site Name un Date O Small Office Edition 4T 4A 8DS Ports Port User Details Extension Number User Name Location Device Type Ports Port User Details Extension Number User Name Location Device Type 2 POT Ports Port User Details Extension Number User Name Location Device Type PHONE 1 POT e G Ko Installation Manual Page 69 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Expansion Module __ e O ATM16 O DS16 O DS30 O Phones O Phone 16 O Phone 30 O So8 e L1DS16 V2 O DS30 V2 O Phone8 V2 O Phone16 V2 O Phone30 V2 Port User Details Extension Number User Name Location Device Type Z N SES I N a Installation Manual Page 70 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th
135. Pentium or AMD Opteron 800MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron AMD AMD Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP Hard Disk 1GB 800MB for NET2 200MB for 1 4GB 800MB for NET2 600MB for the full Space Manager IP Office Admin suite Display 800 x 600 256 Colors 1024 x 768 16 bit High Color Windows XP Professional with SP2 Windows 2000 Professional with SP4 Windows 2000 Server with SP4 Windows 2003 Server Windows 2003 SBS Note 64 bit versions of the operating systems above are not supported Installation Manual Page 78 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation i lt 0 Procedure Installing the IP Office Admin Applications 1 Using the Add or Remove Programs option in the Windows Control Panel check that the PC does not already have a version of the IP Office Admin suite installed e If yes and the suite is a pre IP Office 3 2 version remove the existing IP Office Admin suite via Add Remove Programs e lf the existing suite is IP Office 3 2 or higher it is possible to upgrade without removing the previous installation 2 Insert the IP Office Administrator Applications CD The installation process should auto start If it does not auto start open the CD contents and double click setup exe 3 Select the language you want to use for the installation process This does not affect the language used by Manager which will attempt to match your Windows regional setting Click Next gt
136. PoE is only supported if the PoE is Class 3 Installation Manual Page 125 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation ia Procedure Installing an EU24 EU24BL E 1151C1 115102 PHONE LINE IN 1 Disconnectthe existing phone cable from the phone socket to the phone In the case of IP phones this will be an existing CATS cable For other phones this will be either an RJ45 to RJ11 cable or an RJ11 to RJ11 cable depending on the fixed socket type Reconnect the same cable from the phone socket to the power supply unit s LINE IN socket Connect the cable supplied with the PSU from the power supply unit s PHONE socket to the socket marked LJ on the phone 4 Connectthe cable supplied with the EU24 EU24BL from the EU24 to the port marked EU24 on the phone 5 Connect the power supply module to the power outlet socket Installation Manual Page 126 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 B Phone Installation Basic Button Programming Most Avaya phones have programmable button against which IP Office actions can be programmed Full details of this are covered by the IP Office Button Programming and the IP Office Key and Lamp Operation manuals This section covers only the basic elements of button programming o Appearance Button Requirements 1 The first button must be a call appearance button 2 Any other call appearance buttons must follow the first in a continuous blo
137. RI 23B D trunks and T1 Robbed Bit 24B trunks through a single RJ45 port The mode of operation is selected in the IP Office configuration Single E1 PRI Trunk Cards Supports PRI 30B D trunks through a single RJ45 port The port can be configured for PRI or QSIG operation Single E1R2 Trunk Cards Supports PRI 30B D trunks using E1R2 signalling Available in coaxial or RJ45 connector variants Dual PRI Trunk Cards As the single PRI cards above but supporting the connection of two PRI trunks On the IP406 V2 supported in Slot A only WAN Port Card Used only with the Small Office Edition Provides a single 37 way D type socket for connection to a V 24 V 35 or X 21 WAN service Includes a replacement back panel for the control unit e Supported on this control unit type x Not supported on this control unit type Installation Manual Page 15 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Internal Cards Each IP Office control unit can be fitted with a number of internal cards The cards supported depend on the control unit type Modem Cards These cards provide modem circuits to answer incoming V 90 analog modem calls e The first analog trunk on Small Office Edition control units and on control units fitted with an ATM4 or ATMA4U trunk card can be set to answer V 32 analog modem calls Whilst in this mode the trunk cannot be used for voice calls e Supported on this co
138. S two M3 pan head screws are required positioned 79mm apart vertically around the phones centerline F Tools Required 1 O Manager PC During installation each 2400 5400 series phone requests software from Manager and then loads that software before becoming operational 2 O Desk Mounting No additional tools required 3 O Wall Mounting If not using a US telephone jack wall plate drills screw drivers and measures for the installation of M3 pan head screws and wall fixings Installation Manual Page 120 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 B Phone Installation LE Procedure Desk Mounting 1 Atthe IP Office end check that each DS port is connected to the appropriate port in the structured cabling system patch panel 2 Start Manager During installation each 2400 5400 series phone requests software from Manager and then loads that software before becoming operational 3 Unpack the phone 4 The phones are supplied with the plastic mounting wedge in the wall mounting position as this allows a smaller box size 5 Slide off the plastic wedge and reattach it in the opposite position so that the phone is now angled for use on a desk Connect the handset cord to the handset Connect the handset cord to the port labelled HAC This is normally located on the left hand side of the phone Connect the line cord to the port marked with a EJ symbol Connect the line cord to the desk socket 10 T
139. Spanish Latin Spanish Finnish French French Canadian Hungarian Italian Korean Dutch Norwegian Polish Portuguese Brazilian Swedish License x No license required Minimum PC Requirements XP 2000 2000 2003 Pro Pro Server Server Variant RAM HD Pentium IV Celeron AMD e Also allow 1MB per minute for message and prompt storage Installation Manual Page 267 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Voicemail Pro This application requires various licenses entered into the IP Office configuration to control the features it offers and the number of simultaneous connections up to 30 on the IP412 control unit The operation of Voicemail Pro can be customised to provide special services For IP Office 3 2 the Voicemail Pro 3 2 software can be installed as separate Voicemail Pro client and server parts This allows the remote administration of the Voicemail Pro server from a PC with just the Voicemail Pro client installed A copy of the client is automatically installed locally with the Voicemail Pro server Source CD IP Office Voicemail Pro 3 2 CD s x2 700407588 2nd CD contains ContactStore ScanSoft TTS CD s x5 700293921 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 Languages Chinese Mandarin and Cantonese Danish German Greek English UK English US Spanish Latin Spanish Finnish French French Canadian Hungarian Italian Korean Dutch Norwegian Polish Portugues
140. Supply 298 B backlight 125 230 250 includes 250 provides 125 banks 177 64 177 Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit 32 96 147 149 298 Barrier Boxes 32 96 147 149 298 back 149 Base Extension 129 131 Change 129 131 Base Extension Number 62 Base Hunt Group Extension Number 62 Base Line Number 62 Base Station 275 298 BASE STATION LIC 275 298 baseband 209 293 BaseT 322 BaseT LAN 322 Basic Button Programming 127 Basic Rate ISDN 325 bbla0_83 bin 38 Bearer Capabilities 157 324 following 324 become 141 Intranet Service 141 WAN Service 141 Belgium 40 Belt Clip 218 219 298 3616 298 3626 298 BIN 106 BIN Files 38 Binary Files 73 Black 289 Blue Pumpkin 46 256 270 Blue White 282 283 289 292 Boot Loader 169 171 172 BOOTP 84 106 116 172 Adjust 172 amend 172 creates 106 requires 106 Both Voicemail Pro 44 268 Bothway 158 Brazilian 40 264 266 267 268 Brazilian Portuguese 48 BRI 10 20 86 134 135 137 165 194 207 279 282 283 292 298 322 Number 86 BRI and or PRI 283 292 BRI Interface 324 BRI ISDN 322 BRI Port 282 283 BRI Trunk Cards 194 BRI PRI 283 292 BRI S 282 283 BRI So 20 BRI T 282 283 Broadcast 73 build 175 IP Office 175 Building Connections 119 C Cable 26 30 144 277 298 Requirements 30 144 Cable Clearance 58 Cable Color 283 292 Cables Supplied 125 Only 125 CALA 195 196 298 319 Call Center Applications 46 Call Cente
141. Supply with battery backup With CATS cable 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 A Installation Manual Page 237 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 5610SW This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source 5610SW Feature Connects via Typical Off Hook Power 5W Class 2 Consumption Display 29 characters x 5 lines 168 x 80 pixels Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware fd PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys 4 SPEAKER lt amp HEADSET lt MUTE sl ii VOLUME UP x Es MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER Ww VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CONFERENCE VEET SAP Code 700345333 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 EU24 Multi Grey 700381817 EU24BL Multi Grey 700381544 1151C1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 100356447 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 Installation Manual Page 238 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 5620 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4620SW This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit an
142. T use DECT wireless protocol to connect to Avaya Compact DECT base station Base station connects to IP Office via PHONE POT analog extension ports Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Detail Connects via Supported Add Ons IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Button Relabel Headset Socket Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp ltem SAP Code 20DT UK 700035936 20DT EU 700035702 Page 211 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 2402D In addition to the two physical programmable buttons the Ho FEATURE key plus 0 9 and can be used to access an addition 12 programmable slots On IP Office the 2402D display is not used Feature IP Office Release Handsfree Speaker Microphone v x Upgradable Firmware Standard DCP Phone Keys x A SPEAKER x HEADSET MUTE J ad VOLUME UP EA MESSAGES v amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER w VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v E CONFERENCE VEET SAP Code Installation Manual Page 212 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 2410D Feature 2410 DS port 12 6 buttons x 2 pages 29 characters x 5 lines 168 x 80 pixels Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware Standard DCP Phone Keys X SPEAKER v b HEADSET lt MUTE sd a VOLUME UP E MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER 7 VOLUME DOWN DROP J 4 REDIAL iE CONFERENCE VEET SAP Code Installation
143. Unit 84 116 pre configuration 71 Preferences 172 Prefix Dialing 137 pre IP Office 3 2 78 pre Level 2 1 Systems 106 Upgrading 106 Press 120 Press Exit 120 PRI 12 13 14 86 134 158 176 279 283 292 322 channels 158 Number 86 PRI E1 319 PRI E1 E1R2 319 PRI Interface 324 PRI ISDN 322 PRI Port 292 PRI T1 319 PRI Trunk Cards 194 PRI BRI Trunk Cable 283 292 PRI T1 92 321 Receive Gain Settings 321 Primary Protection Box 30 144 Primary Rate 325 Pro 43 86 256 264 268 Pro3 49 Product 320 including 320 Product Key 49 Product Updates 320 Professional 49 Program Files SNMPc Network Manager mibfiles 161 Programs 84 86 112 116 Protection Device Type 30 144 Protection Hazard Symbols 318 Lightning 318 Protective Grounding 98 199 203 Provides 12 V 90 16 90 providing 46 125 133 195 256 298 30B D 195 backlight 125 IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet 298 IP Office 133 realtime 46 256 PSU 20 22 23 125 177 179 181 183 185 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 298 ptb 40 189 ptg 40 189 punchdown 119 Purchasing 47 CTI Link Pro RFA 47 Putonghua 40 Q QSIG 14 134 QSIG Trunks 135 137 Quad BRI 13 92 176 185 194 279 283 319 Queuing On 73 R R amp TTE 317 R amp TTE Directives 325 R2 196 R3 0 49 R3 0GA 49 Rack Fixing 96 Rack Mount Charger 218 219 298 Power Adapator 218 219 Power Adaptor 298 Rack Mounting 32 62 96 298 Rack Mounting Barrier Boxes 149 Rack
144. Units 62 expiry 35 152 Exporting 73 Settings 73 Exporting Settings 73 EXT O P 150 151 288 EXT O P Port 151 288 Extension 73 129 change 129 Extension Number 68 69 70 129 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Changing 129 Extension Users 131 Swapping 131 External Clock 293 295 External Control 322 External Expansion Modules 20 58 98 175 298 External MOH 142 External O P Switch Port 13 176 External Output 150 Using 150 External Output Switch 30 144 Extn201 80 Extn202 80 F Fallback 134 set 134 Far Control 158 Near Camera 158 Feature Key Dongles 34 153 298 Feature Key Serial Number 62 Feature Key Server 48 78 154 156 164 261 part 156 Feature Key Server IP Address 62 Feature Key Server PC 49 154 Feature Key Server PC s 24 Feature Key Type 34 62 153 Federal Communications Commission 323 Ferrograph 256 270 FIC 326 Finish 72 Finland 40 Finnish 189 264 266 267 268 firewall 172 177 Firmware 120 Checking 120 FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS 120 Fixed IP 82 fixing 88 90 92 102 IP Office 88 90 92 Z bracket 102 Flash 106 169 171 289 Flow Control 168 286 Following 12 42 163 256 270 319 324 Bearer Capabilities 324 CCC 256 270 IP Office 12 163 319 Windows 42 Forcing 120 Software Upgrade 120 form 9 146 147 181 183 Ethernet 181 183 IP Office 9 IP Office Phone Barrier Boxes 147 IROB 146E 146 Forward All Calls 47 Forward on Busy 47 Forward on No
145. Wallboards 256 298 CCV 46 49 256 CD 38 48 78 254 255 256 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 266 267 268 Copies 48 open 78 Voicemail Pro 48 CD 3 4 5 48 CDR 45 CD s 10 48 number 10 48 CE 317 325 CEE7 16 23 181 183 197 201 205 209 298 CEE7 7 23 177 179 185 199 203 207 298 Celeron 49 254 255 256 258 259 260 261 263 264 266 267 268 Celeron3 800Mhz 49 Center 149 258 Point 149 Center Client5 49 Center Screw 147 Center Server 49 Center V3 2 CD 48 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Centralized Voicemail 276 298 Centralized Voicemail Pro 62 Certain Hazardous Substances 8 297 Removal 8 297 Certified Associate 54 Certified Expert 54 Certified Specialists 54 Changes 7 112 129 131 165 Base Extension 129 131 DS 165 Extension 129 Extension Numbers 129 Individual User s Extension Number 129 IP Office 7 131 PCMCIA 165 Channel Allocation 158 Channels 135 158 281 PRI 158 Select 135 CHAP 141 Characteristics 158 Charger 218 219 298 Power Adaptor 218 219 298 Charger Power Supply 298 Chart 120 Planning 120 CHASSIS 293 Check All Documentation 77 Check All Parts 77 Check IP Office Technical Bulletins 106 China 194 195 196 298 323 EMC Caution 323 Chinese 48 189 264 266 267 268 chs 40 189 cht 40 Cisco Catalyst Power Adapter 298 CISPR 22 323 CkSRC 86 Class 22 125 249 250 323 limits 323 Clear 293 Send 293 CLI 324 Client 62 Client A
146. a given Feature Key dongle serial number License RFA Name SAP IPO TRIAL IPSEC VPN RFA LIC DS Installation Manual Page 309 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP Office Application CDs Application Variant SAP Code Voicemail Pro CD Voicemail Pro ScanSoft Text to Speech TTS 700293921 Conferencing Center ICI Ne LULA Compact Contact Center CCC IP Office User and Administration CD Set 3 1 3 2 x5 CD s Others x3 CD s IP Office 3 1 Applications DVD Installation Manual Page 310 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 2400 Series Phones Variant SAP Code 2402 Multi grey 700381973 2410 Multi grey 700381999 2420D Multi grey 700381585 Replacement Handset Amplified Handset Dark Grey Noisy Location Handset Push to Talk Handset 3600 Series Phones Variant SAP Code Charger Power Supply 3626 Carry case with keypad cover AVPP Power Supply Installation Manual Page 311 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 3700 Series Phones Variant SAP Code 3 01 700346802 3711 700346810 Belt Clip 700346885 Phone Charger 700346828 Power Adaptor for Charger 3810 Phones ltem SAP Code 3810 Set Includes phone base station charger belt clip and power supply units for 700305105 charger and base station 4400 Series Phones Variant SAP Code 4406D 108199019 108199027 4412D 10819904
147. all Office Edition Wireless Card The Small Office Edition supports an Avaya supplied 802 11b WiFi wireless card This allows the control unit to act as a wireless access point e Supported on this control unit type e Xx Not supported on this control unit type Wireless Card SAP Code Small Office IP403 IP406 IP406 IP412 Edition V1 V2 Mes Cara reese y Tx Tx x x Installation Manual Page 19 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation External Expansion Modules These modules can be used to add additional ports to an IP Office system The number of expansion modules supported depends on the control unit type Expansion modules except the WAN3 module connect to expansion ports on the rear of the control unit using a 1 meter 3 3 cable supplied with the expansion module No other cable should be used The WANS module differs in that it connects via a LAN port on its front to one of the control unit s LAN ports Each module uses an external power supply unit supplied with the module A locale specific power cord for the PSU must be ordered separately Number of modules supported Small Office 1P403 IP406 V1 V2 1P412 WAN3 modules All other modules The following expansion modules are supported by IP Office 3 1 e Analog Trunk Module ATM16 Provides an additional 16 ANALOG ports for connection of analog trunks Supports both loop start and ground start tru
148. anager can import configuration settings created elsewhere This can be useful when setting up a new system or sharing common settings such as a directory between systems Settings are imported and exported in two formats Binary Files exp These are non editable files During import and export it is possible to select what types of entries should be included in the file During import the whole file is imported Exporting Settings 1 2 Select Export ES Export terns Available _ Control Unit _ Extension _ Firewall Profile _ HuntGroup Incoming Call Route Line RAS Service _ ShortCode _ User User Rights _ WanPort Unavailable _ Account Code _ Authorization Code C Program Files 4yayahlP Office Manager IP ad Binary exp Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Comma Separated Variable Text Files csv These are plain text files In addition to being exported from an IP Office system these files can be created and edited using programs such as WordPad or Excel Select File Import Export from the menu bar File Type Select the type of file The list of exportable entry types will change to match the file type Select the types of items that should be exported Use the Save In path to select the location for the exported files The default location used is sub directory of the Manager application directory based on system name of the currently loaded IP O
149. annels 2 International Prefix Voice Channels Data Channels 2 Pr Lum Lun Luna 4 CRC Checking Clock Quality Line analia CPE a Installation Manual Page 138 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 C External Trunk Configuration Installation Manual Page 139 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Creating a WAN Link The following is a simplified process for creating a data link from Site A to Site B via the WAN ports At Site A on IP address 192 168 43 1 1 Create a Normal Service The Service name can be any text and is used to identify this particular service The account Name and password entered for the service are presented to the remote end therefore must match the user name and password configured at Site B The Encrypted Password option can only be used if the remote end also supports CHAP Create a User Under the Dial In tab tick Dial In On This User account is used to authenticate the connection from the Site B Note that if the Service and User have the same name these two configuration forms are automatically linked and become an Intranet Service The User password is displayed at the bottom of the Service tab as the Incoming Password Setup RAS If CHAP is to be used on this link then the Encrypted Password option must be checked in the Service and in the RAS service The name of the RAS service must match the name of the Service at Site B Note that
150. are not supplied with a power cord The appropriate power cord must be ordered or sourced locally e During 2006 Avaya have obtained approval to supply IP412 So8 and WAN3 10 100 units with earthed power supply units that require an IEC60320 C13 power cord Previously these units used an unearthed power supply and IEC60320 C7 power cord Unearthed Power Cords IEC60320 C7 IP Office Power Outlet Plug Locales SAP Codes CEE7 16 Europlug Europe and South Africa IP406 V1 Czech Republic Ireland United 700213374 Nnaiog es Kingdom Digital Station Tm Phone V1 el ae North Central and South America 700213390 700254519 700261977 Installation Manual Page 301 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Earthed Power Cords IEC60320 C13 IP Office Power Outlet Plug Locales SAP Codes Europe and South Africa 700289762 Small Office Edition Czech Republic Ireland United 700289747 IP406 V2 a Kingdom IP412 is Digital Station V2 eg Phone V2 Lay So8 e WANS 10 100 North Central and South America 700289770 CPCS CCC 700261977 The following additional power cords are available for use with the Avaya 1151C1 and 1151C2 power supply units These units are supplied with an IEC60320 C13 to NEMA 5 15P power cord suitable for use in the USA For other locales this power cord will need to be replaced with a locale specific power cord 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord SAP C
151. are placed into that hunt group as members e Incoming Call Routes Two default incoming call routes are created e Voice calls are routed to the hunt group Main e Data calls are routed to the RAS user Dialln Installation Manual Page 81 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 04 Connecting the Manager PC At this stage we will directly connect the Manager PC to the new defaulted IP Office control unit For this the PC will need to be set to a fixed IP address in the same subnet range as the IP Office control unit s default address IP Office E Objective Physically connecting the Manager PC and the IP Office without needing to adjust or configure any intervening equipment N Parts and Equipment Required 1 O Manager PC 2 O LAN Cable e O IP Office Small Office Edition 1P403 IP406 V1 and IP406 V2 Control Units A standard RJ45 RJ45 LAN cable can be used e O 1IP412 Control Unit A RJ45 RJ45 cross over LAN cable is required Installation Manual Page 82 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation ia z Procedure Direct Connection to a Defaulted IP Office Control Unit 1 Check that the TCP IP properties for the Manager PC s Local Area Network connection are set as follow e Fixed IP address 192 168 42 203 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 255 e Default gateway 192 168 42 1 2 Connect the LAN cable from the PC s LAN port the LAN 1 port on th
152. arthed Power Cords 23 298 eBLF 266 271 298 Edit 120 127 135 141 WANPort 141 EEC 323 Electrical 8 297 Electronic Equipment 8 297 email 43 44 55 62 258 268 E mail 49 Voicemail 49 email SNMP 160 SMTP 160 Embedded Voicemail 16 40 44 190 Embedded Voicemail Installation 7 189 refer 189 Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards 16 189 298 EMC 317 325 EMC Cautions 323 China 323 EMC Directive 323 EMEA 36 EMEA APAC 36 Emergency Numbers 62 EN 609050 322 ena 40 Enable BootP Server 172 Enables 3rd 268 274 Enables CCC Report Designer 256 270 Enables CTI Link Pro 272 Enables IMS 268 Enables IMS Pro 274 Enables IP Office 274 Enables Phone Manager Pro 264 273 Enables Phone Manager Pro IP softphone 264 273 Enables synchronization 268 274 MS Exchange email 268 274 Enables VB Script 268 274 Enables Voicemail Pro 268 274 Enables VPNM 268 274 Encrypted Password 141 END 161 eng 40 189 Engineer s Toolkit CD 317 English 48 158 258 264 266 267 268 Enter AT 169 171 172 Enter AT DEBUG 169 172 Enter AT SECURITYRESETA LL 171 Enter AT X 172 Enter ipconfig 82 entering 86 164 273 IP Address 86 164 Phone Manager 273 Port 164 Enterprise Portal 55 ENTITY MIB 161 enu 40 189 Environmental requirements 60 96 enz 40 EQUIPMENT 77 146 Unpacking 77 Equipment Availability 8 297 Equipment Checklist 77 Equipment Required 80 82 88 90 92 96 98 100 102 104 120 Erase 169
153. ase Programmable 60 Buttons 50x10x15 Item SAP Code 4450 Black 108199696 4450 White 108199407 Small 4400 Series Stand Black 108541194 Small 4400 Series Stand White 108541202 Power Supply for 4450 108596412 Installation Manual Page 248 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components EU24 Provides an additional 24 programmable buttons o A Only the cable supplied with the EU24 EU24BL should for connection to the EU24 EU24BL This cable should only be connected to the port marked EU24 on suitable phones Doing otherwise will cause damage to the EU24 EU24BL and the equipment to which it is attached Detail Fea EU24 port on phone Supported by 2420 4620 4621 4625 5420 5620 2 Office 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply or Class Requirements 3 PoE IP Office Release 3 0 Programmable J 24 Buttons ture Variant SAP Code Multi Grey With CATS cable 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord USA Europe Australia New Zealand India 407790991 Installation Manual Page 249 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation EU24BL Provides an additional 24 programmable buttons The EU24BL is physically similar to the EU24 but includes a backlight function that matches 4621 phone o A Only the cable supplied with the EU24 EU24BL should for connection to the EU24 EU24BL This cable should only be co
154. atent or other protective rights of Avaya or others Intellectual property related to this product including trademarks and registered to Lucent Technologies have been transferred or licensed to Avaya All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements Any comments or suggestions regarding this document should be sent to wgctechpubs avaya com 2006 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Avaya Unit 1 Sterling Court 15 21 Mundells Welwyn Garden City Hertfordshire AL7 1LZ England Tel 44 0 1707 392200 Fax 44 0 1707 376933 Web http www avaya com ipoffice knowledgebase Installation Manual Page 344 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006
155. atts and up to 8 hours at light load 2 Watts Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Page 25 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Cables The IP Office is designed primarily for use within an RJ45 structured cabling system using CAT3 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling and RJ45 sockets A structured cabling system is one where cables are run from a central RJ45 patch panel in the communications data room to individual RJ45 sockets at user s desk All wires in each cable between the patch panel and the desk socket are connected straight through This arrangement allows devices connected at the patch panel to be swapped to match the type of device that needs to be connected at the user socket For example making one user socket a phone port and another user socket a computer LAN port without requiring any rewiring of the cables in between P406 v2 BE oo Fuld Sockets RAJ45 Sockets Patch Panel siefaisiaisieisisisisis Building Structured E Line Providers Cabling Metwork Termination e Traditional IDC Punchdown Wiring Installations Where necessary the far end RJ45 plug can be stripped from IP Office cables and wired into traditional wiring systems using punch block connectors This type of installation should be performed by an experienced wiring technician e Trunk Connections The majority of IP Office trunk ports use RJ45 connectors for acceptance of an RJ45 to RJ45 cable Ho
156. ature Detail DS port IP Office Release 1 0 Programmable Buttons 24 12 8 12 DI Speaker Microphone cg si 7 Display 24 characters x 2 fea 7 2g f lines A Supported Add Ons None F a RE Firmware e Standard DCP Phone Keys lt H SPEAKER x 3 HEADSET MUTE ta VOLUME UP x E MESSAGES HOLD 40 TRANSFER v we VOLUME DOWN DROP 4 REDIAL v iE CONFERENCE i SAP Code 4412D e ogo Large 4400 Series Stand for 4412D 4424D I n Installation Manual Page 222 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 4424D This phone is supported in North America only NA maximum of 16 4424D phones are supported on any DS V2 module 10 on a DS V1 and on releases prior to IP Office 3 1 4424D III Feature Detail Speaker Microphone Lamp Display 24 characters x 2 lines Supported Add Ons 4450 x 2 Upgradeable Firmware Standard DCP Phone Keys 3 SPEAKER x HEADSET MUTE zt VOLUME UP Xx Es MESSAGES v amp HOLD C TRANSFER e VOLUME DOWN x DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CONFERENCE ____ _ Item SAP Code 4424D i croc Large 4400 Series Stand for 4412D 4424D i cm foose 4450 DSS Add On Small 4400 Series Stand for 4450 White 108541202 Power Supply for 4450 108596412 Installation Manual Page 223 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 4601 This phone requires a separate power supply using e
157. aya Support web site http Awww avaya com support or the IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your contact center The support telephone number is 1 800 242 2121 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support Table of Contents IP Office Installation rr 7 mMstalnmg IP OM CS erei a eo Saeewteeeid eines 7 Equipment Availability 8 ROR luni 8 System OverviewW rr 9 System OVErFVIEW ii 9 IP Office System Components 10 Control UNis cri la 12 Control Unit SUMMALY ceiui aa 13 TUNK CAAS ernier 14 Mtema Cal OS oriris oaeen NEE 16 External Expansion Modules 20 POWEFSUPPpIES siriana 22 POWE Cordsissii ae 23 Power Supply Backup UPS 24 GAD OS iain cara 26 Standard IP Office Cables 27 GIOUNdINg zioni ade 28 Out of Building Connections Lightning POLS CUO Nuclei 30 Rack MOUNINO ella 32 Feature Key Dongles n 34 LICENSE KEYS apnea 35 IP OMCE PHONES rerne 36 IP Office Core Software BIN Files 38 Supported Country Locales 40 IP Office Programming and Ma
158. been or is being introduced in a number of other countries Avaya has decided to make its global product range compliant with the requirements of RoHS The actions taken vary e In some cases equipment has been discontinued and is no longer available from Avaya e Insome cases new manufactured stock has been made RoHS compliant and keeps its existing SAP code e Inother cases the equipment has been replaced by a new RoHS compliant alternative with new SAP codes The SAP codes within this document are for RoHS compliant equipment unless otherwise stated Installation Manual Page 297 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation SAP Codes IP Office Control Units Control units are supplied with an external power supply unit but not a locale specific power cord All control units are available in either North America or Rest of World variants The choice controls various default settings of the unit For E911 support a North American variant control unit must be used The companding can be changed once a unit is installed VEET Companding Country SAP Code IP412 Office O me A IP406 V2 Office DS Me Gis N Amara oss Small Office Edition 4T 4A 8DS 3 VoIP Small Office Edition 4T 4A 8DS 16 VoIP IP403 Office DS Rest of World 700234453 North America 700350390 External Expansion Modules Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do
159. ber to the required new number User Mame Slones Password Confirm Password Full Name Steve Jones Locale cn Ph co Td Priority C Ex Directory 4 Click on another field If an error warning appears it will most likely be due to a conflict with an existing use of that extension number e lf this an error click Cancel to return the user to their original extension number e If this is intended as the other entry will be corrected click OK and then edit the other entry e When OK is clicked Manager will automatically propagate the number change to any hunt groups incoming call routes user buttons bridged appearance buttons and call coverage appearance buttons associated with the user s original extension number 5 If the user has an extension with which they are associated by being the extension s Base Extension setting that setting is not automatically updated even though we asked engineering for that feature If the user should still be associated with that extension by default the extension must be updated manually to match the user s new extension number a This part of the process requires an IP Office system reboot as it changes extension port settings b Select Extension c Change the Base Extension number to match the user extension who should now be associated with that physical port by default Extr Extension ld Base Extension 203 Caller Display Type Reset Volume After Calls
160. called holdmusic wav The file properties should be PCM 8kHz 16 bit mono maximum length 30 seconds e The initial source for download is the system s configured TFTP server System System TFTP Server IP Address The default for this is a broadcast to the local subnet for any PC running a TFTP server e Manager acts as a TFTP server while it is running If Manager is used as the TFTP server then the holdmusic wav file should be placed in the Manager applications working directory e f no successful TFTP download occurs the IP Office will automatically look for a holdmusic wav file on the control unit s compact flash memory card if present and will download that file Small Office Edition and IP406 V2 control units with IP Office 3 1 or higher e If IP Office has not loaded a hold music file it will retry loading a hold music file approximately every five minutes e If an internal music on hold file is downloaded the IP Office will automatically write a copy of that file to its compact flash memory card if present This will overwrite any existing music on hold file stored on that card Small Office Edition and IP406 V2 control units with IP Office 3 1 or higher e If an internal music on hold file is downloaded that file is used and overrides any external music on hold source if also connected e All the above operation can be cancelled by selecting Use External Music on Hold System Telephony and restarting the IP Office
161. ce Core Software BIN Files Each IP Office control unit and expansion module contains and runs its own part of the IP Office core software These parts take the form of bin files binary files Modules are supplied with a base level of core software bin files loaded Currently this base level is IP Office 2 1 Therefore one of the first steps of the installation process is to upgrade the modules from this base level to the level of IP Office core software required for example IP Office 3 1 The bin files for each IP Office software level are included on the IP Office Administrator Applications CD for that software level They are installed from that CD as part of the IP Office Manager application IP Office Manager can then be used to upgrade the bin files loaded in the modules within an IP Office system Updated sets of software and bin files may also be made available through the Avaya support web site See Web Sites e Software Level The IP Office core software level is expressed in the form X Y Z for example 2 1 27 where X is the major software level Y is the minor level and Z is the build number The following rules apply to the core software level used by modules within an IP Office system and between linked IP Office systems e All modules within an IP Office should run the same level of core software Doing otherwise will lead to misoperation of the system Installation Manual Page 38 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a
162. ce Number REN for this terminal equipment is 1 The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five IP nigh Operation in EU 999 and 112 calls must not be barred Doing so will invalidate the approval 2 All connections at the MDF shall be identifiable by suitable labeling 3 The CE mark displayed on IP Office equipment indicates the systems compliance with the EMC LVD and R amp TTE Directives and common technical regulations for Primary Rate and Basic Rate ISDN 4 All ports for the connection of other non telecommunications apparatus have a Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV safety status IP Office Operation in New Zealand The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services Installat
163. cemail card and wireless access point card Cards are hot swapable and order of slot usage is not significant RJ45 socket Used for connection of analog phones During power failure PHONE port 1 is directly connected to ANALOG trunk port 2 Not suitable for out of building connections On some older Small Office Edition control units these ports are labeled as POT rather than PHONE WAN RJ45 socket 10 100Mbps Ethernet LAN port Acts as LAN2 within the configuration aa 3 5mm Jack socket Function ground point Used for connection of a function or protective D E ground Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement All control units are available in either North America or Rest of World variants The choice controls various default settings of the unit For E911 support a North American variant control unit must be used The companding can be changed once a unit is installed Item VEET Country SAP Code Small Office Edition 4T 4A 8DS Small Office Edition 4T 4A 8DS IEC60320 C13 Power Cord BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P 700289770 Control units are supplied with an external power supply unit but not a locale specific power cord Installation Manual Page 186 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Internal Cards Modem Cards A modem card allows the IP Office to answer incoming modem calls up to V 90 There are two variant
164. cense types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone Products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware Products originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User License Type s Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights Unauthorized reproduction transfer and or use can be a criminal a
165. ck Scansoft supplied TTS software with Voicemail Pro One TTS VMPro TTS Enables use of text to speech facilities using Avaya IP400 Avaya 182299 license per simultaneous instance of TTS usage Generic party TTS software with Voicemail Pro One license TTS per simultaneous instance of TTS usage VMPro VB Script Enables VB Script functionality with Voicemail Pro IP400 VB 182300 Scripting VMPro Database Enables 3rd party database support within Voicemail 1IP400 3rd Party 182298 Interface Pro call flows IVR VMPro Enables integration between Voicemail Pro and the IP400 187166 Recordings Avaya Contact Store for IP Office application ContactStore for VMPro TTS Enables use of text to speech facilities using third IP400 3rd Party 182303 Administrators ContactStore can be run unlicensed from the date of IPO the first recorded call Installation Manual Page 274 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP DECT Licenses These licenses are for Avaya IP DECT They differ from normal IP Office licenses in that they are entered into the Avaya IP DECT Mobility Manager ADMM base station of the IP DECT system and not into the configuration of the IP Office system The licenses are based on the PARK number of the ADMM base station License Description RFA Name SAP 1 Base Allows a single base station that IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 1 RFP 100379027 Station being the ADMM LIC CU 2 Base Allows up to 2 bas
166. ck 3 Except on phones with only two physical programmable buttons the minimum recommend number of call appearance buttons is 3 4 No call coverage bridged or line appearance buttons can be programmed until a user has call appearance buttons 5 Appearance buttons set on buttons not matched by the user s current associated phone are not used and are ignored by the IP Office Installation Manual Page 127 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 1 Gi lt 0 Procedure Using IP Office Manager if only button programming changes are required the configuration changes can be merged back to the IP Office system without requiring a reboot 1 Using Manager load the current configuration from the IP Office 2 Select the i User required to display their configuration details 3 Select Button Programming Button Programming Menu Programming Twinning T3 Options Phone Manager Options Hunt Group Memk Button Wo Label Al Edit Shortcode Button Ho Label Achon Acton Data Action Action Data Remove Appearance io Edit ppearance Appearance an Twinning Paste e The number of button displayed is based on the phone associated with the user when the configuration was loaded This can be overridden by selecting Display All Buttons This may be necessary for users who switch between different phones using hot desking or have an expansion unit attached to their p
167. d Proceed to Stage 10 Adding Expansion Modules Page 93 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Stage 9b Grounding E1R2 Coaxial Connections E1R2 coaxial trunk cards must be grounded correctly and require the IP Office control unit to be connected to a protective ground Normally the ends of one connection is grounded For example if the exchange Tx1 is grounded the IP Office Rx1 should also be grounded However this must be confirmed with the line provider to establish which ends they want grounded ia Procedure 1 Use the two jumpers supplied with the card match the ground selection of the line provider For example if the line provider wants the IP Office Rx1 grounded place a jumper across the two Rx1 pins of jumper block J6 2 Connect the ground strap spade end B to the Spade connection on the board 3 Connect the other end of the ground strap C to the blanking plate using the long securing screw supplied with the card 4 Ensure that the coaxial connector ports are locked to the blanking plate using the nuts provided 5 Continue with trunk card installation as in Stage 9a aa A ai i Installation Manual Page 94 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation Stage 9c Fitting Small Office Edition Trunk Cards The Small Office Edition control unit can be fitted with a WAN card a Quad BRI card or a single PRI T1 card Proc
168. d messages Only 4 simultaneous connections to leave or play messages are supported Voicemail Pro This application requires various licenses entered into the IP Office configuration to control the features it offers and the number of simultaneous connections up to 30 on the IP412 control unit The operation of Voicemail Pro can be customised to provide special services e Campaigns The Voicemail Pro can be configured to run a campaign This consists of a series of questions for which the Voicemail Pro records the callers answer or key presses The resulting recordings can then be played back by users The web aspect of campaigns allows user to perform this playback and processing of campaign recordings via their web browser This requires a web server to be run on the same PC as the Voicemail Pro software e Text to Speech TTS Through adding additional licenses the Voicemail Pro is able to use the TTS functions of Windows to speak text and numbers to callers in addition to recording prompts This is intended mainly for scenarios where the Voicemail Pro is obtaining text and number values from a customer database e Integrated Messaging Service IMS Both Voicemail Pro and Voicemail Lite support a feature called voicemail email to send messages or message alerts to a users email This however is a one way process IMS allows this to become a two way process where users can play voicemail messages through their email mailbox or voicemail mai
169. d power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source 56201IP Connects via IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp F Typical Off Hook Power 5 9W Class 3 Consumption Display 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels Supported Add Ons EU24 EU24BL Upgradeable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with Voice x Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys lt SI SPEAKER v amp HEADSET v 4 MUTE n ila VOLUME UP Xx Es MESSAGES amp HOLD C TRANSFER w VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CW CONFERENCE Variant SAP Code 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup usa 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Installation Manual Page 239 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 5621 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4620SW This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source 5620IP Connects via IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp J Typical Off Hook Power 5 9W Class 3 Consumption Display 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels Supported Add Ons EU24 EU24BL Upgradeable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with Voice wy Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys lt SI SPEAKER v amp
170. da 2 O Anti static wrist strap and ground point 3 O IP Office Monitor application Installation Manual Page 92 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Procedure Fitting Trunk Cards A Basic Installation Check that correct card has been supplied Dual PRI cards are only supported in Slot A of the IP406 V2 control unit or both slots on an IP412 control unit Ensure that you are wearing a ground wrist strap connected to a suitable ground point Remove the 7 screws fixing the IP Office control unit cover and slide the cover off the unit Remove the 2 screws fixing the slot blanking plate 5 Attach the replacement blanking plate Installation Manual Using the card as a template locate the two holes in the control unit circuit board Insert the spacer pegs into these holes Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located push the card onto the jumper block and spacer pegs Coaxial E1R2 Trunk Cards Only For these trunk cards care must be taken to ground the connectors See the following section for details This must be completed before proceeding any further Reapply power to the control unit and check that it restarts correctly Using Manager receive the IP Office configuration and check that the lines are now shown If Modem and VCM cards were also fitted whilst the control unit was open use Monitor to check that the VCOMP and MDM values match the cards fitte
171. dit the control unit s now defaulted configuration Installation Manual Page 171 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Erasing the Operational Software This process should be performed from a PC with a fixed IP address directly connected to the IP Office control unit and with the IP Office system disconnected from any network During the process the control unit s IP address may default to a value in the 192 168 42 1 to 192 168 42 10 range If this occurs it may be necessary to amend the BOOTP entry in Manager to match the address the system is using Gi k Ot ii jek 1 Do not perform any of the following processes unless absolutely necessary The IP Office software can normally be upgraded through Manager using the File Advanced Upgrade command This process erases the operational software Before attempting this process you must know the MAC and IP addresses of the system plus have a backup copy of its configuration and the correct bin file for the control unit type and level of software A The presence of any firewall blocking TFTP and or BOOTP will cause this process to fail Procedure Erasing the Core Software via Debug Run Manager In the BOOTP entries check that there is an entry that matches the MAC Address IP Address and bin file used by the system the first two details can be found in the Module settings in the system s configuration file 2 Ifan en
172. ds the use of Windows XP 2000 Conferencing Center Web Client simply requires Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher no other application required Although a server application IP Office SMDR can also run on a Windows 2000 2003 and Windows XP client Operating Systems but should not run on the same PC as a CBC or CCC Delta Server Windows 98 is only supported on IP Office V2 1 and V3 0 applications it is not supported on IP Office 3 1 applications and above Systems that are upgraded to V3 1 should have also have any Windows 98 PCs that are running IP Office applications upgraded to use Windows 2000 Windows XP or later operating systems Windows Small Business Server 2003 is supported for the same applications as Windows 2003 Server 64 Bit versions of Microsoft operating systems are not currently supported with IP Office applications Installation Manual Page 49 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Server Applications Dependencies Applications Minimum PC Intel Intel Resources Pentium Celeron VM Lite 256MB RAM Any Any Any 1 4GHz 1 7GHz 1 4GHz 2GB drive Any Any Any 1 4GHz 1 7GHz 1 4GHz AMD 256MB RAM 2GB drive Attempting to run the applications on lower specification PC s may cause degradation of operation and will not be supported To avoid replacing the server when adding new applications we recommend that a Pentium 4 2 8GHz or equivale
173. e Brazilian Swedish See below The Voicemail Pro server part of the software consists of several components in addition to the core server software these are e Campaigns The Voicemail Pro can be configured to run a campaign This consists of a series of questions for which the Voicemail Pro records the callers answer or key presses The resulting recordings can then be played back by users The web aspect of campaigns allows user to perform this playback and processing of campaign recordings via their web browser This requires a web server to be run on the same PC as the Voicemail Pro software e Textto Speech TTS Through adding additional licenses the Voicemail Pro is able to use the TTS functions of Windows to speak text and numbers to callers in addition to recording prompts This is intended mainly for scenarios where the Voicemail Pro is obtaining text and number values from a customer database e Integrated Messaging Service IMS Both Voicemail Pro and Voicemail Lite support a feature called voicemail email to send messages or message alerts to a users email This however is a one way process IMS allows this to become a two way process where users can play voicemail messages through their email mailbox or voicemail mailbox IMS interoperates with the customer s Exchange server and the user s Outlook Minimum PC Requirements XP 2000 2000 2003 ed Ko NN od KO Server Server Variant RAM HD Pentium Celeron AMD Voic
174. e System 24 Typical Off Hook Typical Server PC 24 U UDP 45 163 164 IP 45 UK 40 48 211 218 219 298 UK English 40 UL60950 317 U Law 177 179 181 183 185 298 Unboxed 177 179 181 183 185 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 Under Destination 141 Under File 172 understand 112 Security Settings 112 Unearthed Power Cords 23 298 UNI 194 298 uninsulated 318 uninterruptable 55 Uninterrupted Power Supply 24 Unit 98 Unit Broadcast 106 Unit Broadcast Address 84 112 116 University 54 55 Unknown 35 152 155 156 Unpacking 77 Equipment 77 Unshielded Twisted Pair 26 277 Unsuitable 134 untick 106 Validate 106 WAN3 106 Unused Trunks 135 Unvalidated 106 Unvalidated Upgrade 106 up down 164 Upgrade Procedure 106 Upgrade Wizard 106 Upgrade Wizard tool 106 upgradeable Avaya 42 Upgradeable Firmware 223 224 229 230 232 236 239 240 243 244 245 246 UpgradeWiz 106 Upgrading 106 112 120 172 275 298 1 99 106 3 5 275 298 Core Software 106 IP Office 106 IP Office 3 2 112 IP403 106 IP406 V1 106 IP406 V2 106 pre Level 2 1 Systems 106 UPLINK button 181 183 289 UPN 26 36 175 217 298 UPS 24 55 UPS Calculator 55 URL 320 US 48 120 226 228 231 267 268 298 US English 40 US PRI 194 USB Feature Key 154 USB Feature Key Installation 156 USB Port Feature Key 298 Use External Music 142 selecting 142 Use External Music on Hold 142 User 80 127 129 141
175. e 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview CTI Applications e TAPILink Pro Using the same software as TAPILink Lite TAPILink Pro provides all of the features and functionality of TAPILink Lite but additionally provides third party CTI operation This means that a single server can control and monitor any number of telephone devices This requires entry of a CTI Link Pro license TAPILink Pro also provides the ability to monitor and control groups This allows an application to be notified when a call enters a queue and can also redirect it to another location TAPILink Pro also supports additional TAPI functionality such as e Agent login e Agent logout e Set and retrieve divert destination e Set and retrieve extended divert status Forward All Calls Forward on Busy Forward on No Answer Do not Disturb e Retrieving the extension locale language e Set and clear the message waiting lamp e Enable and disable group membership e Generate and detect DIMF digits and tones requires the TAPI WAV driver e TAPI WAV driver Provides software based support for voice processing Purchasing the CTI Link Pro RFA license key also enables 4 ports of voice processing additional ports can be purchased in 4 port increments The TAPI WAV driver is for use with TAPI 2 1 only for TAPI 3 0 IP Office supports the Media Service Provider MSP interface defined by Microsoft in TAPI 3 0 e DevLink Pro Provides a real time event stream in additio
176. e IP Office control unit _IP Office 3 Check that the orange LED lamp on the IP Office LAN port is on The green LED may also be flickering as it indicates traffic across the LAN connection Select Start Run and enter cmd In the command window that appears enter ping 192 168 42 1 The results should show a number of ping replies from the IP Office This confirms basic communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office 6 If there are no ping replies 1 Enter ipconfig The results should list the IP address settings of the Manager PC as required above and with no mention of DHCP being used Enter exit 7 Check the cable connection Installation Manual Page 83 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 05 Receiving a Configuration Pre 3 2 The following is the normal procedure for receiving a copy of the IP Office configuration from a new or defaulted control unit running pre 3 2 IP Office core software E Objective This process tests the communication between the Manager application and the IP Office control unit Information Required 1 LI System Password For a new or defaulted system this is password Installation Manual Page 84 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation Procedure Receiving the Configuration from a Pre 3 2 IP Office Control Unit 1 Select Start Programs IP Office Manager 2 Click in the main toolbar or
177. e Multi Stage Upgrades Due to the need to adjust internal memory allocation for certain upgrades some control units need to perform a multi stage upgrade process Control Upgrade Stages Required Unit To between 2 0 and The IP403 must first be upgraded to level 1 99 2 1 27 Once upgrade to 1 99 the unit can be upgraded to levels up to 2 1 27 To 2 1 28 or higher The IP403 must first be upgraded to level 2 99 Once upgraded to 2 99 the unit can be upgraded to 2 1 28 or higher IP406 V1 To 3 1 or higher The control unit must first be upgraded to level 3 0 999 MPA rest ornener Once upgraded to 3 0 999 the unit can be upgraded to 3 1 IP406 V2 To 3 1 or higher The control unit must first be upgraded to level 3 0 999 Once upgraded to 3 0 999 the unit can be upgraded to 3 1 To 3 2 or higher The control unit must first be upgraded to level 3 1 999 Once upgraded to 3 1 999 the unit can be upgraded to 3 2 e Multiple Managers If more than one copy of Manager is running it is possible for the IP Office to request BIN files from a different Manager from the one that started the upgrade process Ensure that only one copy of Manager is running when upgrading an IP Office system Information Required 1 LJ System Password For a new or defaulted system this is password E Tools Required 1 O Manager PC The Upgrade Wizard tool is part of the Manager application Installation Manual Page 106 IP Office
178. e The assessment should leave you confident that the implemented network will have the capacity for the foreseen data and voice traffic and can support H 323 DHCP TFTP and jitter buffers in H 323 applications e An outline of the expected network assessment targets is Test Minimum Assessment Target Less than 150ms Less than 2 Monitor statistics once every minute for a full week Installation Manual Page 53 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Training Avaya University provides a wide range of training courses for IP Office and its associated applications This includes courses necessary for IP Office resellers to become Avaya Authorized Channel Partners and for individuals to achieve IP Office certification Details of all the course can be found on the Avaya University web site http www avaya learning com The site can be used to check course availability and to book course It also includes on line courses and on line course assessments The site requires users to setup a user name and password in order to track their personal training record The Avaya University site also includes details of the processes necessary for achieving different levels of product certification These processes allow installers and maintainers to achieve certification in different areas such as Selling Design Implementation Maintenance Voicemail and Contact Centers Levels of individual certification
179. e applications e IP Office Manager This tool is used to access all parts of the IP Office configuration Different levels of access can be defined to control which parts of the configuration the Manager user can view and alter Manager is also used to upgrade the software files used by an IP Office system When running is also acts as a TF TP server from which upgradeable Avaya phones can request new software e Monitor SysMon Monitor is a tool that can show a trace of all activity on the IP Office system in detail As a consequence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol knowledge Despite that however all IP Office installers and maintainers need to understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve support issues e Call Status This is a simple application that shows current calls in progress on the IP Office system It is intended for use by IP Office installers and maintainers e Feature Key Server This application is required for IP Office systems where licenses are being validated against a parallel or USB port Feature Key dongle It must be installed on the same PC as the dongle e SNMP MIB s Not an application as such The IP Office SNMP MIB files all the status of the IP Office system to be monitored by 3rd party SNMP applications such as Castlerock and HP OpenView When configured for SNMP operation the IP Office can also send alerts
180. e front panel facing down only e The Z shaped bracket must not be used as the sole mounting fixture ra Tools Required 1 O Drill and drill bits suitable for the wall fixings selected 2 O Screwdrivers Rei Parts and Equipment Required 1 O Wall fixings suitable for 3 No 8 screws 2 O 3x No 8 panhead screws minimum 25mm long Installation Manual Page 102 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation 1 1 Procedure 1 Using a drill size suitable for the selected wall fixing drill two holes 6 3 inches 160mm apart either horizontally or vertically 2 Insert the wall fixings Insert the two No 8 panhead screws leaving approximately 0 4 inches 10mm proud of wall Fit the Z shaped bracket 2 onto the base of the unit using the M3 self tapping screw supplied 5 Slide the unit onto the two screws locating them into two of the retaining slots 1 6 Mark the position of the retaining screw for the Z bracket 7 Remove the unit from the wall and drill a hole and insert a wall fixing for the Z bracket position 8 Re position the unit and secure with a No 8 panhead through the slot of the Z shaped bracket Installation Manual Page 103 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 14 Grounding Earthing Use of ground connections reduces the likelihood of problems in most telephony and data systems This is especially important in buildings where multiple
181. e name of the licensed feature This may differ from the ordered RFA name e Instances Depending on the license this may be the number of ports enabled or number of simultaneous users of the licensed feature e Expires Most purchased licenses have no expiry setting For some features trial licenses may be available which will have an expiry date Installation Manual Page 152 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Feature Key Dongles Various IP Office features and applications require entry of a licence key or keys into the system s configuration Each licence key is a unique 32 character number based on the feature being activated and the serial number of a Feature Key dongle installed somewhere with the IP Office system e PC Less Licensing o This uses a serial dongle attached dredi to the DTE serial port of the IP Office control unit It requires the control unit to have a 9 pin D type DTE port A PC running the IP Office Feature Key server application is not required in this scenario e PC Base Licensing _ _____z This method uses a dongle attached to a USB or parallel port on a PC running the IP Office Feature Key server application This PC must be on the same LAN segment as the IP Office control unit Typically the dongle and IP Office Feature Key server application are installed on the same PC as the IP Office Voicemail Lite or Voicemail Pro application if present There a
182. e of TTS usage VMPro VB Script Enables VB Script functionality with Voicemail Pro IP400 VB 182300 Scripting VMPro Database Enables 3rd party database support within Voicemail 1IP400 3rd Party 182298 Interface Pro call flows IVR VMPro Enables integration between Voicemail Pro and the IP400 187166 Recordings Avaya Contact Store for IP Office application ContactStore for VMPro TTS Enables use of text to speech facilities using third IP400 3rd Party 182303 Administrators ContactStore can be run unlicensed from the date of IPO the first recorded call Installation Manual Page 269 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Licence Keys License Keys CCC License shows the name as it appears in the IP Office configuration RFA Name is the name used for the orderable item License Description RFA Name SAP CCC Server Enables the CCC Server application Archiver and IP400 CCC SVR 171994 Wallboard Manager with support for 1 supervisor reporting on 5 agents and one PC Wallboard e This license is a pre requisite for all the following CCC licensing CCC Agents Enables various numbers of additional agents 5 10 20 IP400 CCC 171995 Aol 10 174469 CCC Enables additional supervisors 1 5 10 20 up to the IP400 CCC 1 171996 Supervisors maximum of 21 supported supervisors se CCC PC Enables additional CCC PC Wallboards for 5 10 20 50 IP400 CCC 5 172786 Wallboards agents P
183. e of port is found on the rear of IP Office control units and external expansion modules It is used for connecting the external expansion modules to there parent IP Office control unit The connection between these ports should only be done using an Avaya Expansion Interconnect Cable No other cable type should be used Expansion Interconnect Cable The Expansion Interconnect cable is used to link expansion ports between the IP Office control unit and external expansion module except WAN3 modules e WARNING This is the only cable that should be used for connecting an IP Office control unit to external expansion modules except for WAN3 modules RJ45 RJ45 1 Meter 3 28 Feet e Supply One cable is normally supplied with each external expansion module e SAP Code 700213457 Installation Manual Page 287 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation EXT O P Port These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units They are used for connection to external switching relays The port uses a standard 3 5mm stereo jack plug for connection The IP Office is able to open high resistance close low resistance or pulse close for 5 seconds and then open two switches within the port Either switch can be operated separately These switches are intended for activation of external relays in systems such as door opening systems CAUTION In installations where this port is connected to
184. e stations IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 2 RFP 700379035 Stations LIC CU 3 5 Base Allows up to 5 base stations IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 3 5 RFP 700379043 Stations LIC CU gt 5 Base Allows up to 32 base stations IP DECT IPO MOBMGR gt 5 RFP 700379050 Stations LIC CU Upgrade to 2 Upgrade to allow up to 2 base IP DECT IPO UPG TOA2 BASE 700379068 Stations STATION LIC CU Upgrade to 3 Upgrade to allow up to 5 base IP DECT IPO UPG TOA2 BASE __ 700379076 5 stations STATION LIC CU Upgrade to Upgrade to allow up to 32 base IP DECT IPO UPG TOA 2 BASE 700379084 gt 5 stations STATION LIC CU Installation Manual Page 275 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 45 Day Trial Licenses These licenses differ from other IP Office licenses in that they are time based and expire 45 days after issue Each trial licenses will only be issued once for a particular Feature Key dongle serial number License RFA Name SAP Voicemail Pro Networked Messaging IPO TRIAL NTWKD MSGING LIC DS 189776 3rd Party Database IVR IPO TRIAL 3RD PARTY IVR RFA LIC DS 189777 Avaya Text to Speech for IP Office 1 port IPO TRIAL AVAYA TTS RFA 1 LIC CU 189778 VB Scripting IPO TRIAL VB SCRIPTING RFA LIC DS 189779 Conferencing Center IPO TRIAL CONF CENTER RFA LIC DS 189780 Third Party Text to Speech 1 port IPO TRIAL 3RD PRTY TTS RFA LIC CU 189781 Voicemail Pro 4 ports IPO TRIAL VM PRO RFA LIC DS 189782 SoftConsole 1 user IPO TR
185. eA 1 Upgradable Firmware Aaaa Bbbb Cccc Dddd i Variant SAP Code Installation Manual Page 216 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 3626 This phones is similar to the 3616 in functionality However the 3626 has a ruggedized construction This is an 802 11b WiFi phone It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor AVPP Feature Detail Message Waiting Lamp Upgradable Firmware E Variant SAP Code 3626 Wireless Phone Additional battery pack for 3626 Desktop charger for 3626 3626 Gang changer Clip for 3626 3626 Vinyl case with keypad cover 700412984 3616 3626 Configuration Cradle 700375934 Installation Manual Page 217 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 3701 The 3701 is an Avaya DECT handset supported on IP Office when using Avaya IP DECT base stations Feature Detail IP network 3 14 Ix Upgradable Firmware Variant SAP Code Power Adaptor for Charger Installation Manual Page 218 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 3 11 The 3711 is an Avaya DECT handset supported on IP Office when using Avaya IP DECT base stations Feature Detail Programmable Buttons Upgradable Firmware Variant SAP Code Power Adaptor for Charger 8 Phone Gang Charger 700346851 Power Adapator for Rack Mount Charger Global 700346869 Installation Manual
186. ebug This process erases the IP Office s configuration settings but does not alter its security settings It is easier to use than the boot loader method 1 WARNING Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office s configuration before performing this action 2 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK Enter AT DEBUG The control unit should response with the time and date and then Hello gt to show it is ready to accept commands 6 To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter eraseconfig The Hello gt command prompt reappears when the action is completed 7 To erase the backup configuration stored in non volatile Flash memory enter erasenvconfig The Hello gt command prompt reappears when the action is completed 8 To reboot the IP Office enter reboot The IP Office will reboot and restart with a defaulted configuration 9 Close the terminal program session 10 Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and edit the control unit s now defaulted configuration Installation Manual Page 169 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installa
187. eck the required format for a CSV file prior to import is to export and study the settings from an existing system File Name Fields in Order Name Extension Group Hunt Rotary Idle Queuing On Voicemail On Broadcast Voicemail Email License License License Key ShortCode Code Telephone Number Feature User o Name Extension User Restriction Rights Voicemail Email Configuration Proprietary format e Hunt Group Apart from Name Extension and Voicemail Email the fields use a 1 or 0 value for on or off e License e The License field is for information only and is ignored during import e Following import the License name may appear as invalid with Manager To resolve this save and then reload the configuration file e System The format of the system CSV is too complex to be described It is a full export of all the IP Office system s configuration settings This file format should only be used for export and import between systems and not for any offline editing Installation Manual Page 75 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation 01 Unpacking Equipment Use the following procedure when unpacking any equipment supplied by Avaya or an Avaya distributor E Objective To check that the correct equipment has been supplied and that no damage has occurred during transit Information Required is O Equipment Checklist Draw up an installation checklist of the parts and e
188. ective ground point in the rack e Must be used when more than 3 Barrier Boxes are in use e Amaximum of 16 Barrier Boxes are supported on any module Installation Manual Page 33 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Feature Key Dongles Various IP Office features and applications require entry of a licence key or keys into the system s configuration Each licence key is a unique 32 character number based on the feature being activated and the serial number of a Feature Key dongle installed somewhere with the IP Office system e PC Less Licensing y This uses a serial dongle attached directly to the DTE serial port of the IP Office control unit It requires the control unit to have a 9 pin D type DTE port A PC running the IP Office Feature Key server application is not required in this scenario e PC Base Licensing a This method uses a dongle attached to a USB or parallel port on a PC running the IP Office Feature Key server application This PC must be on the same LAN segment as the IP Office control unit Typically the dongle and IP Office Feature Key server application are installed on the same PC as the IP Office Voicemail Lite or Voicemail Pro application if present There are three type of Feature Key dongle available The serial number is printed either directly onto the dongle or onto a label on the dongle Feature Key Type Description SAP Code Plugs directly into the serial
189. ed courses The site requires users to register in order to provide the user with access to details of their training record See Training Avaya Community http www aucommunity com This is the official discussion forum for Avaya product users However it does not include any separate area for discussion of IP Office issues Avaya IP Office Knowledge Base http www avaya com ipoffice knowledgebase Access to an on line regularly updated version of the IP Office Knowledge Base Currently this link is only available to Avaya Business Partners while running an ARA account Avaya Remote Access connection Avaya UPS Calculator http ups avayaups com AC_01 asp An online calculator for uninterruptable power supply UPS requirements Allows specification of a range of equipment to be supported including IP Office 403 406 and 412 control units See Power Supply Backup UPS Other Non Avaya Web Sites A number of third party web forums exist that discuss IP Office These can act as useful source of information about how the IP Office is used Some of these forums require you to be a member and to register These are not official Avaya forums and their content is not monitored or sanctioned by Avaya e Tek Tips http www tek tips com e Yahoo Groups http groups yahoo com group ipoffice e Lycos Forum http members lycos co uk ipoffice e PBX Tech http www pbxtech info forumdisplay php f 8 e IP Office Italian http www
190. ed on IP Office This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source 5601IP Feature Detail Headset Socket dx Message Waiting Lamp Typical Off Hook Power Consumption 2 PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys x SPEAKER x 4 HEADSET MUTE v a VOLUME UP MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER v w VOLUME DOWN tt DROP 54 REDIAL x KW CONFERENCE SAP Code 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord Installation Manual Page 236 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 5602IP 5602SW The 5602IP and 5602SW phones are similar in physical appearance and functions However the 5602SW includes a PC data pass through port which gives priority to phone traffic The 5602IP is no longer available from Avaya This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source Feature 5602IP 5602SW Headset Socket Ja 4 x 2 lines PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys x 3 SPEAKER x HEADSET MUTE sd ai VOLUME UP EA MESSAGES amp HOLD TRANSFER w VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CONFERENCE Variant SAP Code 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381817 700381544 700356447 US 1151C2 Power
191. ed the system will reboot Installation Manual Page 173 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components System Components This sections contains overviews and summaries of the individual components used to build an IP Office system These are the units supported by IP Office 3 2 core software Some units may no longer be available from Avaya Phones Hardware Control Units e IP412 IP406 V2 IP406 V1 IP403 Small Office Edition SOE Internal Cards e Modem Cards e Wireless Card e Embedded Voicemail Memory e Voice Compression Modules Trunk Cards e Analog Trunk Card Uni ATM4U Analog Trunk Cards ATM4 BRI Trunk Cards T1 PRI Trunk Cards E1 PRI Trunk Cards WAN Trunk Card E1R2 PRI Trunk Cards External Expansion Modules e Analog Trunk 16 Digital Station V2 Digital Station Phone V2 Phone So8 WAN3 Miscellaneous e Cables Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 3700 Series 3800 Series 4400 Series 4600 Series 3701 3711 3810 4406 4412 4424 Software Applic 5400 Series e 5402 e 5410 e e 5420 5600 Series e 5601 5602 5610 5620 5621 6400 Series e 6408D e 6416D e 6424D T3 IP and UPN e 13 Classic e T3 Comfort e T3 Compact TransTalk e TransTalk 9040 Phone Add Ons 4450 EU24 EU24BL T3 DSS XM24 201B RIM ations Call Status Compact Business Center CBC Compact Contact Center CCC Conferencing Center ContactStore Delta Serve
192. edia e These modules are still supported but are no longer available from Avaya Installation Manual Page 17 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards P These cards provide message and prompt storage space for embedded voicemail and gt Li auto attendant options The cards used are specially formatted compact flash cards e Supported on this control unit type e X Not supported on this control unit type Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards SAP Code Small IP403 IP406 IP406 1P412 Office V1 V2 Edition a Small Office Edition Memory Card 700289721 d Supports a 64Mb Compact Flash card fitted in a PCMCIA slot caddy This provides up to 10 hours of compressed message and prompt storage Compression uses voice compression channels during usage IP406 V2 Memory Card 700343460 J Supports a 512MB Compact Flash card This provides up to 15 hours of uncompressed message storage e Memory cards in these slots can also be used for storage of files normally obtained via TFTP transfer For example the music on hold wav file and supported 4600 Series 5600 Series software files This will however reduce storage space for prompt and message files if embedded voicemail is being used e Non Avaya cards can be used for file storage but will not support Embedded Voicemail Installation Manual Page 18 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Sm
193. edure 1 Ensure that you wear an anti static wrist strap that is connected to a suitable grounding point 2 Remove the top cover 1 from the base cover by removing the four retaining screws 2 on either side 3 Remove the rear panel 3 Locate the holes for the two trunk card spacer pegs and insert them 5 Plug the trunk card 5 onto its sockets and stand off hex pillars e ffitting a WAN card replace the rear panel with the new one supplied with the WAN card e Otherwise on the rear panel press out all of the knock out panels 4 to match the trunk card being fitted Replace the rear panel 5 Fit the top cover back in place and reinsert the four screws previously removed On a 12 Proceed to Stage 12 Upgrading the Core Software Installation Manual a Page95 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 10 Rack Mounting Instructions All IP Office control units and expansion modules except the Small Office Edition can be rack mounted To do this requires a separate rack mounting kit SAP 700210800 for each unit and module This procedure shows how to add the rack mounting brackets to the control unit and to each expansion module as it is added to the system Installation Requirements 1 Power Supplies Rack installation still requires the units and modules to use their original external power supply modules Therefore if the rack has an integral power strip sufficient sockets m
194. eeee 201 Manageriale halo 262 IP400 Phone Module V2 203 NONO elia 263 IP400 Phone Module 205 Phone Manager a 264 IP400 So8 Module 207 SOollCOonsolei iicalalaliol da 266 IP400 WAN3 Module 209 Voicemail Lite L e 267 PRONES e bl ad E 211 VOICSMAIPT O ritiene 268 Installation Manual Page iv IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 LIGENCE KeVS ribelle 2 0 License Keys CCC 270 License Keys General 271 License Reys Crlc ol alari 212 License Keys Phone Manager 2 3 License Keys Voicemall 274 IP DECT LICENSES 275 45 Day Trial LICENSES 2 6 Ports and Cabl s4 anita 211 Cable Srna EARN 217 Standard IP Office Cables 278 IP Office Port TYypeSs 279 ANALOG Port 280 AUDIO POM nern le 281 BRIPoOrSo a cat seeiecee eens 282 BRILE ON raain lacci 283 PRI BRI Trunk Cable 283 DG IPPlscsdrc ciali 284 DS PONG aroen a 285 Structured Cabling Line Cord 285 DTE POr O 286 DTE C DIES nirre 286 EXPANSION POdSacr anita 287 Expansion Interconnect Cable 287 EX i all cal 0 ai 288 LAN PO UGevseacsecaceseaeca tahun ato tareucnataete tates 289 E
195. email Pro 256MB 12GB 1 4GHz 1 7GHz 1 4GHz d d Server plus IMS and or 512MB P Not Athlon XP d d Web Campaigns 2 8GHz tested 3000 All Athlon TTS e Also allow 1MB per minute for message and prompt storage Installation Manual Page 268 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components License Description RFA Name S AP Voicemail Pro 4 Enables Voicemail Pro plus 4 ports IP400 Voicemail 1171991 ports Pro Additional Adds additional ports 2 4 8 or 16 to an existing IP400 Voicemail Pro Voicemail Pro up to the maximum number of ports Voicemail ports supported by the IP Office control unit type IP403 and Pro Small Office Edition 10 IP406 V1 V2 20 IP412 8 1174461 Networked Enables VPNM Voicemail Pro Networked Messaging 1P400 Networked 182297 Messaging functionality within Voicemail Pro This allows Messaging message exchange with remote Voicemail Pro systems and Avaya Interchange systems Integrated Enables IMS operation with Voicemail Pro Enables IP400 Integrated 171990 Messaging synchronization to MS Exchange email systems with a Messaging Pro form within Outlook to control voicemail playback ScanSoft supplied TTS software with Voicemail Pro One TTS VMPro TTS Enables use of text to speech facilities using Avaya IP400 Avaya 182299 license per simultaneous instance of TTS usage Generic party TTS software with Voicemail Pro One license TTS per simultaneous instanc
196. ephone company The ground wire must be thick enough to handle all the lines being affected by indirect strike at the same time Page 30 Installation Manual 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office 3 2 Connection Type DS Phone Extensions Bh Digital Station Expansion module DS ports only Protection Device Type Avaya 146E DS2 IROB Supports up to 4 connections System Overview Requirement Connection from the expansion module to the phone must be via a surge protector at each end and via the primary protection point in each building IP Office Barrier Box The IP Office expansion module and Supports a control unit and IROB devices must be single connected to the protective ground point connection in their building Maximum of 16 on any expansion module Analog Phone Extensions l Phones Expansion module POT or PHONE ports only The between building connection must be via earthed ducting preferable underground The cable must not be exposed externally at any point Avaya 146C CO Line Protector Supports up to 4 two wire lines For installations in the Republic of South Africa the fitting of surge protection on analog trunks is a requirement Analog Trunks For other locations where the risk of lightning strikes is felt to be high additional protection of incoming analog trunks is recommended Avaya 146G Surge Protector Connections from an IP Office Ext O P port to an
197. ernal expansion module For the Small Office Edition control unit an optional WAN trunk interface card can be fitted Each WAN port supports a single synchronous data connection which can be X 21 V 35 or V 24 V 28 Selection of the required interface is determined by the cable plugged into the WAN port when power is applied e WAN ports must be clocked externally the IP Office does not provide a clock signal The clock signal is usually provided by the service provider but under some circumstances for example laser microwave or baseband modems extra provision must be made by the installer Pin Protocol Description Pin Protocol Description 4 x21 STA Transmit Data A eo WAN ID O Connect to Pin 6 ESE CONTE RIA 8 V 24V 35 DTR Data Terminal Ready _ 9 V24 eRx Receive Data a motused m musa Ean le ___LI 1 For the USA only FCC Part 68 registered data circuit terminal equipment should be connected to the WAN Ports 2 Inall cases Pin 19 should be connected to the cable screen Installation Manual Page 293 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation V 24 WAN Cable This cable is used for connection from an IP Office control unit or WAN3 module WAN port to the V 24 WAN service providers equipment si IP Office Ved WAN Service e si VAN Port Connection Point i ITA 25 Way si D Type Plug D Type Plug 3 Meters 04 Feet IP Office WAN Port Si
198. ervice User Name and Password The defaults for full configuration access are Administrator and Administrator However these should have been changed as part of the installation process see 16 Configuring Security Settings Installation Manual Page 116 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation 1 41 n Procedure Receiving the Configuration from a Pre 3 2 IP Office Control Unit 1 Select Start Programs IP Office Manager 2 Click in the main toolbar or select File Open Configuration from the menu bar 3 The Select IP Office window appears After a few seconds it should list the control unit that is being setup The default name used is the control units MAC address Select IP Office Name IF Address Type Version Version 3 2 l _ 00E007015050 192 168 42 1 IF 406 DS 3 2015 TCP Discovery Progress Unit Ernadcast Address 255 255 255 265 v Refresh e If the system required was not found the address used for the search can be changed Enter or select the required address in the Unit Broadcast Address field and then click Refresh to perform a new search Click the check the box next to the system and then click OK The name and password request is displayed The name and password must match one of those setup through the security settings The default name and password for full configuration settings access is Administrator and Administrator IP Office Login IP Office IP40b
199. es Numbers blank PIP Auto SPID blank Far Control of Near Camera Yes Audio Quality 168KB s MP Mode Auto Advanced Dialing Dial Channels in Parallel System Information Admin Software and Hardware Hardware e Release 7 0 1 e Camera NTSC e Model VS 512 e Video Comm Interface ISDN Quad BRI e Network Interface Type S T Interface Admin Video Network Admin Video Network Call Preference e MultiPoint Setup Auto e ISDN Video Calls H 320 Yes Installation Manual Page 159 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation SNMP SNMP Introduction SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a standard network protocol that allows the monitoring and management of data devices across a network An SNMP agent can be built into network devices such as routers and hubs An SNMP manager application for example CastleRock or HP OpenView can then communicate with those devices This communication can be e Polling Supported by IP Office 2 0 and above Some SNMP manager applications send out polling messages to the network They then record the responds of any SNMP enabled devices agents This allows the manager to create a network map and to raise an alarm when devices previously present do not respond e Most SNMP manager applications can also do simple IP address polling to locate non SNMP enabled devices However this method of polling does not identify the device type or other information e S
200. ettings and its configurations settings 1 A WARNING Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office s configuration before performing this action 2 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK Switch off power to the IP Office control unit Power on the control unit while repeatedly pressing the escape key until you get a Loader message Below is an example P12 Loader 2 4 CPU Revision 0x0900 Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter AT X3 A typical response is Sector Erases Config followed by a series of OK responses 7 To erase the backup configuration stored in non volatile Flash memory enter AT X2 A typical response if Sector 2 Erase NV Config followed by OK e IP Office 403 only If running an IP Office 403 control unit enter AT X4 8 Switch power to the control unit off and then back on Within the terminal program you should see various messages as the control unit performs various start up tasks 9 Close the terminal program session 10 Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and e
201. external relay device must be via a surge protector External Output Switch Page 31 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 IP Office Installation Rack Mounting All the IP Office control units and external expansion modules are designed for free standing stackable use However except for the Small Office Edition optional rack mounting kits can be ordered for installation of the control units and expansion modules into a 19 rack system Where IP Office systems are being rack mounted the effect of conditions must be considered For example the rack temperature may be above the room temperature and airflow within the rack will be restricted The environmental requirements for the IP Office are still applicable Installation Manual Page 32 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview The following equipment exists to support rack mounted installation of IP Office systems e Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700210800 This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single control unit or expansion module This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module and bolts for securing the module in the rack e Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700293905 Barrier boxes must be used for out of building analog phone extensions This bracket allows up to 8 IP Office barrier boxes to be rack mounted and simplifies the number of connections to the prot
202. familiar with their existing data telephony systems and able to arrange or authorize network accounts server reboots etc 2 Telephone 4 Email C Site Details D Planned System Location e 2 Access Control o oO O Allowable 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F O Allowable 10 to 95 non condensing 6 Power Supply Sockets ___1 per control unit plus 1 per expansion module Also include supplies for any server PC s and monitors 7 Install Method O Free Standing O Rack Mount Not SOE O Wall Mount SOE Only Installation Manual Page 62 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Planning E Control Unit Control O IP403 O 406V1 O 406 V2 O 412 Unit O Small Office Edition Trunk Slot No Dual PRI except IP406 V2 and IP412 No E1 or A E1R2 on Small Office Edition Trunk Slot Not Small Office Edition No Dual PRI except B IP412 Maximum channels IP403 20 IP406 V1 20 IP406 V2 30 IP412 60 Modem O Modem 2 Card O Internal Modem Card card F Expansion Modules Not Small Office Edition IP406 V1 IP406 V2 and IP412 only Installation Manual Page 63 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation G Power Cords Control Unit L IEC60320 C7 x 1 IP403 and IP406 V1 LI IEC60320 C13 x 1 IP406 V2 IP412 and Small Office Edition Expansion Units O IEC60320 C7 x ___ Analog Digital Station V1 Phone V1 O IEC60320 C13 x ____ Digital Station V2 Phone V2 S08
203. fering numbers of voice compression channels are available E Objective To fit the card and confirm its presence after restarting the IP Office Bh Warnings 1 Correct anti static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards 2 During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be switched off and disconnected pet ie O Parts and Equipment Required 1 O VCM Card Check that the correct card has been supplied The number and maximum capacity supported varies between different IP Office control units All cards are supplied with 2 plastic snap in spacer pegs SAP Code SOE IP403 IP406 V1 IP406 V2 IP412 ee ae v xv v 25ms echo cancellation vemj ror x v v v F vom2o 700185135 x v s vo fy Vi id LEA Voice Compression Modules VCM4 700359854 x v 64ms echo cancellation vema 700359862 FI ATE TTY Fa e 1 4 4 ee i ee ee VCM24 700359888 x Number of VCM cards 0 Maximum number of channels 3 16 gs Tools Required 1 O Cross head screwdriver 1 20 EES Ears Emirs ELI wks 2 O Anti static wrist strap and ground point 3 LJ IP Office Monitor application Installation Manual Page 88 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 1 Gi 2 2 0 Procedure Installing VCM Cards IP403 IP406 VINI IP412 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 A Basic Installation Check that correct card has been supplied Ensure that you
204. ffice system Click OK Page 73 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Importing Settings Importing settings will overwrite any existing entries that match an entry being imported 1 Select File Import Export from the menu bar 2 Select Import Import lkems Humber of tems Available Licence de Unavailable Configuration File not found C AFrogram Filest amp wayaWPF Office Manager Configuration csv _ Directory File not found C Program Files 4vayaXlP Offices M anager Director csv HuntGroup File not found C Program FilesAvayaslP Office ManagersHuntGroup csv _ ShortCode File not found C AFrogram Files AvayaslP Office Manager sS hortCode csv _ User File not found C Program Files W4avayailP Office M anagersUsercey Look In File Type 3 Select the type of file The list of items will change to match the type of file selected and whether a matching file or files is found in the current file path 4 Use Look In to adjust the file path The default location used is sub directory of the Manager application directory based on system name of the currently loaded IP Office system Select the types of items that should be imported Click OK Installation Manual Page 74 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Pre Configuration CSV File Formats The format is CSV using commas as field separator no text delimiters and no header row The simplest way to ch
205. ffserv mib hpov mib snmp_mibs Standard folder on IP Office Admin CD i ipo phones mib mib snmp_mibs lPOffice folder on IP Office Admin CD Start the OpenView Network Node Manager console Select Options and then Load Unload MIBs SNMP Select Load and select all the MIB files listed above a Pr N Select Compile Installation Manual Page 161 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation CastleRock SNMPc 5 1 6c and earlier 1 Copythe following MIB files to the applications MIBs folder normally C Program Files SNMPc Network Manager mibfiles ENTITY MIB snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin CD b AVAYAGEN MIB mib snmp_mibs lPOffice on IP Office Admin CD c IPO PROD MIB mib snmp_mibs lPOffice on IP Office Admin CD d IPO MIB mib snmp_mibs lPOffice on IP Office Admin CD e INET ADDRESS MIB mib snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin CD f INTEGRATED SERVICES MIB snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin CD g DIFFSERV DSCP TC mib snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin CD h DIFFSERV MIB mib snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin CD i IPO PHONES MIB mib snmp_mibs lPOffice on IP Office Admin CD 2 In SMNPc select Config MIB Database 3 Select Add and select the MIB files listed above in the order listed CastleRock SNMPc V5 0 1 The MIB installation instructions provided above are correct for CastleRock SNMPc V5 0 8 and later For V5 0 1 of CastleRock SNMPc the following must be carried out
206. fice Installation Analog Trunk Module Connections Ti AMAMA 1P400 Analog Trunk PFI FFS EXPANSION Ports Description ANALOG RJ45 socket Used for connection to analog trunks Ports can be configured as either loop start or ground start trunks through the IP Office configuration In the event of power failure Analog ports 1 and 2 are directly connected to analog extension ports PF1 and PF2 respectively If used the connected phones must be clearly labeled as power failure devices This is only supported for loop start analog trunks DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module DTE EXPANSION RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control Ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional ground if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead IMPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment an Avaya 146G Surge Pro
207. fice control unit supports up to 180 extensions by using up to 6 Expansion modules It includes an eight port 10 100Mbps Ethernet LAN hub The IP406 V1 has been superseded by the IP406 V2 control unit but is still supported on IP Office 3 2 Feature Capacity Maximum 180 of various types in combination Analog only 180 DS only 180 IP Extensions only 180 Conference Parties Trunks Cards 2 Trunk card slots All types supported except Dual PRI trunk cards 1 VCM Card Slots Data Channels 24 of which 20 usable for Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV connection sessions subject to available Voicemail Pro Port and TAPI WAV licenses Locales Software Level IP Office core software level 2 1 27 minimum Bin file ip406 bin Power Supply The unit is supplied with a 2 Pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the unit s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit The unit is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The unit can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Unboxed 3 0Kg 6 6lbs Boxed 4 3Kg 9 6lbs Maximum 192KB Configuration Size O F 3 D N Ql 3 3 a N Ol Installation Manual Page 181 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Ins
208. for anti static grounding or similar L PC running Windows 2000 XP 2003 During the Staging Installation later in this manual we recommend that you use a customer PC that will eventually remain on site Ideally this will be the same PC that will be used as the customers Feature Key server and or voicemail server L Indelible marker for cable labelling I Parts Required 1 2 3 L Cable ties O Cabling labels O IP Office CD Pack Contains IP Office Administration Applications CD IP Office User Applications CD and IP Office Engineers Toolkit CD O Technical Bulletins Each IP Office software release is normally accompanied by a Technical Bulletin detailing special installation requirements known issues etc Various software releases and their associated Technical Bulletins can also be obtained from http support avaya com Installation Manual Page 61 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation System Details Completing the details within these forms will help ensure a successful installation and implementation It may be necessary for both the customer and the installer to go through the forms several times to complete the details A Customer Principal Contact This should be a person nominated by the customer able to approve installation decisions and choices 2 Telephone 3 Fax GS I B Customer Technical Contact This should be a person nominated by the customer
209. ged into a PC networked to the IP Office system and running IP Office Feature Key server software Application CD s DVD s The IP Office applications can be ordered on a number of CD s In addition they can be downloaded from the IP Office section of the Avaya support web site http support avaya com Page 11 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Control Units The base of any IP Office system is the control unit It stores the system configuration and controls the system operation Each control unit can be customized by adding various internal cards such as trunk cards modem cards and voice compression modules External expansion modules can be also be connected to add additional extension and trunk ports IP Office 3 2 supports the following IP Office control units IP412 Control Unit This unit supports 2 trunk cards of any type Up to 12 external expansion modules can be added plus 2 WAN3 modules It includes a 2 port ethernet LAN switch layer 3 managed IP406 V2 Control Unit This unit supports up to 6 external expansion modules plus 2 WANS modules It supports 2 trunk cards of all types though only one may be a dual PRI trunk card The unit has 8 Avaya digital DS phone ports and 2 analog phone ports plus an 8 port ethernet LAN switch layer 2 unmanaged IP406 V1 Control Unit This unit supports up to 6 external expansion modules plus 2 WANS modules It supports 2 trunk cards of any type e
210. ger license keys available and the number unused can be checked Run Phone Manager and select Help About Holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys click on the software version number Installation Manual Page 273 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation License Keys Voicemail License shows the name as it appears in the IP Office configuration RFA Name is the name used for the orderable item License Description RFA Name SAP AUDIX Voicemail Enables IP Office to use a remote Intuity Audix or 1P400 AUDIX 177467 Modular Messaging for voicemail Does not require a local Voice Mail Pro server Voicemail Pro 4 Enables Voicemail Pro plus 4 ports IP400 Voicemail 1 71991 ports Pro Additional Adds additional ports 2 4 8 or 16 to an existing IP400 Voicemail Pro Voicemail Pro up to the maximum number of ports Voicemail ports supported by the IP Office control unit type IP403 and Pro Small Office Edition 10 IP406 V1 V2 20 IP412 8 1174461 Networked Enables VPNM Voicemail Pro Networked Messaging 1P400 Networked 182297 Messaging functionality within Voicemail Pro This allows Messaging message exchange with remote Voicemail Pro systems and Avaya Interchange systems Integrated Enables IMS Pro operation with Voicemail Pro IP400 Integrated 171990 Messaging Enables synchronization to MS Exchange email Messaging Pro systems with a form within Outlook to control voicemail playba
211. gnal V 24 WAN Service Po 6 eGround 7 O 8 gt DTR Data Terminal Ready 20 O o fera Receive Daa O 3 tt epcD Data Carrier Detect 8 a ecis ciearto send 5 26 Jef enemies 2 ar Torts Request send Rx Clk Receive Clock 5 RR O 2 30 fepsRiDataSetReady 6 e Atthe IP Office end pin 25 is connected to pin 6 e Atthe IP Office end pin 19 is connected to the Screened Cable Drain Wire e Supply This cable is not supplied with the control unit or WAN3 module It must be ordered separately e SAP Code 700213416 e Cable 12 core screened cable Each core is 7 0 203mm 24 AWG tinned copper stranded wire nominal capacitance of 95pF m resistance of 92 ohms km screened with tinned copper braid maximum working voltage of 440V rms and a maximum current per core of 1A rms The maximum core to core capacitance must not exceed 800pF e Maximum Length 5m 16 5 This is the maximum length that should be used if the above cable is replaced with an alternate cable Installation Manual Page 294 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components V 35 WAN Cable This cable is used for connection from an IP Office control unit or WAN3 module WAN port to the V 35 WAN service providers equipment IP Office WAN Port Signal Wire V 35 WAN Service e Supply This cable is not supplied with the control unit or WAN3 module It must be ordered separately D Type Plug MRAC Plug 3 Meters 9 04 Fee
212. gned for use in call centers It provides a range of both real time and historical reporting options CCC consists of CCC Server applications that receive call information from the IP Office Delta Server and a number of client applications for the display of that information CCC and its clients are controlled by a range of licenses entered into the IP Office configuration The CCC server applications are listed below Typically they are installed onto the same PC e CCC Archiver The Archiver manages the collection and storage of call activity information e Wallboard Server Wallboards provide current information on the number of calls waiting response times and service levels Wallboard Manager provides the ability to control both physical wallboards and PC wallboards The Wallboard server must be installed on the same PC as the Delta Server The CCC clients are e Call Center View CCV Provides a realtime information about call center activity e Alarm Reporter Provides real time and past 7 days information on alarms that have occurred within the call center e PC Wallboard The PC Wallboard allows call center agents and supervisors to display real time call center performance information on their Windows PC screen e Report Manager Provides in depth historical reporting on calls agents and groups e Workforce Management This application allows CCC to share information with a third party agent scheduling application Blue P
213. ground start trunks an Analog Trunk expansion module should be used The card is available in a number of locale specific variants as detailed below e Power Failure Operation There are no power failure extension connections provided for the analog trunk card If this is a requirement the ATM16 expansion module should be used e WARNING In all IP Office installations any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth e amp WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment an Avaya 146G Surge Protector ATM4 Trunk Cards Country Control Unit SAP Code IP400 Analog 4 North and South Supported on all control units 700185192 Loop Start America except the Small Office Edition IP400 Analog 4 Europe 700241672 EU Loop Start IP400 Analog 4 New Zealand 700241706 NZ Loop Start e These cards include two plastic spacer pegs for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of the control unit The blanking plate is not required with the Small Office Edition which has removable sections in the rear panel Installation Manual Page 193 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation BRI Trunk Cards Quad BRI The BRI trunk card is also referred to as the Quad BRI It provides
214. guage The voicemail prompt language used for that locale e Manager Indicates that the IP Office Manager application can run in the specific locale language Manager uses the regional settings setting of the PC on which it is running to determine the required language e Telephony The IP Office provides default telephony settings matching the normal expected defaults for the locale e Phone Display Indicates that display messages from the IP Office to Avaya DS and IP phones can be sent using the appropriate language for that locale Note that the user locale can be used to override the system locale for these messages Note also that some phones support their own language selection options for menus displayed by the phone s software e T3 Phones Menus for T3 Series phones available in the specific language e Voicemail These columns indicate for which locales the different Avaya IP Office voicemail servers can provide the appropriate language prompts In all cases the system locale can be overridden by setting a different user locale e EVM Indicates that the locale is recognized by Embedded Voicemail and appropriate language prompts are then used If an unsupported locale is used Embedded Voicemail will attempt the best match using the first two characters of the locale e VM Lite Indicates that the locale is recognized by Voicemail Lite and appropriate language prompts are then used For an unsupported locale is used or one
215. hat appears will indicate whether a reboot is required Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the license It should now be Valid Installation Manual Page 156 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes So8 BRI Module So8 Example 1 In this example calls on DID 123456 are routed to the first port of the SO8 expansion module That port has been configured as Line Group ID 701 1 Configure an Incoming Call Routing The destination is a short code that directs the call to the correct line group ID that contains the S0 lines The Bearer Capability has been set to Any to allow data and voice via this route e Line Group ID 0 e Incoming Number 123456 e Destination 123456 e Bearer Capability Any 2 Create a System Short Code This matches the destination in the Incoming Call Route e Short Code 123456 e Telephone Number 123456 e Line Group ID 701 e Feature Dial 3 Send the configuration to the Control Unit Any call coming into the main system on DID 123456 will now be passed directly to the first port If you wish to assign DID s from your main pool to individual ports and avoid network charges when dialing between them try variations on the following 1 You have DID ranges for example 7325551000 to 7325551099 You wish to assign 7325551000 19 to port 1 and 7325551020 20 to port 2 etc 2 Configure Incoming Call Route The is used here
216. he phone should display Upgrading firmware please wait and then FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS Once this has completed the should briefly display New Calls 0 and then the current users name and extension number 11 For XX10 and XX20 models assemble the adjustable desk stand Attach the stand to the base of the phone Installation Manual Page 121 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation La o Pr 1 ocedure Wall Mounting If a standard US telephone jack wall plate is not being used prepare the wall fixings for the M3 pan head screws being used to mount the phone At the IP Office end check that each DS port is connected to the appropriate port in the structured cabling system patch panel 3 Start Manager During installation each 2400 5400 series phone requests software from Manager and then loads that software before becoming operational Unpack the phone The phones are supplied with the plastic mounting wedge in the wall mounting position as this allows a smaller box size Slide off the plastic wedge and remove the self taping screw that is taped inside the wedge Reattach the plastic wedge in its original position The self taping screw can be used to lock the plastic wedge in position 8 Just below the phones hook switch is a small plastic square Remove this and then reinsert it so that a plastic lug projects out towards the hook switch This helps ensure that the handset stays in
217. he real time clock on IP Office control unit mother boards WARNING The Lithium battery must only be replaced by Avaya personnel or authorized representatives There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Installation Manual Page 317 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Lightning Protection Hazard Symbols Lightning protectors The buildings lightning protectors must be verified as follow 1 Checkthe lightning protectors at the trunk cable entry point to the building housing the Avaya IP Office paying special attention to the lightning protection grounding Report any problems in writing to the telephone company 2 Equipment that is designed to be connected using internal wiring is typically not lightning protected Hence Avaya IP Office extension cabling must not leave the building For installations where telephones and or other standard tip ring devices are installed in another building then lightning protection is required see Out of Building Telephone Installations Hazard Symbol TAN shock hazard symbol is intended to alert personnel to electrical hazard or equipment damage The following precautions must also be observed when installing telephone equipment Never install telephone wiring during a light
218. his will cause problems with outgoing calls For example on a system with an ATM4 trunk card fitted but only two analog trunks actually connected failure to disable the other two trunks within the IP Office configuration will cause 50 of outgoing call attempts to fail E Objective Remove unused trunks and channels from the IP Office configuration 1 Gi 2 2 0 Procedure 1 Within the IP Office configuration select TA Line 2 For each line set those lines or channels that are not connected or being used as out of service The location of the relevant setting varies for each trunk type e Analog Trunks Set the Trunk Type to Out of Service Line Settings Analogue Options Channel Ring Persistency Disconnect Clear Units 400 Units ms 500 me Signalling Type DTMF Dialing Fe pia Off Maximum Pulse Width nits A 5000 Direction Bothway Wt ms Un Units ms Bearer Any a Flash Pulse Width OF Units mg Units 500 ms x a e BRI E1 PRI SO and QSIG Trunks Set the channels quantities to match the actual subscribed channels PRI Line Short Codes Channels Line Number Line SubType ETSI IL al Telephone Number TEI Prefix Humber of Channels National Prefix lo Outgoing Channels 20 International Prefix oOo Voice Channels 2 Data Channels CRC Checking Clock Quality ine anale CPE a Installation Manual Page 135 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installa
219. hone 4 For the required button either select the button and then click Edit or double click the button 5 Edit the settings as required Use the button to display the menu for selecting the required button action Select the action and set the action data then click OK Button Programming Please select the required action Emulation Advanced gt Appearance gt Acton Action Data Bridged Appearance Appearance Coverage Appearance Line Appearance Bridged Appearance 6 Click OK Repeat for any other buttons 7 Click OK An alternate method for the above programming is to right click on the various fields To do this start with the Action field then Action Data and then Label if required Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Page 128 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 B Phone Installation Changing Extension Numbers A new or defaulted IP Office system numbers each extension in sequence going by module and port order starting from 201 An extension entry is created in the configuration and also an associated user entry A similar process occurs when a new extension expansion module is detected e Extension versus User It is important with IP Office to understand that extension number is a user property that belongs to and moves with the user For example users can use hot desking to login on another phone and calls to that user s extension number will then go to that phone the phone te
220. hone Typical Off Hook Power Consumption x 2 lines Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with f x Voice Priority Voice priority is supported if the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base is fitted Standard DCP Phone Keys SPEAKER x 4 HEADSET MUTE a VOLUME UP x Ea MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER v w VOLUME DOWN x tt DROP z 4 REDIAL KW CONFERENCE Variant SAP Code 4612 GEN1 US International GEN2 US International 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 30A Switch Upgrade Base US variants use just text labels on the phone keys International variants use both text labels and function icons on the keys GEN1 models do not support Power over Ethernet PoE unless fitted with the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base 700207376 Installation Manual Page 228 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 46201IP 4620SW These phones are similar in physical appearance and functions However the 4620SW s PC data pass through port gives priority to phone traffic This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source Feature 46201P 4620SW IP network IP Office Release 2 0 Programmable Buttons 24 12 buttons x 2 pages Headset Socket Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp Me Typical Off Hook Power 4 N 5 9W Consumption C
221. ically for the signalling voltages used by the IP Office system e Only the IP Office Phone Barrier Box should be used with Phone V1 modules e Only the IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 should be used with Phone V2 modules e No other type of analog phone barrier box should be used e Where more than 3 barrier boxes are required in a building they must be rack mounted using a Barrier Box rack mounting kit are external to the main building Main Building E f J rere Control Unit a a Phone Module Approved Ground Points Main Building RJ11 Connect to PHONE POT port on the Phone module using cable supplied with the barrier box RJ45 Connect to the secondary building barrier box via primary protection in both buildings Center Screw Connect to main building protective ground or ground terminal of Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit Use 18AWG minimum wire with a green and yellow sleeve Right Hand Screw Connect to ground point on Phone module using ground cable supplied with barrier Dox A maximum of 16 barrier boxes can be used with any Phone module CAUTION PHONE POT ports on the front of control units must not be used for extensions that The Phone Barrier Box does not connect the ringing capacitor in Phone V1 modules Secondary Building Approved Ground Point Secondary Building RJ11 Connect to analog phone Cable not supplied RJ45
222. ice 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Installing the IP Office MIB Files To allow full communication between an SNMP agent and an SNMP manager the SNMP manager must load MIB files Management Information Base specific to the SNMP agent device and the features it supports These MIB files contain details of the information the agent can provide and the traps that it can send Full details of the structure of the IP Office MIB files MIB groups within those files and event traps can be found in the IP Office Installation Manual The MIB files for IP Office operation are included on the IP Office Admin CD in the folder C smnp_mibs The actual files required and the method of loading depend on the SNMP manager application being used The details below cover the two SNMP manager applications tested HP Open View Network Node Manager 1 Copy the following MIB files to the applications MIBs folder rfc273 entity mib mib snmp_mibs standard folder on OpenView Install CD b avayagen mib mib snmp_mibs lPOffice folder on IP Office Admin CD c ipo prod mib mib snmp_mibs lPOffice folder on IP Office Admin CD d ipo mib mib snmp_mibs lPOffice folder on IP Office Admin CD e inet address mib mib snmp_mibs Standard folder on IP Office Admin CD f rfc2213 integrated services mib mib snmp_mibs standard folder on OpenView Install CD g diffserv dscp tc mib snmp_mibs Standard folder on IP Office Admin CD h di
223. ice configuration select 1 1 Line 2 For each digital line select the line and on the Line tab select whether that trunk should provide the clock source for the network or whether the trunk is unsuitable For E1R2 trunks the Clock Quality setting is on the Advanced tab PRI 24 Line Channels Line Number jor Line SubType T Channel Allocation Pretix Network Fallback Unsuitable CSU Operation F Haul Length 0 115 ft w Incoming Routing Digits 3 Ensure that only one trunk is set to Network This should preferably be a direct digital trunk to the central office exchange Clock Quality Framing ESF CRC Checking ero Suppression BOS Line Signalling CPE We i 4 One other trunk can be set a Fallback should the selected Network trunk connection be lost If possible this should be a trunk from a different provider since that reduces the chances of both sources failing at the same time 5 Ensure that all other digital trunks are set as Unsuitable Installation Manual Page 134 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 C External Trunk Configuration Unused Trunks Summary Each IP Office trunk card provides a fixed number of trunk ports For digital trunks each trunk provides a set number of digital channels In cases where the number of trunks connected to the IP Office is lower or the number of channels provided is lower those unused trunks and channel must be disabled l Failure to do t
224. installed the software the system will reboot e The Feature Key Server installs itself as a service It appears as Key Server in the Services Panel e Inthe Add Remove Programs panel an entry Sentinel System Driver appears This is part of the Feature Key Server Following installation and reboot the Feature Key Server appears as an icon B in the Windows System Tray e Right click on the icon and select About to display the server software version and the Feature Key device number e lf the icon appears as a white block with a red cross through it then there is some error The most likely error is that the Feature Key is missing from the parallel or USB port Start Manager receive the IP Office system s configuration Select System On the System tab the License Server IP Address field is used to set the location of the feature key The default is a 255 255 255 255 broadcast address This is okay for many sites but 10 11 12 13 14 15 it is recommend that the IP address of the PC running the Feature Key Server is entered Click OK Select License To add a license click amp and select License Enter the new license click OK The Status of the new license should show Unknown and name the license as expected If its Status is Unknown and name Invalid the most likely cause is incorrect entry of the license key characters Click on lal to send the configuration back to the IP Office The menu t
225. intenance ADDIIGALONS ariani 42 User Applications 43 Voicemail Applications 44 Call Logging Applications 45 Call Center Applications 46 GIFAPPICAIONS lait 47 IP Office Application CD DVD S 48 Specification for IP Office Application PC s 49 Server Applications Dependencies 50 Client Applications Dependencies 51 Operating Systems for IP Office 3 2 52 Windows Operating System Service Pack DUD Ol read 52 VoIP and Network Assessments 53 ITalNINQ ror eee iaia 54 WebSite 55 Planning isata 57 Space Requirements ics fessiadusncivdovuwinndsvunbaancvens 58 Environmental requirements 60 Tools and Parts Required 61 System DETAI aen aa E OA 62 IP403 IP406 V2 Control Unit Ports 68 Small Office Edition Control Unit 69 Expansion Module __ 70 Pre Configuration 71 Off Line Configuration 71 Creating a New Configuration 72 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Importing and Exporting Settings 73 A Basic Installation 77 01 Unpacking Equipment
226. intenance and connection of serial terminal adaptors In the case of 9 pin DTE ports IP406 V2 and IP412 the port can also be used for connection of the IP Office serial port licence key dongle An asynchronous terminal program such as HyperTerminal is also required Configure this for operation via a PC serial port as follows Bits per second 33 400 Stop Bits Data bits Flow Control The DTE ports on external expansion modules are not used DTE Cables These cables are used for system maintenance and diagnostics under Avaya guidance They can also be used for connection of RS 232 serial terminal adaptor equipment to the IP Office control unit The cable required depends on the IP Office control unit IF Office DTE Port 25 ay g ii 25 Way day o D Type Flug D Type Socket 2 Meter i6 57 Feet IP Office DTE Port Signal PC Terminal 25 Way 9 Way Adaptor 5 8 wCTS ClearToSend 8 6 6 DSR DataSetReady 6 8 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 1 22 9 Ri Ring Indicato 9 e SAP Code e 25 Way DTE Port 700213432 e Cable 2 core screened cable each core is 7 0 203mm 24 AWG tinned copper stranded wire nominal capacitance of 95pF m resistance of 92 km screened with tinned copper braid maximum working voltage of 440V rms and a Maximum current per core of 1A rms Installation Manual Page 286 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components EXPANSION Ports This typ
227. into the IP Office configuration the following information is shown Status The status which is Unknown until the configuration file is sent back to the IP Office system License The name of the licensed feature This may differ from the ordered RFA name Instances Depending on the license this may be the number of ports enabled or number of simultaneous users of the licensed feature Expires Most purchased licenses have no expiry setting For some features trial licenses may be available which will have an expiry date Installation Manual Page 35 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP Office Phones IP Office 3 2 supports the following phones and phone add ons Availability may be subject to local restrictions Digital Stations These phones connect to IP Office DS ports Series IP Office Supported Phones Region 240000 2402 2410 2420 Global 4400 4406D 4412D 4424D North America 5400 5402 9410 5420 Global ea 6408D 6416D M 6424D M T3 ii T3 Compact T3 Classic T3 Comfort Note On systems using T3 Series phones the only other phones supported are 4600 Series 5600 Series DECT and analog phones 9040 Wireless phone North America 3810 Wireless phone H 323 IP Phones These phones connect to the IP Office via the LAN Refer to the separate installation manuals for full details VCM channels are required and may limit the number of simultaneous cal
228. ion Manual Page 325 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation FCC Notification This equipment is registered with the ACTA Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments in accordance with FCC Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack Connection to 1 544 MBps digital facilities must be through a USOC RJ48C Connection to the Analog Trunk facilities must be through a USOC RJ45S Notification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the telephone number or numbers you will be using with this equipment The facility interface codes FIC for 1 544 MBps digital connection i e IP400 Office PRI T1 are 04DU9 BN 04DU9 DN 04DU9 IKN 04DU9 ISN The facility interface code FIC for analog trunk connection i e IP400 Office Quad Analog Trunk LS are OL13A OL13B OL13C 02AC2 02LA2 02LB2 02LC2 02LR2 02LS2 The facility interface code FIC for analog trunk connection i e IP400 Office ATM16 LS GS are OL13A OL13B OL13C 02AC2 02GS2 02LA2 02LB2 02LC2 02LR2 02LF2 The Service Order Code SOC for 1 544 MBps digital connection i e IP400 Office PRI T1 is 6 0Y The Service Order Code SOC for analog trunk connec
229. ipoffice it e IP Office UK http www ipoffficeforum co uk Installation Manual Page 55 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Planning Installation Manual Page 57 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Space Requirements The Small Office Edition is designed to be free standing or wall mounted The base includes integral screw head slots for wall mounting and an additional bracket is supplied with the module for a locking screw All the other IP Office control units and modules are designed to be installed either in a free standing stack or into a 19 rack system Rack installation requires a rack mounting kit for each control unit and expansion module Dimension Small Office Edition All Other Units and Modules Height 76mm 3 inches 71mm 2 8 inches 1 6U Width 255mm 10 inches 445mm 17 5 inches Depth 241mm 9 5 inches 245mm 9 7 inches e Cable Clearance Allow a minimum clearance of 75mm 3 inches at the front and rear of all modules for cable access and feature key dongle connection e Additional Clearance Care should be taken to ensure that the positioning of the modules does not interrupt air flow and other factors that may affect environmental requirements Installation Manual Page 58 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Planning Small Office Edition Control Unit Femm 3 255mm 10 Unit 241mm9 6 with clearance
230. it s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit e Older units were supplied with a 2 Pin 40W external power supply unit which used a locale specific locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord not supplied with the unit The unit is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The unit can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions _ Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Weight Unboxed 3 0Kg 6 7lbs Boxed 4 3Kg 9 6lbs Maximum 1024KB Configuration Size Installation Manual Page 177 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP412 Connections EnFAHSIOH PORTS 1 3d 5 amp T 9 Wi tz Sea Be oc ne ea DG NF 3 B ExT lt amp poe WAM u A S 247 DC ar SLOT A SLOT E Ports Description AUDIO 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input DC I P DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya un earthed 45W external power supply unit supplied with the control unit DTE 9 Way D Type socket Used for system maintenance Suitable for direct connection of IP Office Serial Port Feature Key dongle EXPANSION RJ45 socket Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect cable supp
231. itched off or on 16ms The card provides 4 RJ45 sockets for analog trunk connections The card only supports loop start trunks For ground start trunks an Analog Trunk expansion module should be used e Power Failure Operation There are no power failure extension connections provided for the analog trunk card If this is a requirement the ATM16 expansion module should be used e WARNING In all IP Office installations any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth e amp WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment an Avaya 146G Surge Protector ATM4U Trunk Card Country Control Unit SAP Code ATM4 Uni Loop All Supported on all control units except the 700359938 Small Office Edition e The card include two plastic spacer pegs for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of the control unit The blanking plate is not required with the Small Office Edition which has removable sections in the rear panel Installation Manual Page 192 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Analog Trunk Card ATM4 The Analog Trunk card is also referred to as the ATM4 It provides 4 RJ45 sockets for analog trunk connections The card only supports loop start trunks For
232. ither a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or an 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source For RoHS compliance the 4601 has been replaced by the 4601 however the two phones are functionally the same Feature Detail Headset Socket x Typical Off Hook Power Consumption 2 Display PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys x A SPEAKER x HEADSET MUTE zm VOLUME UP EA MESSAGES amp HOLD lt C TRANSFER w VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CW CONFERENCE _____ _ Variant SAP Code 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 700203797 700229735 Noisy Location Handset 700229743 700229727 Installation Manual Page 224 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 4602IP 4602SW These phones are similar in physical appearance and functions However the 4602SW includes a PC data pass through port which gives priority to phone traffic The 4602IP is no longer available from Avaya The 4602SW is the RoHS compliant replacement for the 4602SW which is no longer available This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source Feature 4602IP 4602SW Headset Socket Display 24 characters x 2 lines PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys EA
233. its however it does not support any expansion modules Small Office Edition control units include various numbers of integral DS PHONE POT and Analog ports Small Office Edition Analog Analog Digital Voice Compression Model Trunks Extensions Stations Channels 2T 4A 3 VoiP 2 4 TABA G Voy a 8 _ These models are still supported but are no longer available from Avaya Previous models that included integral DT ports are not supported on IP Office 3 0 or higher Feature Capacity Maximum 28 of various types in combination Analog only 4 DS only 8 IP only Extensions 16 Conference Parties 21 with a maximum of 8 parties in any particular conference Trunks Cards 1 Trunk card slot for ATM4 Quad BRI Single T1 PRI or single WAN port trunk cards Sections of the rear panel are removable to provide cable connection to the installed trunk card For the WAN port card a complete replacement back panel is provided VCM Card Slots None Either 3 or 16 voice compression channels are pre built into the module Data Channels 18 of which 10 usable for Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV connection sessions subject to available Voicemail Pro Port and TAPI WAV licenses Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 2 0 minimum Bin file ip401ng bin Power Supply The unit is supplied with a 3 Pin 45W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P
234. its default associated user The phone can be physically exchanged Alternatively the extensions can be disconnected and then as each is reattached reset using HOLD RESET Refer to the 4600 5600 IP Phone Installation manual te Do ia Procedure 3 Swapping Users Using Configuration Change This method can be used when physical access to the system is not practical for example for remote maintenance 1 This process requires an IP Office system reboot as it changes extension port settings Select Extension Change the Base Extension number to match the user extension who should now be associated with that physical port by default Extn Base Extension 203 Caller Display Type Reset Volume After Calls all Device type SS Avaya 5410 Module BD Port I 4 Click OK Manager will probably give a validation error message due to a user being associated with two extensions This can be ignored until all the user moves have been completed If swapping or moving several users repeat the process for another extension Click to revalidate the configuration and check that no conflicts between users and associated extensions remain 7 Ifthe configuration changes are complete send the configuration back to the IP Office and select appropriate settings for the reboot Installation Manual Page 131 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 C External Trunk Configuration Trunk Configurati
235. lass 3 Class 3 168 x 132 pixels PC Pass Through Port with Voice X af df Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys SI SPEAKER v HEADSET v MUTE zm VOLUME UP x E MESSAGES HOLD 4 l TRANSFER x VOLUME DOWN DROP 4 REDIAL v KE CONFERENCE VEET SAP Code 700259674 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381817 700381544 700356447 700356454 Europe 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 Installation Manual Page 229 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 4621SW The 4621 is similar in physical appearance and function to the 4620SW However the 4621SW includes a backlight function for the screen This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source 4621SW IP network 12 buttons x 2 pages ARTS 4 Typical Off Hook Power 5 5W Class 2 Consumption Display 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels Supported Add Ons EU24 EU24BL Upgradeable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with Voice wy Priority af t cal a at a ape i ar Dees D J SL a naar es a a Standard DCP Phone Keys SI SPEAKER d HEADSET v 4 MUTE zm VOLUME UP x E MESSAGES HOLD v 0 TRANSFER w w VOLUME DOWN DROP 4 REDIAL v CI CONFERENCE VEET SAP Code 1151C2 P
236. lbox IMS interoperates with the customer s Exchange server and the user s Outlook e Database Integration With an additional license the Voicemail Pro can be integrated with customer database through Windows ODBC When combined with TTS operation this allows the construction of interactive voice response IVR applications on Voicemail Pro ContactStore for IP Office The Voicemail Pro can be used for manual and automatic call recording Those recording are placed into the mailbox specified for the user or hunt group whose call is being recorded and are then treated as normal messages Contact Store allows those recordings to be redirected into a database on the ContactStore PC This allows recordings to be archived and searched separately from user messages This application requires entry of a license into the IP Office configuration Installation Manual Page 44 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Call Logging Applications A wide range of 3rd party applications exist to provide call logging and accounting for telephone systems The IP Office has a number of options for providing call details to those applications e Call Detail Records CDR IP Office 3 1 and higher supports the sending of CDR records via TCP or UDP to an IP address A range of common CDR record formats are supported This option is configured within the IP Office itself e Delta Server SMDR Output This application receives call info
237. le specific power cord is required for the power supply unit Variant SAP Code 1151C1 Power Supply With CATS cable 700356447 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup With CATS cable 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 405362641 Page 299 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation The following items are associated with providing IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE to devices including Avaya IP phones For full details refer to the IP Office IP Phone Installation Manual PoE is useable with all Avaya IP phones except GEN1 4606 4612 and 4624 phones see below Note also that PoE should not be used for IP phones with EU24 or EU24BL add ons SAP Code Note 1U Mid Span Power Distribution Unit 700409675 6 Ports SNMP 700409691 o 12 Ports 700250525 No longer available 12 Ports SNMP 700253107 No longer available 24 Ports 700180433 No longer available 24 Ports SNMP 700409717 Cisco Catalyst Power Adapter 700259369 No longer This item is no longer available from Avaya available Avaya 30A Switch Upgrade Base 700207376 Allows GENT 4606 4612 and 4624 phones to use PoE Also provides those phones with voice priority over the PC pass through port Installation Manual Page 300 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Power Cords IP Office control unit and expansion module power supply units
238. lf test mode a zo Procedure Checking the Firmware on a 2420 or 5420 Phone 1 Select OPTION 2 Select Self Test The display should now show details of the phone s currently installed firmware 24200 REL 4 00 10 07 04 HWT 51H HwW 1 F 3 The firmware loaded into the phones has a major and minor version The Major version in the example above is shown as FWV 4 and the minor version is shown as REL 4 00 4 Press El Exit to exit self test mode Installation Manual Page 123 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation a a Ot ii pad So oe eS ST N 11 n Procedure Forcing a Software Upgrade A The following procedure should only be used if it has been determined that the 2400 5400 Series phones need to be manually forced to change their firmware During this process the phone cannot be used Locate the Manager program directory and within it the files turn_on bat and turn_off bat Right click on turn_on bat and select Edit Locate the entry lt IP Address gt and replace this with the IP address of the IP Office system Close the file and save the changes Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the file turn_off bat Ensure that Manager is running Manager acts as the TFTP server from which the phones will request firmware files Double click on the file turn_on bat A prompt window should appear asking you to wait and eventually if successful Press any key to continue Within
239. lied with the expansion module EXT O P 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls The port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office LAN RJ45 socket These ports form a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch The ports are half duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing MDI crossover ports Used for trunk cards of all types except WAN port trunk card Normally Slot B should be used first Trunks cards are supplied with replacement external blanking plates suitable for the trunk card port connections 37 Way D Type socket Used for the connection of V 24 V 35 or X 21 WAN service Used for connection of a function or protective ground Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement On older modules where this screw is not present the left hand fixing screw of Slot B can be used All control units are available in either North America or Rest of World variants The choice controls various default settings of the unit For E911 support a North American variant control unit must be used The companding can be changed once a unit is installed Control units are supplied with an external power supply unit but not a locale specific power cord Item VEET Country SAP Code IP412 Office Pern ISS Neri een 700690608 China 700261977 Installation Manual Page 178 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System
240. low Select File and then Select Unit Enter the IP Address and Password see below of the IP Office control unit you want to monitor e Fora new or defaulted control unit the IP address is 192 168 42 1 and the password is password e Following installation the IP Office control unit can be configured with a specific Monitor Password for Monitor access to an IP Office system If the IP Office does not have a Monitor Password set Monitor uses the IP Office s System Password For an IP Office system ensure that IP Office is selected Click OK The first few lines give information about various aspects of the IP Office system For example CJ SysMonitor v5 2 8 STOPPED monitoring 192 168 42 1 IPOffice_1 File Edit View Filters Status Help FHHATENTET SysMonitor vo 2 8 rrrastaat SHASTA ES contact made with 192 168 42 1 at 08 55 49 375 2005 See esterase WHOA System 194 168 424 111 has been up and running for l6hrs 36mins and 43secs 59503996m5 Fee eeeeaae Eb Warning TEXT File Logging selected see ffta Warning TEXT Logging to File STOPPED on 3 5 2006 08 55 49 FAAARA Ons FRI Monitor Started IP 192 168 42 203 IF 406 DS 3 2 68 IFOffice_1 lmS FEN L W U PRI 0 BRI 0 ALOG 0 ADSL 0 YCOMP 16 MDM 0 WAaN 0 MODU 1 LANM 0 CESRC 0 VMAILS L V VER 2 TYP 1 CALLS 0 TOT 2 260m5 Interface Rx v LANl LAN Ethernet Header info dst 00e007020b83 srerc l00l13d3a77ad len 73 IF Header info Dst 192
241. ls Series IP Office Supported Phones 3600 3616 3620 3626 Connect via AVPP add on module Global 4601 4602 4602SW 4610 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4625 5600 5601 5602 5602SW 5610 5620 5621 Softphone Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone application requires Phone Manager Pro and Phone Manager IP Audio licenses T3 T3 P T3 IP Compact T3 IP Classic T3 IP Comfort EMEA kia A Lia IP softphones and hardphones require entry of an IP Endpoints license Functionality beyond making and answering calls is not guaranteed by Avaya Installation Manual Page 36 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Analog Phones These phones connect to IP Office PHONE Ports IP Office supports most analog phones However due to the variety of analog phones and device available globally no guarantee of operation is possible It is the responsibility of the IP Office installer and maintainer to test and verify the operation of proposed analog equipment Series IP Office Supported Phones Region 6200 Series 6211 6219 6221 North America Interquartz Gemini 9330 AV 9335 AV 9281 AV EMEA APAC DECT Wireless Phones IP Office Supported Phones Analog DECT 20 20DT Connection via Compact DECT add on EMEA APAC IP DECT 3700 3701 3711 Connection via IP DECT base stations Installation Manual Page 37 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP Offi
242. lta Server 4 0 49 Delta Server application 49 260 Delta Server SMDR Output 45 260 Denmark 40 Depth 13 176 Deselect Feature Key Server 78 Design 54 Desk Mounting 120 desking 127 129 login 129 Details 62 deu 40 189 Device Type 68 69 70 DevLink 48 DEVLink Pro 47 272 DHCP 53 82 100 154 209 DHCP Addresses 62 Number 62 DHCP IP Addresses 80 DHCP Mode 62 80 Dial Channels 158 Dial In 141 Dial In On 141 Dial Plan Base Numbering 62 DialEmergency 324 Dialln 80 Dialing 62 Short Code 62 DID 123456 157 DID s 157 diffserv dscp tc mib 161 DIFFSERV MIB 161 DIFFSERV MIB mib 161 diffserv mib hpov mib 161 Digital Extension Users Using Structured Cabling 131 Digital Leased Circuit 209 Digital Phones 38 Digital Station 13 20 28 36 98 104 165 176 179 183 185 199 201 279 285 298 Digital Station 16 Module 24 Digital Station 30 Module 24 Digital Station Expansion 30 144 Digital Station Expansion Module 38 Digital Station Module Connections 201 Digital Station V1 22 23 298 Digital Station V1 V2 285 Digital Station V2 20 22 23 28 62 98 104 298 Digital Station V2 Connections 199 Digital Station V2 Expansion Module 38 Digital Telephone Ports 322 Direct Connection 82 Defaulted IP Office Control Unit 82 Directory Name 62 Page 330 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Disabled 62 display 112 IP Office 112 Display All Buttons 127 selecting 127 distances 26 277 DS 26 27
243. m Phone Manager also allows the user to access and change many of the setting stored in the IP Office configuration that relate to their own phone operation for example their forwarding destination numbers Though installed as a single set of software that same software can operate in several modes e Phone Manager Lite The default mode of Phone Manager Requires no license this application can be installed for any IP Office user e Phone Manager Pro Users configured for Pro mode are able to access a range of additional features Phone manager Pro requires entry of licenses into the IP Office system The licenses also control the number of simultaneous Phone Manager Pro users The user s Phone Manager software then automatically changes from Lite mode to Pro mode e Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone formerly called Phone Manager iPro This is a PC softphone mode of Phone Manager operation The user acts as a VoIP extension making calls through the speaker and microphone of their PC This mode requires further licenses in addition to the Phone Manager Pro licenses Details IP Office 3 2 User and Admin CD Set x5 700407604 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 Languages Brazilian Chinese Simplified Danish Dutch English French Finnish German Italian Korean Latin Spanish Norwegian Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish License application See below Minimum PC Requirements XP 2000 2000 2003 Pro Pro Server Server
244. m the use of such copies Installation Manual Page 48 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Specification for IP Office Application PC s Ethernet attached PC running as a recommended minimum Microsoft Windows 2000 2003 XP Professional with the following minimum supported PC specification Product Key Notes VM Lite Voicemall Lite e IVR Third Party Database Access VM Pro Voicemail Pro e CS ContactStore IMS Integrated Messaging Pro e CBC Compact Business Center CM Campaign Manager e CCC Compact Contact Center TTS Text To Speech Windows ME Windows 95 and NT4 Operating Systems are no longer supported by Avaya CBC requires the associated Delta Server application to be installed on a Windows 2000 XP workstation or a 2000 2003 server Windows 2003 server requires Delta Server 4 0 33 or above IMS and Web Campaigns options within VoiceMail Pro are only supported on Windows Servers Aspects of operation such as Voicemail to E mail Integrated Messaging Pro IMS Web Campaigns etc are subject to further requirements Please refer to the Voicemail Installation and Administration manual Integrated Messaging Pro IMS is supported on Microsoft Exchange 5 5 2000 and 2003 The R3 0GA release of VoiceMail Pro does not support IMS operation with Outlook 2003 operating in cache mode The R3 0 maintenance release will provide this support For Phone Manager PC Softphone Avaya recommen
245. mber must be kept e Parallel Port Feature Key e A 25 pin Parallel port 1 set to bidirectional operation in the PC s BIOS e Bidirectional parallel port operation is the normal default on most PCs e WARNING Do not connect a printer to the parallel port Feature Key dongle Poorly wired printer cables or printers that have not been earthed correctly can cause the parallel port Feature Key to stop working e USB Feature Key e USB 1 1 or 2 0 Type A connector e IP Office 1 4 Admin suite or later Network e The PC should be configured and tested for TCP IP networking e t should be on the same network segment as the IP Office That is data traffic between the IP Office and the Feature Key Server PC should not require routing e The PC should have a fixed IP address Whilst PC s in a DHCP network usually retain the same IP address between reboots this is not guaranteed e lf the IP Office is acting as a DHCP server then in default it uses addresses 192 168 42 2 to 192 168 42 201 for DHCP clients This leaves addresses between 192 168 42 202 and 192 168 42 254 free for devices that require fixed IP addresses Installation Manual Page 154 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Serial Port Feature Key Installation 1 Plugthe serial port Feature Key dongle into the serial port on the IP Office control unit IP Office Small Office Edition IP406 V2 and IP412 control units 2 Start Manager and
246. meter 3 3 LAN interconnect cable is supplied with the module for this purpose though a replacement cross over cable is required if connecting to an 1P412 control unit The WAN3 module requires its own IP address on the same subnet as the IP Office control unit A WAN3 module obtains that address using DHCP so a DHCP server is required for installation This module is supplied with a LAN interconnect cable and a power supply unit An appropriate locale specific power cord for the power supply unit and cables for the WAN ports on the rear of the module must be ordered separately Installation Requirements 1 O Installation space either on or under the existing IP Office control unit 2 O Switched power outlet socket 3 O System password 4 O IP Address For the WAN module on the same subnet as the control unit SI L Free LAN port on the front of the control unit 6 L Grounding Requirements 1 O Functional Ground Connection of a functional ground is recommend for all modules a Tools Required 1 O Manager PC 2 O DHCP server preferably the IP Office itself 3 LI Tools for rack mounting optional N Parts and Equipment Required 1 LJ WANS 10 100 Module Each module is supplied with a suitable external power supply unit and a RJ45 RJ45 LAN interconnect cable O For the IP412 control unit an RJ45 RJ45 LAN crossover cable is required LI WAN Cables A V 24 V 35 or X 21 WAN cable is required for co
247. mful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense Canadian Department of Communications DOC NOTICE This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment EMC Caution for China 77 FER MAGARI REGINE 1 AAA RESA MAA AMM Akama PSR PUK ALI SEAT TA eh Mae AAP pel sk Do ipa Installation Manual Page 323 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Regulatory Instructions for Use IP Office Operation in Australia Connection Connection of P400 Office products must be via a Line Isolation Module with a telecommunications compliance label BRI Interface During the configuration ensure 000 emergency number is not barred by performing the following
248. mination e Traditional IDC Punchdown Wiring Installations Where necessary the far end RJ45 plug can be stripped from IP Office cables and wired into traditional wiring systems using punch block connectors This type of installation should be performed by an experienced wiring technician e Trunk Connections The majority of IP Office trunk ports use RJ45 connectors for acceptance of an RJ45 to RJ45 cable However connection at the line providers end may require use of a different plug type in order to match the line providers equipment e RJ11 Phone Connectors Many phones use RJ11 sockets and are supplied with RJ11 to RJ11 cables RJ11 plugs can be inserted into RJ45 sockets and in many case the connection will work However this is not recommended or supported as the connection lock is not truly positive and may become disconnected An RJ45 to RJ11 cable is available for these connections Installation Manual Page 277 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Standard IP Office Cables The following are Avaya standard cables available for use with IP Office systems The maximum length is applicable if the standard Avaya cable is replaced with an alternate cable Cable Description SAP Code Length Maximum 25 Way DTE Cable Connects to a IP403 or IP406 V1 control 100213432 2m 6 6 2m 6 6 unit 25 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket 9 Way DTE Cable Connects to an SOE IP406 V2 or IP412 2m 6
249. mory and then copying the new BIN files directly to the Flash memory Its uses BOOTP and TFTP and requires a BOOTP entry for the IP Office system to exist on the Manager PC This method should not be used unless absolutely necessary Start Sufficient sa Offline na Cancel memory p Upgrade Upgrade Yes Yez Send BIMs Reboot to Rabac to IP Office OA ime Mode No Proceed with ne Sufficient ca Unvalidated Upgrade memory p Upgrade Yes Yez Yez Er aze current as Transfer BINs Delete BIH Reboot into Flash Request BIH s i Cancel Reboot Upgrade via BOOTP and Reboot H Installation Manual Page 107 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Procedure Upgrade Procedure 1 Using Manager click and receive the configuration from the IP Office If not already done this action creates a BOOTP entry in Manager for the IP Office system This action also confirms communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office Select File Save Configuration As and save a copy of the configuration file onto the PC This action should be completed before upgrading any IP Office system Select File Advanced Upgrade 4 The UpgradeWiz is started and scans for IP Office modules using the Unit Broadcast address Adjust this address and click Refresh if the expected modules are not shown UpgeradeWiz 5 2 8 C Program Files AvayaWP Office Manager Mame IP Address Type Ver
250. mporarily assumes their extension number and settings until the user log off The Base Extension value set against extensions in the IP Office configuration indicate the default associated user of the extension it is not the extension number of that port E Objective To change a user s or users extension number iw Procedure 1 Renumbering all extensions and users The following process allows all user extension numbers to be shift up or down by a set amount Any settings linked to those numbers are adjusted including extension Base Extension settings It does not affect hunt group extension numbers 1 This action alters extension settings and so requires a system reboot when the configuration is sent to the IP Office 2 Select Tools Renumber Extension Renumber E E A Rebase extension number plan Enter a value and select if either Add or Subtract Value 100 Add Subtract 3 Enter the amount by which you want to shift the current extension numbering of extensions and users Click OK If the configuration changes are complete send the configuration back to the IP Office and select appropriate settings for the reboot Installation Manual Page 129 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 1 2 0 Procedure 2 Changing an Individual User s Extension Number Select i User Locate and select the relevant user On the User tab change the Extension num
251. music wav file 142 look 142 Homologation Statements 317 Hong Kong 40 hosting 78 Parallel 78 hot swapable 185 Hours Access Notes 62 housing 318 Avaya IP Office 318 HP Open View Network Node Manager 161 HP OpenView 42 160 HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6 41 160 htm 256 HTML 48 Contains 48 Humidity Range 62 hun 40 Hungarian 40 267 268 Hungary 40 Hunt 73 Hunt Group 73 80 HuntGroup 73 HyperTerminal 168 169 171 172 286 IP Office Serial Port Feature Key dongle 177 179 181 183 185 106 Select 106 IROB 146E 146 199 201 285 form 146 IROB s 30 144 146 ISDN 20 86 207 279 282 283 322 connect 282 283 ISDN Switch Protocol 158 ISDN Terminal 282 ISDN Version 158 ISDN Video Calls 158 ISDN_Quad_BRI 158 isl 40 ISP 53 ita 40 189 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Italian 40 48 189 258 264 266 267 268 Italy 40 142 Its LAN 177 IVR 44 49 268 J J1 10 J6 92 196 Japanese 48 189 jon 189 June 21 169 June 26 256 June 26th 2003 49 K Key Server 156 know 172 MAC 172 kor 40 189 Korea 23 40 181 183 196 197 201 205 298 319 Korean 40 48 189 264 266 267 268 L L2TP 271 Label 127 Lamp Operation 127 LAN 10 12 20 26 34 36 42 43 46 53 80 82 100 106 153 179 181 183 190 209 260 277 279 289 298 322 Connect 82 MDI 181 183 LAN Cable 80 82 289 LAN Crossover Cable 289 LAN Interconnect 209 LAN Interconnect Cable 289
252. n aes Directory 0 OP Time Profile 0 al CD Firewall Profile 1 IP Route 0 Licences wY Least Cost Routing ig Account Code 0 nn eS Ceti Licence Type Voicemail Pro 4 Ports val Tunnel 0 Licence Status Unknown Logical LAN 0 Instances 255 Licence Key with OptsPXxE Hy plnC_kmH_St0SQGKDW 7 A n ee Auto Attendant 0 ge Authorisation Code w Received BOOTP request for D00c761cc088 unable to process L_ e Example 1 Enabling Software Features In the example below the IP Office system has a valid Phone Manager Pro license In this case the license is for 20 instances That means that up to 20 IP Office users can be use Phone Manager Pro simultaneously Their previously license free Phone Manager Lite software will automatically change to display Phone Manager Pro features e Example 2 Enabling Software and Features The example below has Voicemail Pro enabled by the addition of a Voicemail Pro license This initial Voicemail Pro license also provide for 4 ports between the IP Office system and the Voicemail Pro PC The Additional Voicemail Pro ports license adds another 4 ports since the Voicemail Pro ports licenses are cumulative When a license key is entered into the IP Office configuration the following information is shown e Status The status which is Unknown until the configuration file is sent back to the IP Office system e License Th
253. n 1 Double click System from the Configuration Tree panel and select the SNMP tab 2 Ensure that SNMP Enabled is ticked 3 Using either Trap Destination 1 or Trap Destination 2 enter the following information e Enter the IP Address of the PC running the SNMP manager application e Enter the Port on which the traps messages should be sent This is the UDP port on which the IP Office sends SNMP trap messages The default is 162 e Set the Community that will be used by the agent and the SNMP manager The community public is frequently used to establish communication and then changed at both the SNMP agent and manager ends for security e Select the Events which should be sent e Generic Events such as soft reboot warm start hard reboot cold start links up down transition in the status of a PPP or frame relay interface or SNMP community mismatch e Entity Failures errors and changes of state in IP Office modules and trunk interfaces Note Does not include WAN3 Modem2 and ATM4 e Licence Changes of state in the communication with the Feature Key Server e Phone Change Changes to the type of DS or IP phone connected to a port 8 Click on OK 9 Send the configuration back to the IP Office and select reboot Installation Manual Page 164 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Trap Generation RFC1215 Generic SNMP Traps warmStart Soft reboot coldStart Unexpected reboo
254. n be entered and those people set to receive either an email or using IP Office Voicemail Pro a call asking them to join the conference IP Office MS CRM Microsoft s MS CRM is an application that allows the customer to maintain a database of their business contacts and details of interactions with those contacts The IP Office MS CRM component consists of three parts one installed on the MS CRM user PC one installed on the customer s MS CRM server and a license entered into the IP Office system s configuration It allows the MS CRM user to make and answer calls through their MS CRM application Installation Manual Page 43 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Voicemail Applications The IP Office supports a range of applications for the recording and playing of voicemail messages Embedded Voicemail Also called Integral Voicemail this application is supported on Small Office Edition and IP406 V2 control units It is unlicensed but requires the addition of an Avaya memory card to store messages and prompts Embedded Voicemail supports basic voicemail mailbox operation and the setup of up to 4 simple auto attendants Voicemail Lite This application does not require an IP Office license It can be installed from the IP Office Administrator Applications CD to a Windows PC on the IP Office LAN It provides voicemail operation for all IP Office users and groups using the PC hard disk to store prompts an
255. n the Small Office Edition and the IP406 V2 control units They are specially formatted Compact Flash cards that provide embedded voicemail operation and can also be configured for basic auto attendant support Use of these cards for voicemail does not require a license e These cards are not hot swappable Removal of the cards while the IP Office control unit is powered may cause lose or corruption of messages and prompts Country SAP Code Small Office Edition All 700289721 Uses a 64MB Compact Flash cards fitted into a PCMCIA slot caddy The card provides up to 10 hours storage for compressed prompts greetings and messages Operation of the card uses the one of the Small Office s voice compression channels for each call IP406 V2 All 700343460 Uses a 512MB Compact Flash card This card provides up to 15 hours storage for uncompressed prompts greetings and messages Operation of this card does not require voice compression channels e From IP Office 3 0 onwards the prompt files for the following languages are pre installed on the Avaya memory cards e Danish dan e Finnish fin e Norwegian nor e German deu e French fra e Portuguese ptg e English UK eng e French Canadian e Portuguese Brazilian English US enu fre ptb e Spanish esp e Italian ita e Russian rus Spanish Mexico esm e Japanese jpn e Swedish sve e Korean kor e Chinese chs e Spanish Argentina ess e Dutch nid e Fo
256. n to the SMDR interface provided in IP Office SMDR see below The real time event stream takes the form of a call record which is issued whenever the state of any endpoint of a call changes typically there are two endpoints on a call but for some circumstances such as conference calls intruded calls there may be more Installation Manual Page 47 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP Office Application CD DVD s The IP Office applications are available on a number of CD s and DVD s These can be ordered at a nominal cost to cover order processing and delivery Copies of the CD images can also be downloaded from the Avaya support website at http support avaya com The CD s below have also been combined onto a single DVD SAP 700407612 Title Discs Description SAP Code IP Office 3 2 User and Administration CD Set This CD set contains the IP Office Administrator 700407604 Applications CD IP Office User Applications CD and IP Office Documentation CD s English German and French See below for details of the contents of each CD e CD 1 Administrator Applications CD Contains the IP Office Wizard Monitor Feature Key Server Manager Voicemail Lite Call Status Delta Server CBC DECT Integration applications plus SNMP MIB s CD 2 User Applications CD Contains the IP Office Phone Manager TAPI DevLink MS CRM Integration and SoftConsole applications CD 3 4 5 Documentation CDs
257. nager 600MB for the full IP Office Admin suite Display 800 x 600 256 Colors 1024 x 768 16 bit High Color e For Windows XP minimum RAM 256MB Installation Manual Page 262 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Monitor Monitor is a tool that can show all activity on the IP Office system in great detail As a consequence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol knowledge Despite that however all IP Office installers and maintainers need to understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve support issues Details IP Office 3 2 User and Admin CD Set x5 700407604 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 x No license required Minimum PC marie XP 2000 2000 2003 Pro Pro Server Server Variant Pentium Celeron Manager 128MB la PIII Celeron 3 Athlon B 800MHz 800MHz 650Mhz e For Windows XP minimum RAM 256MB Installation Manual Page 263 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Phone Manager Phone Manager is an application that allows the user to control and monitor their own phone through their PC For Avaya phone s that support handsfree operation Phone Manager can be used to make and answer calls During usage the Phone Manager records details of calls made answered and missed It can also be configured to show the status of other users on the syste
258. nce L Check that there is sufficient working space for installation and future maintenance O Ensure that likely activities near the system will not cause any problems e g access to and maintenance of any other equipment in the area IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool 2 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning 3 Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual Do not dispose of batteries in a fire They may explode Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions Installation Manual Page 60 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Planning Tools and Parts Required This section outlines the tools and miscellaneous parts likely to be required during the setup of an IP Office system Other tools may also be required F Tools Required 1 i ge 93 6 L Pozidrive No 1 screwdriver for removal of module covers CO Cutter for cable ties O Pozidrive No 4 screwdriver O Wrist strap
259. ncoming calls the prefix is added to any incoming ICLID received with the call That allows the ICLID to be used by IP Office phones and applications to make return calls e On outgoing calls any prefix on the digits received by the trunk to dial is removed since that prefix will not be valid at the central office exchange amp Objective Ensure the correct prefix is added to incoming calls 1 2 2 0 Procedure 1 Within the IP Office configuration select 1 1 Line 2 For each line enter the prefix The location of the relevant setting varies for each trunk type e Analog Trunks Line Settings Analogue Options Line Number Telephone Number Incoming Group ID Outgoing Group ID Outgoing channels Voice channels National Frefix PIC Line Appearance ID 39 e T1 and T1 PRI Trunks PRI 4 Line Channels Line SubType TI i Line Number r Channel Allocation 24 gt 1 Prefix Clock Quality Network Framing i CRC Checking ig ero Suppression Bazs CSU Operation Line Signalling CFE w Haul Length 0 115 ft Incoming Routing Digits 4 O K Channel Unit Foreign Exchange Installation Manual Page 137 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation e BRI E1 PRI SO and QSIG Trunks PRI Line short Codes Channels Line Number 6 Line SubType ETSI Telephone Number lu TEI Prefix ls National Prefix Number of Channels 20 Outgoing Ch
260. ng 30B D channels E1 PRI trunk Cards Country Control Units SAP Code IP400 PRI 30 All except China Supported on all control units 700272461 E1 1 4 and CALA except Small Office Edition IP400 PRI 60 All except China Supported only on the IP412 and 700185184 and CALA Slot A of the IP406 V2 e These cards include two plastic spacer pegs for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of the control unit The blanking plate is not required with the Small Office Edition which has removable sections in the rear panel WAN Trunk Card This trunk card is supported on the Small Office Edition control unit only It provides the unit with a single 3 way D type WAN port Country Control Unit SAP Code IP400 WAN All Only supported on the Small Office 700289713 Expansion Edition e The card is supplied with two plastic spacer pegs for installation and a replacement rear panel for the Small Office Edition control unit Installation Manual Page 195 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation E1R2 PRI Trunk Cards These cards support E1 trunks with R2 signalling Each trunk provides up to 30B D channels E1R2 PRI trunk cards are available with either RJ45 or coaxial cable connectors E1R2PRI trunk Cards Control Unit SAP Code IP400 PRI 30 CALA Korea Supported on all control units except 700241631 E1R2 RJ45 China the Small Office Edition IP400 PRI 60 700241649 E1R2 RJ45 IP
261. ng 88 VCM10 16 88 190 VCM16 16 88 190 VCM20 16 88 190 VCM24 16 88 190 VCM30 16 88 190 VCM4 16 88 190 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 VCM5 16 88 190 VCM8 16 88 190 VCOMP 86 88 92 Venezuela 40 VER 86 Video 324 Video Comm Interface 158 Video Conference 158 View Station PVS 1419 158 Viewstation 128 158 Viewstation 256 158 Viewstation MP 158 Vinyl 217 298 VKOOnDd15SDvxXox kw9cR9x_jOXr_AWZ 9 10 VM 49 VM Lite 40 49 VM Pro 40 49 256 VM Pro Server 259 VMAIL 86 VMPro 256 VMPro Database Interface 268 274 298 VMPro Recordings Administrators 259 268 274 298 VMPro TTS 268 274 298 VMPro VB Script 268 274 298 Voice Compression 185 Voice Compression Channels 190 Voice Compression Module Cards 190 Voice Compression Modules 16 53 88 298 fitting 53 Voice Compressor 165 Voice Mail Pro 190 274 Voice Priority Processor 10 298 Voice Priority Processor 20 298 voicemail 16 24 40 42 44 49 54 61 62 78 86 112 165 179 189 190 256 259 267 268 272 274 E mail 49 Link 165 Modular Messaging 274 playing 44 Voicemail Applications 44 Voicemail Calls 190 voicemail email 44 73 268 Voicemail Installation 49 refer 49 Voicemail Licenses 298 Voicemail Lite 40 44 48 49 62 78 86 190 267 268 Voicemail Lite Installation 7 Voicemail Lite Pro 62 Voicemail Mail Lite 78 Voicemail On 73 Voicemail Pro 35 40 44 48 49 62 78 150 152 258 259 268 274 276
262. ning storm 2 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 3 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 4 Always use caution when working with telephone lines Installation Manual Page 318 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Safety Statements Trunk Interface Modules To ensure the validation of the approvals only the following types of trunk interface cards must be fitted in the following IP Office control units USA Canada Product Quad BRI PRI E1 PRI T1 ATM4 WAN V Single Dual Single Dual Paosone ns x x_ pono x x povo x x EEE EEN IP412 Office Small Office Edition Rest of World Quad BRI PRI E1 E1R2 PRI T1 ATM4 WAN V1 V2 Product Single Dual Single Dual Small Office Edition NERE e Single WAN trunk card is only supported in the Small Office Edition control unit All other IP Office control units include an integral WAN port e Small Office Edition control units include 4 integral analog trunk ports e E1R2 trunks are only supported in CALA and Korea Installation Manual Page 319 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Further Information and Product Updates Further information including Product and Reference Manual updates can be obtained from Avaya s Dealers and Distributors or from Avaya s
263. nks e Use with ground start trunks requires that the trunk module and the IP Office control unit are grounded e Digital Station Module DS16 DS30 Provides depending on the variant an additional 16 or 30 DS ports for supported Avaya digital phones This module has been superseded by the Digital Station V2 Installation Manual Page 20 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview e Digital Station Module V2 DS16 V2 DS30 V2 Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or 30 DS ports for supported Avaya digital phones Supersedes the previous Digital Station module e Phone Module Phone8 Phone16 Phone30 Provides depending on variant an additional 8 16 or 30 POT ports for analog phones This module has been superseded by the Phone Module V2 e Phone Module V2 Phones V2 Phone16 V2 Phone30 V2 Provides depending on variant an additional 8 16 or 30 PHONE ports for analog phones Supersedes the previous Phone module With IP Office 3 1 the Phone V2 supports a wider range of message waiting indication MWI options than Phone V1 modules e With V2 units the labelling of analog phone ports was Changed from POT to PHONE e 08 Module Provides 8 ETSI BRI ports for the connection of ISDN devices BRI So interface This unit is not intended to support BRI trunks e WANS 10 100 Module Provides on its rear an additional three 37 way D type WAN ports These can be used for the connection of V
264. nnected to the port marked EU24 on suitable phones Doing otherwise will cause damage to the EU24 EU24BL and the equipment to which it is attached EU24BL Feature Detail EU24 port on phone Supported by 4620 4621 4625 5620 5621 Maximum per phone Maximum per IP Office Additional 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply or Class requirements 3 PoE IP Office release Programmable 24 Buttons VEET SAP Code 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 407786623 Installation Manual Page 250 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components T3 DSS The T3 DSS provides an additional 36 programmable keys for phones in the supported T3 series The T3 DSS is moulded and designed to be attached to the associated phone Signalling is achieved by cable connection to the Link port on the T3 phone A further two T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS T3 DSS Feature Detail Maximum per DS modue SSS Additional requirements IP Office release Programmable Buttons Variant Colour SAP Code T3 DSS Unit T3 DSS Expansion Unit Installation Manual Page 251 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation XM24 Connects to the XM24 port on the base of 6416 and 6424 phones Requires the phone to have a separate power supply using an Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and a power outlet socket are required Feature XM24 Programmable Buttons lt 24 SAP Code XM
265. nnection to each WAN port The cable used determines the signalling provided by that port L Power cord for the power supply unit L Rack mounting kit optional L Cable labeling tags Installation Manual Page 100 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation Procedure Adding a WAN3 Module 1 Switchoff power to the IP Office control unit 2 Connect the WAN3 module to the control unit using the LAN cable Switch on power to the WAN3 module Switch on power to the IP Office Control Unit Using Manager receive the configuration from the IP Office system 6 Select Control Unit If the WAN3 module is not listed right click and select New A Select WAN unit window appears which will allows the network to be scanned for the WANS unit 7 When the unit is located select it and then OK Send the configuration back to the IP Office system Installation Manual Page 101 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 13 Shelf Wall Mounting SOE Small Office Edition control units can be shelf or wall mounted Four screw head retaining slots are moulded into the base of the unit for this purpose In addition a plastic Z shaped bracket and screw is supplied with the unit for securing it in position Installation Requirements e Horizontally on a shelf leaving sufficient space for the cabling at both front and rear of the unit e Vertically from a wall with th
266. not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Variant Country SAP Code 700211360 Analog Trunk IP400 Analog Trunk 16 North America CALA Europe 700241680 New Zealand 700241698 Digital Station All 700359839 700359847 700184807 IP400 Digital Station 30 700184880 Phone 700359896 700359904 700359912 700184773 700184781 700184799 IP400 So8 700185077 WAN 700185028 a lane A 700262009 All All All All All All All All All All All Installation Manual Page 298 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Power Supply Units System Components The following power supply units are used with IP Office control units and expansion modules Normally the appropriate PSU is supplied with the IP Office control unit or expansion module Note however that a locale specific power cord is not included with each power supply unit Variant 40W Unearthed PSU Uses IEC60320 C7 power cords Used with IP406 V1 IP406 V2 Country SAP Code All 700210792 Analog Digital Station V1 Phone V1 All 700284938 I A 700357387 IP412 Digital Station V2 Phone V2 So8 WANS 10 100 The following power supply units have various applications They are used to provide power to 4600 Series and 5600 Series IP phones They are also used to provide power to other phone types when those phones are supporting an XM24 EU24 or EU24BL add on unit Note An appropriate loca
267. ns to the protective ground point in the rack e Must be used when more than 3 Barrier Boxes are in use e A maximum of 16 Barrier Boxes are supported on any module Installation Manual Page 96 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation i Procedure Rack Mounting 1 Using the small screws 2 fix the main brackets 6 to the module 1 ae n O rn lt p G Tyd Si a 7 ja x2 4 wal Tee N LKI F o _ iin at iig e Ra 2 Using the nut 5 bolt 3 and washer 4 provided loosely fit the module into the rack system in its intended position 3 If required add the cable guide brackets 7 before finally tightening the nuts and bolts If required connect the module ground points to the rack ground point This should be done using 14AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve functional ground or green and yellow sleeve protective ground 5 Continue installation and setup as normal Installation Manual Page 97 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 11 Expansion Modules External expansion modules except the WANS connect to the IP Office control unit using a blue 1 meter 3 3 expansion interconnect cable e Note Expansion modules are only detected by the IP Office control unit if the Expansion modules are powered up and running before the control unit is started The control unit power
268. nstallation w Parts and Equipment Required 1 L External Expansion Module Each module is supplied with a suitable external power supply unit and a RJ45 RJ45 expansion interconnect cable 2 O Power cord for the power supply unit 3 LJ Rack mounting kit optional 4 O Cable labelling tags t Procedure 1 Switch off power to the IP Office control unit 2 Attach the external expansion module s power supply 3 Connect the blue expansion interconnect cable from the module s EXPANSION port to the first free EXPANSION port on the control unit 4 Make careful note of the port used and include this detail on the cable label and any other system records 5 Switch on power to the module Wait for the center LED on the front of the module to change from red to green Switch on power to the control unit Once the control unit has rebooted using Manager receive the system configuration 8 Clickon Unit in the left hand panel 9 Check that the list of units shown in the right hand panel is correct 10 Proceed to 12 Adding a WAN3 Module Installation Manual a ss i lt lt lt i lt i w sssS Bagge 99 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 12 Adding a WAN3 Module WANS expansion modules connect to the IP Office control unit using a LAN cable It is preferred that the cable is connected directly to the IP Office control unit rather than via any other equipment A green 1
269. nt is used when possible VM Pro 512MB RAM Pentium4 Not Athlon XP IMS 2GB drive 2 8GHz tested 3000 CM All Athlon64 Athlon XP 3000 All Athlon64 512MB RAM 20GB drive Pentium4 2 8GHz Not tested Not tested Not tested Not tested 512MB RAM 20GB drive Athlon XP 3000 All Athlon64 Athlon XP 3000 All Athlon64 Athlon XP 3000 Pentium4 2 8GHZ 512MB RAM 30GB drive Pentium4 2 8GHz 912MB RAM 120GB drive 512MB RAM Any 10GB drive 1 4GHz Pentium4 2 8GHz Pentium4 2 8GHz All Athlon64 Any 1 4GHzZ Athlon XP Any 1 7GHz Not tested 3000 All Athlon64 CBC SMDR 256MB RAM 10GB drive IE6 0 or higher Pentium III SOOMHz If the database being queried is located on the VM Pro server the query speed of the database will be affected by the amount of memory available Please take into account the memory requirements of the database being queried VM Pro and CCC can be run on the same server OS up toa maximum of 25 agents 8 ports of VM Pro The client PC needs to be Pentium III 800MHz with 128MB RAM minimum Windows XP Professional or 2000 Professional can be used but would typically support a maximum of 10 web clients To support more than 10 clients a server OS with IIS will be required The Delta Server and CBC can be installed on either the same PC or on separate PC s In both
270. nt are interconnected using long cable runs for example phone and data networks It is recommended that all IP Office modules are connected to a functional ground In some cases such as ground start trunks this is a functional requirement In other cases it may be a locale regulatory requirement and or a necessary protective step for example areas of high lightning risk e WARNING During installation do not assume that ground points are correctly connected to ground Test ground points before relying on them to ground connected equipment Installation Requirements e Mandatory Grounding The IP Office system must be grounding in the following situations e Where required by local regulatory requirements e On all Analog Expansion modules ATM16 and any control units containing an analog trunk card ATM4 ATM4U e On any control unit using coaxial E1R2 trunks e On Digital Station V2 and Phone V2 expansion modules e Mandatory Ground plus additional protective equipment Additional equipment will be required in the following situations Refer to Out of Building Telephone Installations e On any Digital Station or Phones expansion module connected to an extension located in another building e On all Analog Expansion modules ATM16 and any control units containing an analog trunk card ATM4 ATM4U in the Republic of South Africa e Optional Grounding The uses of grounding connections for scenarios other than those listed abo
271. ntrol unit type e Xx Not supported on this control unit type Modem Cards SAP Code Small IP403 IP406 IP406 IP412 Office Edition Internal Modem Card 700343452 Provides 12 V 90 modem channels 4 only in the IP403 control unit Modem 2 Card 700185226 Provides 2 V 90 modem channels Installation Manual Page 16 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Voice Compression Modules VCM cards are used to provide voice compression channels for calls between IP and non IP devices devices being both trunks and extensions VCM cards with differing numbers of voice compression channels are available e For the Small Office Edition control unit either 3 or 16 voice compression channels with 40ms echo cancellation are pre built into the module These cannot be changed e Supported on this control unit type e X Not supported on this control unit type VCM Cards SAP Code Small Office IP403 IP406 IP406 IP412 Edition V1 V2 25ms echo cancellation VCM5 700185119 O O VCM10 700185127 Oxo VCM20 700185135 a VCM30 700293939 pK 64ms echo cancellation VCM4 700359854 x eR Vo NEI FEE POST x e AVCM channel is required for all calls to from an IP source and a non IP source e lf direct media is supported calls between IP sources only require a VCM channel for call setup and when accessing control unit services such as music on hold T3 IP phones do not support direct m
272. nual IP Office 3 2 System Overview Rack Mounting Kits The IP Office control units and expansion modules are designed to be stacked free standing However they can also be rack mounted using optional rack mounting kits The Small Office Edition cannot be rack mounted but can be wall mounted if required e IP Office Rack Mounting Kit One kit is required for each control unit and module in the system e Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit Where analog phone barrier boxes see below are being used this kit allows them to be grouped and rack mounted Surge Protectors and Barrier Boxes Where the installation includes extensions in other buildings additional protective equipment is required This equipment may also be required in areas where the lightning risk is high Phones IP Office systems support a variety of Avaya digital and IP phones plus analog phones License Keys Various IP Office features and applications require a license key to be entered into the system s configuration Each key is a 32 character text string unique to the feature being activated and the serial number of the Feature Key dongle see below installed in the system Feature Key Dongle A uniquely numbered dongle used to validate license keys Several different types of Feature Key dongle are available e Serial key dongles can be plugged directly into Small Office Edition IP406 V2 and IP412 control units e Parallel and USB feature key dongles are plug
273. ny module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment an Avaya 146G Surge Protector e REN 2 1 if connected to external bell device e Off Hook Current 25mA e Ring Voltage 40V RMS nominal e Slave Socket Installation Manual Page 280 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components AUDIO Port This port is found on the rear of all IP Office control units It is used for the input of an external music on hold sound source Note that if the IP Office has loaded an internal music on hold sound file any input from this socket is ignored The port is a 3 5mm stereo jack socket suitable for use with the most standard audio leads and connection to the headphone output socket of most audio systems The use of a headphone socket allows simple volume adjustment Connection via a Line Out socket may require additional equipment in order to adjust the volume level Pin No Description Common Common Audio In Left Channel Right Audio In Right Channel e Input impedance 10k channel Maximum a c signal 200mV rms Installation Manual Page 281 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation BRI Port So The BRI ports found on the front of the So8 module are BRI S interface ports for connect to ISDN terminal devices IP Office i Wire ISDN Terminal BRI RJ45 BRI PIN RJ45 oul 2
274. ode 405362641 407786623 Australia and New Zealand 407786631 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 408161453 Installation Manual Page 302 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Internal Cards Variants Country SAP Code SOE IP403 1P406 IP406 IP412 V1 V2 Modem Cards Modem 2 700185226 J J Card Internal 700343452 J Modem Card Embedded Voicemail Small Office Memory Cards Edition 700289721 4 IP406 V2 700343460 ER Edition All uf uf wf Voice Compression 700185119 Modules 25ms ee en a 700293939 x bei EC bisi EA x x VCM 30 Voice Compression VCM 4 Modules 64ms VCM 8 VCM 16 VCM 24 i af uf X wf i 700359870 700359888 Installation Manual Page 303 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Trunks Cards Variants Country SAP Code SOE IP403 IP406 IP406 IP412 ui sere gie esp IP400 Analog 4 Loop North and South 700185192 Start America IP400 Analog 4 EU Europe 700241672 Loop Start IP400 Analog 4 NZ New Zealand 700241706 J J Loop Start CARARARA eee fee eet ii EE IE CO Tv v v v cee e II IP400 PRI 30 E1 1 4 All except China and 700272461 id PR CALA IP400 PRI 60 E1 All except China and 700185184 CALA E1R2 IP400 PRI 30 E1R2 CALA Korea China 700241631 RJ45 IP400 PRI 60 E1R2 CALA Korea China 700241649 RJ45 IP400 PRI 30 E1R2 CALA 700241656 COAX IP400 PRI 60 E1R2 CALA 70
275. of IP Office supported DS phones If connected to an out of building extension the connection must be made via additional IROB 146E barrier devices in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system Item blean Country SAP Code IP400 Digital Station V2 All SoPa Ports IEC60320 C13 Power Cord NEMA5 15P 700289770 Rack Kit 700210800 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Installation Manual Page 200 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP400 Digital Station V1 The IP400 Digital Station module also known as DS module
276. oftware The following components of IP Office are outside the range of a basic IP Office installation They are covered by separate installation and configuration documentation If those components are to be part of the IP Office system installation that documentation should be obtained read and understood prior to the installation 4600 5600 Series IP Phone e Compact Contact Center CCC Installation Installation Embedded Voicemail Installation e Contact Store Installation Voicemail Lite Installation e Compact DECT Installation Voicemail Pro Installation e IP DECT Installation Delta Server SMDR Installation e 3600 Series Wireless IP Installation Compact Business Center CBC e IP Office Applications Installation Installation Phone Manager SoftConsole and Conference Center Installation Manual Page 7 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Equipment Availability SAP codes and details of specific items within this documentation are for reference only Items available in any specific locale should be confirmed against the local Avaya IP Office price list for that locale The local price list may also include additional items relative to the installation requirements of that locale RoHS RoHS is an European Union directive for the Removal of Certain Hazardous Substances from Electrical and Electronic Equipment Similar legislation has been or is being introduced in a number of other c
277. oftware 158 Admin Video Network 158 Admin Video Network Call Preference 158 Admin Video Network IMUX 158 Admin Video Network ISDN Video Network 158 Administration 49 Administration CD Set 48 298 Administrative Council 326 Terminal Attachments 326 Administrator 84 116 Administrator Applications CD 48 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Administrator Group 112 select 112 ADMM 275 298 PARK ID 298 Advanced 106 112 120 134 169 172 Advanced Dialing 158 Advanced Server 49 AElI Headset Link 244 245 246 T3 IP 244 245 246 affect 22 78 IP Office Feature key 78 IP412 22 AGC 179 Agent login 47 Agent logout 47 Agent Rostering 256 270 Agent Rostering Interface 256 270 Enables 256 270 Aid Compatibility 326 Hearing 326 Alarm Reporter 46 256 A Law 177 179 181 183 185 298 322 All Athlon 64 256 259 268 All Athlon64 49 All IP Office 96 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 279 All IP Office LAN 289 All Other Units 58 Allow 1 6U 62 Allow Direct Media Path 190 Allow User Setup 158 Allowable 0 C 62 40 C 32 F 62 AllowDial 158 allows 43 137 160 187 ICLID 137 IP Office 187 IP Office s SNMP 160 MS CRM 43 Allows GEN1 4606 298 ALOG 86 AMD 49 254 255 256 258 259 260 261 263 264 266 267 268 AMD Athlon XP 78 262 AMD Athlon64 78 262 AMD Opteron 49 78 262 amend 172 BOOTP 172 America 177 179 181 183 185 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 Amplified Handset 212
278. ol the number of simultaneous Phone Manager Pro users The user s Phone Manager software then automatically changes from Lite mode to Pro mode e Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone This is a PC softphone mode of Phone Manager operation The user acts as a VoIP extension making calls through the speaker and microphone of their PC This mode requires further licenses in addition to the Phone Manager Pro licenses TAPILink Lite The Microsoft Telephony Application Program Interface TAPI allows TAPI compliant applications to interact with IP Office phones by installing an IP Office TAPI driver TAPILink Lite does not require any licenses entered into the IP Office system s configuration It allows TAPI compliant applications such as Outlook to make and answer calls The speech part of the calls is still via the user s physical phone SoftConsole This is a licensed application It is intended for telephone system operators or receptionists Its displays details of calls directed to the user and allows them to quickly see the status of the callers required destination and transfer the call The SoftConsole user is able to access a range of details about the status of users and groups on the IP Office system Up to 4 simultaneous SoftConsole users can be licensed Conference Center This is a server application that is then accessed via web browser It also users with a conference center password to book conferences Details of the conference invitees ca
279. on This section cover the basic requirements for external trunk configuration The exactly method of physical connection and configuration will vary with each trunk provider and so requires local telecoms experience The topics covered here are general guidelines e Clock Quality Altering which digital trunk is used to provide the IP Office with its clock signal for call synchronization e Unused Trunks Disabling the use of trunks and trunk channels that are not available e Prefix Dialing On systems where a prefix is being used for external dialing ensuring that the same prefix is added to incoming numbers in order to allow return calls Installation Manual Page 133 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Clock Quality Summary Any system where digital trunks are being used for example PRI BRI SO and QSIG trunks requires a accurate clock signal for call synchronization between the switches at each end of the trunk The IP Office can obtain and use the clock signal from any of its digital trunks However it should only use one trunk for its clock signal and any other possible clock sources should be ignored Typically the clock signal provided by a digital trunk from the central office exchange is the best quality and most reliable source amp Objective Set a chosen digital trunk as the network clock source and set all other digital trunks as 1 2 2 0 Procedure 1 Within the IP Off
280. on 275 IP DECT 275 Status 155 156 Stop Bits 168 286 streaming 272 WAV 272 structure 161 IP Office MIB 161 Structured Cabling Line Cord 285 291 subnet 82 100 106 142 Subnet Mask 62 sum 325 326 RENs 326 Ringer Equivalence Numbers 325 summarizes 13 176 IP Office 13 176 Suomi 40 Super 112 Super Group 112 Super User 112 Creating 112 Supported Country Locales 40 supporting 16 55 194 209 298 10Mbps 100Mbps LAN 209 2B D 194 512MB Compact Flash 16 64Mb Compact Flash 16 XM24 298 Supports PRI 14 sve 40 189 Svenska 40 swappable 188 189 Swapping 131 Analog 131 Avaya 4600 5600 Series IP Extensions 131 Extension Users 131 Users Using Configuration Change 131 Sweden 40 Swedish 189 258 264 266 267 268 Switch Type 158 switchable 279 280 Switching 151 288 Capacity 151 288 Switzerland 40 298 synchronization 133 134 System Name 62 System Overview 9 System Password 62 80 84 86 106 System Short Code 157 Create 157 System Using System Monitor 86 Checking 86 system s 142 hear 142 listen 142 Systems 49 78 155 156 262 Operating 49 78 262 T T1 10 135 137 292 T1 PRI 13 135 165 176 194 T1 PRI Trunk Cards 194 T1 PRI Trunks 137 T1 Robbed Bit 14 T1 PRI 298 T3 36 40 244 245 246 251 T3 AEl Headset Link 298 IP Phones 298 T3 Classic 244 245 246 251 298 T3 Comfort 245 251 298 T3 Compact 246 251 298 T3 DSS 22 244 245 246 251 T3 DSS Expansion Uni
281. on Capacity 28 100 180 190 360 Digital DS Phones only 8 98 180 188 360 e 6 12 25 Way 7 9 way Analog Phones only IP Phones 4 only Trunk Cards Supported 1 2 2 2 2 Analog trunk cards __x_ Ly a a so i Quad BRI trunk cards J d vi ft vi 2 Dual PRI trunks cards x Lx e a WAN port card x x 1 1 VCM Cards N A 1 2 Maximum voice compression channels ii 20 20 30 ee 18 18 Data Channels 24 40 100 Maximum usable for Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV Dimensions Height x Width x Depth 76x255x241mm 71x445x245mm 3 X10 x9 5 2 8 X17 5 x9 7 e 1 Some IP403 control units are equipped with DT digital terminal rather than DS digital station ports Use of the DT ports is not supported for IP Office 3 0 or higher e 2 The Small Office Edition control unit only supports T1 PRI It does not support E1 or E1R2 PRI trunk cards e 3 The IP406 V2 supports dual PRI trunk cards in Slot A only e 4 VCM channels are required for call setup and may be required for call duration A maximum of 50 T3 IP phones are supported Installation Manual Page 13 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Trunk Cards In addition to various internal cards each control unit except the Small Office Edition can be fitted with up to 2 trunk cards The trunk cards are fitted in Slot A and Slot B at the rear of the control unit Each trunk card is supplied with spacer pegs
282. on on the module In MDIX Out MDI All ports are on LAN1 in the IP Office configuration IP406 V2 This module has 8 LAN ports acting as an full duplex layer 2 LAN switch Ports are auto MDI MDIX All ports are on LAN1 in the IP Office configuration This module has 2 LAN ports acting as a half duplex layer 3 LAN switch Both ports are fixed MDI crossover ports In the IP Office configuration port 1 is LAN1 port 2 is LAN2 Small These modules have 4 LAN port acting as a full duplex layer 2 LAN switch In addition an Office RJ45 socket marked as WAN acts as a layer 3 Ethernet switch port In the IP Office Edition configuration the LAN ports are on LAN1 the WAN port on LAN2 The LAN port LED s are used as follows e Green On connected Flashing Activity e Yellow On 100Mbps Off 10Mbps LAN Cables These are CAT5 UTP cables for connection of various IP devices within the IP Office system 5 1 RJ45 RJ45 1 LANMLAM Crossover Cable 3 Meter 9 64 Feet si LAN Interconnect Cable 1 Meterss 26 Feet IP Office LAN Pin MDIX MDI Wire Standard Crossover Normal Crossover Interconnect ae White Orange a Orange White pi White Green 4 5 7 8 Not used Not used Brown hite e SAP Code e LAN Cable GREY 700213481 Standard straight LAN cable e LAN Interconnect Cable Green 700213465 Supplied with WAN3 modules for the direct connection of the WAN3 module to an IP Office control
283. on the PC and which can then be accessed by 3rd party call logging applications The Delta Server can also send SMDR records to a remote IP address The Delta Server application installs as a Windows service Access to the application is via web browser on the PC to the address http localhost 8080 Details IP Office 3 2 User and Admin CD Set x5 DVD IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 100407612 Minimum PC pera XP 2000 2000 2003 Pro Pro Server Server Variant D Pentium Celeron Delta ist 10GB PIII Celeron 3 Athlon B Server 800MHz 800MHz 650Mhz e Microsoft Explorer 6 0 or higher is also required Installation Manual Page 260 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Feature Key Server This application is required for IP Office systems where licenses are being validated against a parallel or USB port Feature Key dongle It must be installed on the same PC as the dongle The application installs as a service and appears as an icon in the PC s system tray It has no configuration settings Feature key server is not required for IP Office systems with a serial port dongle attached directly to the IP Office control unit Details IP Office 3 2 User and Admin CD Set x5 700407604 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 x No license required Minimum PC RA M XP 2000 2000 2003 Pro Pro Server Server Variant RAM HD Pentium Celeron Feature Key lhl 1MB PIII Celeron 3 Athlon B Server 800Mhz 80
284. onnection NET TNV Operating within the limits of SELV BRI ISDN connection NET TNV Operating within the limits of SELV Two wire analog trunk TNV3 Two wire analog trunk TNV3 Async Data connection SELV Telephone Extension ports TNV2 Telephone Extension ports SELV WAN connection NET SELV 10 100 BaseT attachment to LAN SELV Expansion Module connector SELV Connector for Music on Hold SELV Connector for Controlling Ancillary SELV circuits Connector for DC input power SELV Interconnection circuits shall be selected to provide continued conformance with the requirements of EN 609050 1992 A3 1995 clause 2 3 for SELV circuits and with the requirements of clause 6 for TNV circuits after connections between equipment Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Page 322 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Safety Statements EMC Cautions 89 336 EEC EMC Directive CISPR 22 1993 including A1 A2 ASINZ 3548 1995 ROW 889 336 EEC EMC Directive CISPR 22 1993 including A1 A2 AS NZ 3548 1995 ROW e WARNING This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Federal Communications Commission FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against har
285. onsole 7 43 48 49 266 271 276 298 Softphone 36 Software 35 152 Enabling 35 152 Software Developers Kit 48 Software Features 35 152 Enabling 35 152 Software Level 38 177 179 181 183 185 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 Software Upgrade 120 Forcing 120 sourced 22 298 South Africa 23 28 30 40 98 104 144 192 193 197 280 298 Page 338 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Republic 28 30 98 104 144 192 193 197 280 South America 23 193 298 SP2 49 78 262 SP4 49 78 262 Space Required 62 Space Requirements 58 Spain 40 Spanish 40 48 189 264 266 267 268 Spanish Argentina 189 Spanish Mexico 189 Specification 49 IP Office Application PC s 49 Spectrum 256 270 Spectrum 3214C Wallboard 298 Spectrum 3214C Wallboard Kit 298 Speech 44 268 276 298 Third Party Text 276 298 Speed Dials 62 SPID 158 stackable 32 free standing 32 Stage 9a 92 Stage 9c 92 Stages Required 106 Staging Installation 1 During 61 Stand 241 298 Stand 4400 Series Stand 221 Standard DCP Phone Keys 212 213 214 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 Standard ETSI Euro ISDN 158 Standard ETSI ISDN 158 Standard IP Office Cables 26 277 STANDARD mib 161 STANDARD MIB file 161 start 88 161 Monitor 88 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 OpenView Network Node Manager 161 Start Manager 120 155 156 stati
286. or connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors If connected to an out of building extension the connection must be made via additional IP Office Barrier Boxes in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system VEET Country SAP Code IP400 Phone 8 V2 All 700359896 16 Ports 700359904 30 Ports 700359912 IEC60320 C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 700289762 Sy BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 all NEMA5 15P 700289770 Rack Mounting Kit 700210800 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Installation Manual Page 204 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP400 Phone Module The IP400 Phone module also known as the Phone V1 module is used to add additional POT ports to an IP Office system
287. ountries Avaya has decided to make its global product range compliant with the requirements of RoHS The actions taken vary e In some cases equipment has been discontinued and is no longer available from Avaya e n some cases new manufactured stock has been made RoHS compliant and keeps its existing SAP code e Inothercases the equipment has been replaced by a new RoHS compliant alternative with new SAP codes The SAP codes within this document are for RoHS compliant equipment unless otherwise stated Installation Manual Page 8 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview System Overview This section looks at the components that collectively form an IP Office system This includes aspects such as cabling and the need for additional non IP Office equipment This section provides just a general description of individual units For greater detail refer to the System Components section Installation Manual Page 9 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP Office System Components The following are the typical components of an IP Office system e IP Office Control Unit The core component of any IP Office system It holds the main configuration and performs the routing and switching for telephone calls and data traffic Each control unit includes LAN ports slots for additional internal cards and in some cases integral digital and analog phone ports e Trunk Cards Fi
288. outing that routes the appropriate calls to that short code For this example the following was used e Line Group 95 identifies calls using the PRI lines configured above e Destination 1500 the short code created above e Bearer Any To allow the video device on the SO port to make outgoing calls to the PRI lines also requires a short code 1 For this example the following was used e Code 91N e Number N e Feature Dial e Line Group 95 Installation Manual Page 158 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Polycom Video Module Settings The Polycom modules used in the previous example were the Viewstation 128 Viewstation 256 and Viewstation MP The Polycom module must have software that supports Standard ETSI ISDN European ISDN and have its ISDN Switch Protocol setting set to Standard ETSI Euro ISDN The following were the settings used during testing Characteristics Admin Software and Hardware Software e Polycom View Station 512 MP e Software 7 0 1 e NTSC UIS Interface e Network Interface S T Interface e View Station PVS 1419 e ISDN Version IEUS v18 a00320 Admin General Setup Admin Video Network ISDN Video Network Country USA Country Code 1 Language English USA Area Code 732 Auto Answer Yes Number A blank AllowDial Yes Number B blank Allow User Setup Yes ISDN Switch Protocol Standard ETSI Euro ISDN Maximum Time on Call 480 Auto Answer Y
289. over fixing screw 3mm can be used as an alternative ground connection point A toothed washer should be added to ensure good contact Installation Manual Page 29 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Out of Building Connections Lightning Protection The following are the only supported scenarios in which wired extensions and devices outside the main building can be connected to the IP Office system In these scenarios additional protection in the form of protective grounding and surge protectors must be fitted l The fitting of additional protection does not remove the risk of damage It merely reduces the chances of damage to other internal equipment Main Building Control Unit Secondary Building CO Analog Lines Analog Digital Phone Station Protection Boxes J Earthed Ducted I Cabling I External Contact Approved Ground Point Approved Ground Point Closure Device Cabling Requirements Cables of different types for example lines extensions ground and power connections should be kept separate All cabling between building should be enclosed in grounded ducting Ideally this ducting should be buried A Primary Protection Box must be provided at the point where the cables enter the building This should be three point protection tip ring and ground Typically this would be gas tube protection provided by the local tel
290. ower Supply with battery backup 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 Installation Manual Page 230 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 4624 The 4624 IP is no longer available from Avaya This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source GEN1 models only support PoE if using the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base 4624IP Feature Detail ail Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp Typical Off Hook Power 4 1W Class 0 Consumption Display 24 characters O FE Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with X Voice Priority Voice priority is supported if the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base is fitted Standard DCP Phone Keys SPEAKER x 4 HEADSET MUTE a VOLUME UP x E MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER v w VOLUME DOWN x tt DROP 54 REDIAL KW CONFERENCE Variant SAP Code 4624 GEN1 US International GEN2 US International 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 30A Switch Upgrade Base US variants use just text labels on the phone keys International variants use both text labels and function icons on the keys GEN1 models do not support Power over Ethernet PoE unless fitted with the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base 700207376 Installation Manual Page 231 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office In
291. p and click OK For this example we will enter Super Group Click the Security Administration tab and select all the available options Click OK Group Details Read all security settings Werte all security settings Reset all security settings Select io Service Users Click amp in the details pane Enter a name and password for the new Service User and click OK For this example we will enter Super for both the name and password On the Service User Details tab in the Service Group Membership section select the Administrator Group and the Super Group and click OK Service User Details Service Group Membership Administrator Group _ Manager Group Operator Group Super Group 8 The new security settings can now be sent to the IP Office control unit Click lal 9 The original name and password used to load the settings will be requested Enter the details and click OK Installation Manual Page 115 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 17 Receiving a Configuration 3 2 IP Office 3 2 and higher uses a different method of configuration security from previous IP Office software Actions such as receiving or sending a configuration require a Service User name and password with sufficient rights to perform that action to be entered amp Objective Receive a configuration from an IP Office running IP Office 3 2 or higher software Information Required 1 LJ S
292. p iii 219 HP Open View Network Node Manager 161 9010 rilancia 220 CastleRock SNMPc 5 1 6c and earlier 162 AAGO D Eo elearen aa 221 CastleRock SNMPc V5 0 1 naaa 162 AA DE a cadi 222 Enabling SNMP and Polling Support 163 AA 2AD F li 223 Enabling SNMP Trap Sending 164 Ul 224 Trap Generation 165 4602 P 4602SW ciali 225 RFC1215 Generic SNMP Traps 165 AOOO a a N 226 1d eee a reer a ai 165 4105 W ketene Nene ne ane ne i a 227 ABN piedini 228 Maintenance Sal ae cle a EI Rete ater 167 AB2OIP 4620SW LL 599 DTE Port Maintenance eee 167 4621SW 230 DTE Port Overview 167 4624 234 DTE PON crure pen doaceshettesce 168 4625SW MT A TE Ove vary et ad 232 DTE Gables sunnin 168 5402D 233 Erasing he Conk duralo ee eenean 169 E mo Defaulting Security Settings 171 i ROOT A RR RR EI TOTO a Erasing the Operational Software We lei 236 System Components 175 56002IP 5602SW eediieescalia ao 237 System Components salati iride ia 175 SOS ee ae ee ere 238 Control UNItS 176 0020 Lilian 239 Control Unit Summary EAA AIA DE AA A 176 DOZF tulle ta 240 P412 Control Unit 177 ost ieee dered a a a i 241 IP406 V2 Control Unit 179 04 TOD e an era ia 242 IP406 V1 Control Unit 181 O
293. pervisor 184730 also allows reporting on 5 agents and one instance of a PC 101184731 vena CCC PC Enables additional CCC PC Wallboards for 5 10 20 50 CCC PCW 172786 Wallboards agents 50 174474 Wallboards not Ferrograph Licenses are cumulative up to a Wallboard maximum of 16 wallboards Report Viewer Allows additional users 5 10 20 access to historic CCC nl reports Report CCC Agent Enables the Agent Rostering Interface for CCC which CCC Rostering 171997 Rostering provides connection to a 3rd party Agent Rostering package Blue Pumpkin CCC Designer Enables CCC Report Designer which permits a supervisor CCC Designer 171999 users to design and customize their own reports One license per user Note requires the user to have Crystal Report Writer software Installation Manual Page 257 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Conferencing Center This is a server application that is accessed via web browser It allows users with a conference center password to book conferences Details of the conference invitees can be entered and those people set to receive either an email or using IP Office Voicemail Pro a call asking them to join the conference Access to the conference center for configuration and conference booking is via web browser Details IP Office Conference Center 3 2 700407596 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 License Conferencing Center
294. port on IP Office Small Office 700293095 Edition IP406 V2 and IP412 Control Units allowing PC less operation Parallel ai Plugs into the appropriate port on a PC running the IP Office 700185234 Ss Feature Key server application This PC must on the same LAN segment as the IP Office control unit 700261506 Installation Manual Page 34 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview License Keys Various IP Office features and applications require entry of license keys into the system s configuration The license keys are unique 32 character codes based on the feature being activated and the serial number of the IP Office system s Feature Key dongle Example 1 Enabling Software Features In the example below the IP Office system has a valid Phone Manager Pro license In this case the license is for 20 instances That means that up to 20 IP Office users can be use Phone Manager Pro simultaneously Their previously license free Phone Manager Lite software will automatically change to display Phone Manager Pro features Example 2 Enabling Software and Features The example below has Voicemail Pro enabled by the addition of a Voicemail Pro license This initial Voicemail Pro license also provide for 4 ports between the IP Office system and the Voicemail Pro PC The Additional Voicemail Pro ports license adds another 4 ports since the Voicemail Pro ports licenses are cumulative When a license key is entered
295. position when the phone is wall mounted 9 Connect the handset cord to the handset 10 Connect the handset cord to the port labelled tl HAC This is normally located on the left hand side of the phone 11 Connect the line cord to the port marked with a EJ symbol 12 Connect the line cord to the wall socket 13 The phone should display Upgrading firmware please wait and then FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS Once this has completed the should briefly display New Calls 0 and then the current users name and extension number 14 The line cord can be run through the channel in the base of the phone to space at the center This space can be used to conceal excess cable 15 Slide the phone onto the exposed heads of the wall mounting position Installation Manual Page 122 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 B Phone Installation Additional Procedures iw Procedure Checking the Firmware on a 2410 or 5410 Phone 1 Press Exit to ensure that the phone has exited any other usage mode 2 Press either of the display keys next to MENU 3 Select OPTION 4 Select Self Test The display should now show details of the phone s currently installed firmware 24100 REL 2 00 9 21 04 1 HWT 5S H HaV i Link 5 The firmware loaded into the phones has a major and minor version The Major version in the example above is shown as FWV 2 and the minor version is shown as REL 2 00 6 Press 7 Exit to exit se
296. pplications Dependencies 49 Client Operating Systems 49 Client PC 258 Clip 215 217 3616 215 3626 217 CIK A 293 296 CIk B 293 296 Clock Quality 134 Close Monitor 86 CM 49 cmd 82 Coaxial E1R2 Trunk Cards Only 92 Code Telephone Number 73 codec 190 codecs 190 coldStart 165 Colors 78 262 Colour 244 245 246 251 colours 283 292 Comma Separated Variable Text Files 73 Comms Cards 298 Communications 323 Canadian Department 323 communications data 26 277 Community 55 163 164 Set 164 Compact Business Center 7 46 49 255 271 298 Compact Contact Center 7 46 49 256 298 Compact Contact Center 5 0 CD 256 Compact Contact Center V5 0 CD 48 Compact DECT 36 271 Compact DECT Installation 7 Compact Flash 179 189 Compact_Contact_C enter 256 companding 177 179 181 183 185 298 Compile 161 MIBs 161 Compliance 321 Conf 40 Conference Chip 190 Conferencing 49 Conferencing Center 7 49 258 271 276 298 Conferencing Center Web Client 49 Conferencing Web Client 49 Config 161 169 171 Configuration 84 116 169 171 Defaulting 171 Erasing 169 Receiving 84 116 Configuration Cradle 215 216 217 298 Configuration Memory 13 176 Configuration Tree 163 164 Configure Incoming Call Route 157 configuring 112 167 IP Office 167 Security Settings 112 Conformity 317 323 325 Declaration 317 323 325 Connection 326 Connection Type 30 144 Connector Type 22 Contact Center View 49
297. quipment expected 1 2 Procedure 1 LJ Check for Package Damage Before unpacking any equipment check for any signs of damage that may have occurred during transit If any damage exists bring it to the attention of the carrier 2 O Check the Correct Parts Have Been Delivered Check all cartons against the packing slip and ensure that you have the correct items Report any errors or omissions to the equipment supplier 3 O Retain All Packaging and Documentation While unpacking the equipment retain all the packaging material Fault returns are accepted only if repackaged in the original packaging If performing a staged installation the original packaging will also assist when repacking equipment to be moved to the final install site 4 O Check All Parts Visually inspect each item and check that all the necessary documentation and accessory items have been included Report any errors or omissions to the dealer who supplied the equipment 5 LI Check All Documentation Ensure that you read and retain any documentation included with any items 6 Proceed to 02 Installing the Admin Applications Installation Manual Page 77 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 02 Installing the IP Office Admin Applications This procedure covers installation of applications in the IP Office Admin suite E Objective To install the applications necessary for the installation and maintenance of an IP Office system
298. r Feature Key Server Manager Monitor Phone Manager SoftConsole Voicemail Lite Voicemail Pro Licence Keys General CCC Phone Manager Voicemail IP DECT Licenses CTI Page 175 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Control Units Control Unit Summary The following table summarizes the IP Office control units Feature Small Office 1P403 1P406 1P406 IP412 Edition V1 V2 Digital Station DS Ports Oors Analog Phone PHONE Ports 2or4 Optional Embedded Voicemail Card Slot Integral WAN Port Expansion Ports DTE Port Audio In MOH Port External O P Switch Port Conference Parties Configuration Memory 4 di vi e 6 12 ay vy iy 7 24 192KB ok 9 way 25 e Maximum Extension Capacity 28 100 180 190 360 98 180 188 360_ Digital DS Phones only Analog Phones only 4 IP Phones 4 only 16 Trunk Cards Supported 2 2 2 2 Analog trunk cards Quad BRI trunk cards Single PRI trunk cards Dual PRI trunks cards WAN port card VCM Cards 1 Maximum voice compression channels 20 20 30 S0_ 18 18 Data Channels 24 40 100 Maximum usable for Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV Dimensions Height x Width x Depth 76x255x241mm 71x445x245mm 3 X10 x9 5 2 8 X17 5 x9 7 e 1 Some IP403 control units are equipped with DT digital terminal rather than DS digital station ports Use of the DT ports is not supported for IP Office 3 0 or higher
299. r Ethernet PoE unless fitted with the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base Installation Manual Page 226 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 4610SW This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source 4610SW Feature IP network Typical Off Hook Power 5W Class 2 Consumption Display 29 characters x 5 lines 168 x 80 pixels Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with af df Voice Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys 4 SPEAKER lt amp HEADSET lt MUTE sl ii VOLUME UP x Es MESSAGES amp HOLD 0 TRANSFER Ww VOLUME DOWN 7 DROP 7 HO REDIAL v CONFERENCE VEUEN SAP Code 700381957 700356447 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup 700356454 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 700203797 700229735 Noisy Location Handset 700229743 700229727 Installation Manual Page 227 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 4612 The 4612IP is no longer available from Avaya This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source GEN1 models only support PoE if using the optional 30A Switch Upgrade Base 4612IP Feature Detail Speaker Microp
300. r View 46 256 Call Detail Records 45 Call Handling Parameters 62 Call Logging Applications 45 Call Routes 80 Incoming 80 Call Status 48 49 78 254 called 160 190 253 260 320 20B Module Adapter Base 253 Helpline 320 IP Office voicemail 190 SMDR 260 SNMP 160 CALLS 86 Campaign Manager Campaigns 48 Canada 40 Canadian Department 323 Communications 323 Canadian French 40 Cancel 129 Cantonese 40 268 Capacity 151 288 Switching 151 288 Card 62 92 187 195 196 298 Carry 217 298 Castle Rock SNMPc EE 5 1 6c 160 CastleRock 42 160 CastleRock SNMPc 161 V5 0 1 161 CastleRock SNMPc 5 1 6c 161 CastleRock SNMPc V5 0 1 161 CastleRock SNMPc V5 0 8 161 correct 161 CAUTION 146 147 151 288 CBC 7 46 48 49 255 260 CBC application 271 Enables 271 CBC SMDR 49 CBC2 49 CCC 7 46 48 49 256 260 270 298 following 256 270 CCC Agent Rostering 256 270 298 CCC Agents 256 270 298 Page 328 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 CCC AGT 256 CCC Archiver 46 256 CCC Chat 270 CCC Delta Server 49 CCC Designer 256 270 298 CCC Email 270 CCC Licenses 298 CCC PC Wallboards 256 270 298 CCC PCW 256 CCC Report 256 CCC Reporter 49 256 CCC Rostering 256 CCC Server 256 270 298 Enables 256 CCC Server application 46 270 Enables 270 CCC Spectrum Wallboards 256 270 298 CCC SUP 256 CCC Supervisors 256 270 298 CCC SVR 256 CCC v5 49 CCC Wallboard Manager 298 CCC
301. r full details of embedded voicemail setup and configuration refer to the Embedded Voicemail Installation manual e Memory cards in these slots can also be used for storage of files normally obtained via TFTP transfer For example the music on hold wav file and supported 4600 Series 5600 Series software files This will however reduce storage space for prompt and message files if embedded voicemail is being used Non Avaya memory cards can be used for this function Installation Manual Page 189 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Voice Compression Module Cards VCM s VCM s are optional cards that can be installed inside all IP Office system control units except the Small Office Edition Each VCM provides a number of voice compression channels indicated by a number suffix For example a VCM 8 has 8 voice compression channels Small Office Edition control units have either 3 or 16 built in voice compression channels with 40mms echo cancellation VCM Cards SAP Code Small Office IP403 IP406 IP406 IP412 Edition 25ms echo cancellation VCM5 700185119 x Vvemio 7o01s5127 x VCM20 700185135 x VCM30 700293939 x 64ms echo cancellation VCM4 700359854 x VCM8_ 700359862 x VCM16 700359870 x Maximum number of channels e Support for VCM 20 on IP403 was added at IP Office 1 3 ANAN NNNNN e These modules are still supported but are no longer available from Avaya Installa
302. rators e IP400 ContactStore for IPO RFA Additional User access to ContactStore requires the user PC to have Microsoft Explorer 5 5 or higher Minimum PC Cr XP 2000 2000 2003 i Pro Pro Server Server Variant RAM HD seat Celeron VM Pro Server Dis 20GB P4 Not Athlon XP salu P P and Contact 2 8GHz Tested 3000 Store All Athlon 64 ContactStore 512MB 10GB 2 4GHz e 1 For all voicemail servers also allow 1MB per minute for messages and greeting storage e 2 Also allow 7 2MB per hour for recordings in the Contact Store disk partition e lf installed onto the same PC as Voicemail Pro the ContactStore must use a separate disk partition from Voicemail Pro Installation Manual Page 259 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Delta Server Applications such as CCC and CBC do not communicate directly with the IP Office system They communicate across the LAN with a PC running the IP Office Delta Server application This application receives call information from the IP Office systems which it then shares with other applications The Delta Server does not require a license in the IP Office configuration Only one Delta Server can be used with each IP Office system e Delta Server SMDR Output The Delta server can be configured to output a call log of all calls made and received by the IP Office system This is called a SMDR call log The Delta sever send these records to an SMDR file stored
303. re Network Termination PIN RJ45 at eRxXA White Orange 1 12 peeo 2 _ White Green a fered CNEZ RETI a 6 emeB GreenWhite 6 7 White Brown 7 8 Brown White 8 e Supply IP Office control units pre fitted with BRI and or PRI trunk cards are normally supplied with the appropriate number of these cables BRI PRI trunks cards supplied separate do not include these cables e Cable Color Red e SAP Code 700213440 e Maximum Length 5m 16 5 feet This is the maximum length that should be used if the above cable is replaced with an alternate cable e Pin Connections e Though not used pins 7 and 8 are through connected for ease of construction Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Page 283 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation DC I P Port Found on all IP Office control units and expansion modules Used for connection from the external power supply unit supplied with the control unit or module e No other type of power supply unit should be used with the module or module unless specifically indicated by Avaya Installation Manual Page 284 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components DS Ports These ports are used for connection from an RJ45 structured cabling system to digital station phones supported by the IP Office Though the RJ11 to RJ11 cables supplied with most DS phones can be plugged directly into RJ45 ports including those on
304. re level 2 1 31 minimum Bin file nadcpV2 bin Included Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a Earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply module The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Unboxed 3 5Kg 7 8lbs Boxed 4 8Kg 10 8lbs Based on DS30 V2 Installation Manual Page 199 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Digital Station V2 Connections gt gt dali DEUS IP400 Digital Station OF 17 18 13 1 22 23 i 24 5 so DIDO BaD BPRS BPRS See a i SEE G GGG Tet Te SEEGER Gis SEE EEGs DC IP ra DTE EXPANSION 16 244 DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION 42 244 DO 15A PHONE W2 Description DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module RJ45 socket Digital Station port Used for connection
305. re three type of Feature Key dongle available The serial number is printed either directly onto the dongle or onto a label on the dongle Feature Key Type Description SAP Code Plugs directly into the serial port on IP Office Small Office 700293095 Edition IP406 V2 and IP412 Control Units allowing PC less operation Parallel n Plugs into the appropriate port on a PC running the IP Office 700185234 by Feature Key server application This PC must on the same LAN segment as the IP Office control unit 700261506 Installation Manual Page 153 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Installation Requirements Software e The IP Office Administration CD contains the Feature Key Server software This is required for use with USB and parallel port licence keys Feature Key e Ensurethatthe serial number on the Feature Key dongle is noted and recorded in a safe location The number is printed on the Feature Key dongle and prefixed with SN Feature Key Server PC Only required if using a Parallel Port or USB Feature Key Not applicable if using a Serial Port Feature Key dongle e Windows 2000 2003 or XP are strongly recommended as the Feature Key Server is then able to install as a service giving greater reliability e The server PC should be located in a secure area The Feature Key device is fundamental to the correct operation of many features so a record of its location and serial nu
306. receive the IP Office system s configuration 3 Select System On the System tab the License Server IP Address field is used to set the location of the feature key For a serial port license key set the License Server IP Address to be blank 5 Click OK 7 To add a license click and select License Enter the new license click OK Select License 8 The Status of the new license should show Unknown and name the license as expected If its Status is Unknown and name Invalid the most likely cause is incorrect entry of the license key characters 9 Click on lal to send the configuration back to the IP Office The menu that appears will indicate whether a reboot is required 10 Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the license It should now be Valid Installation Manual Page 155 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Parallel Port USB Feature Key Installation 1 2 3 Plug the Feature Key dongle into the PC s parallel or USB port Insert the IP Office Administrator Applications CD and let the installation wizard auto start If some IP Office administrator application have been previously installed select Modify when the Modify Repair or Remove option menu appears In the Select Features menu ensure that Feature Key Server is selected Do not change any other options as this will trigger their removal if already installed Having
307. rmation from the IP Office systems which it then shares with other applications The Delta Server does not require a license in the IP Office configuration Only one Delta Server can be used with each IP Office system The Delta server can be configured to output a call log of all calls made and received by the IP Office system The Delta sever send these records to an SMDR file stored on the PC and which can then be accessed by 3rd party call logging applications The Delta Server can also send SMDR records to a remote IP address Installation Manual Page 45 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Call Center Applications Delta Server The applications below do not communicate directly with the IP Office system They communicate across the LAN with a PC running the IP Office Delta Server application This application receives call information from the IP Office systems which it then shares with other applications The Delta Server does not require a license in the IP Office configuration Only one Delta Server can be used with each IP Office system Compact Business Center CBC This is a licensed application It receives data from the IP Office Delta Server application The CBC is able to show details of calls handled by up to 3 selected hunt groups Its can also display details of IP Office trunk usage The CBC retains calls details for 31 days Compact Contact Center CCC CCC is a reporting application
308. rver IP Address 62 142 TFTPLog 172 These MIB 161 These Ports 322 These WAN 209 Third Party Database Access 49 Third Party Text 276 298 Speech 276 298 TIA EIA 1S 968 Section 4 5 321 TIA EIA 1S 968 Section 4 5 2 5 321 Tick SNMP Enabled 163 Time 62 Time Server IP Address 62 tip ring 318 TNV 322 TNV2 322 TNV3 322 To Send 168 286 294 295 to from 16 IP 16 Tone Generator 190 Tools 61 Tools Required 61 88 90 92 98 100 102 104 106 120 TOT 86 Traditional IDC Punchdown Wiring Installations 26 277 Transmit Clock 293 294 295 Transmit Data 168 286 293 294 295 TransTalk 36 175 TransTalk 9040 247 Trap Destination 164 Trap Generation 165 Troubleshooting Workshop 54 Trunk 190 Trunk Cards 14 92 175 177 179 181 183 185 298 Fitting 92 Trunk Cards Supported 13 176 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Trunk Configuration 133 Trunk Connections 26 277 Trunk Interface 165 317 Trunk Interface Cards 92 Fitting 92 Trunk Interface Modules 319 Trunk Slot 62 Trunk Type 135 Set 135 TS013 324 connecting 324 TSO 320 TTS 44 49 268 274 298 TTY 40 168 286 turn_off bat 120 turn_on bat 120 Twisted Pair 295 296 Tx 293 294 Tx1 92 196 TX A 282 283 289 292 293 295 296 Tx B 282 283 289 292 293 295 296 TxClk 293 TXCIK A 293 295 TxCIk B 293 295 TYP 86 Type Out 135 types 10 244 245 246 DS 244 245 246 Feature Key dongle 10 Typical Desktop PC 24 Typical IP Offic
309. ry systems However as long as the criteria for maximum current voltage and if necessary protection are met the switches can be used for other applications The switches can be switched closed open or pulsed closed for 5 seconds and then open This can be done in a number of ways e Using IP Office short codes e Through the Door tab in Phone Manager Pro e Through the Door Release option in IP Office SoftConsole e Via the Open Door action in Voicemail Pro Default Short Codes The following are the default short codes in the IP Office configuration for external output switch operation They use the short code features Relay On closed Relay Off open and Relay Pulse State Switch1 Switch 2 onje e pe jn a Installation Manual Page 150 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes EXT O P Port These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units They are used for connection to external switching relays The port uses a standard 3 5mm stereo jack plug for connection The IP Office is able to open high resistance close low resistance or pulse close for 5 seconds and then open two switches within the port Either switch can be operated separately These switches are intended for activation of external relays in systems such as door opening systems CAUTION In installations where this port is connected to a device external to the building connection must be via an Avaya 1
310. s of modem card available Country SAP Code 700185226 Modem 2 Card Provides 2 modem channels Supported from IP Office 1 0 onwards Internal Modem Card All 700343452 Provides 12 modem channels except on the IP403 where it only provides 4 Supported from IP Office 2 1 27 onwards Not supported on the IP406 V1 e The cards are supplied with 2 plastic spacer pegs for installation e The first analog trunk on Small Office Edition control units and on modules fitted with an ATM4 or ATM4U trunk card can be set to answer V 32 analog modem calls Whilst in this mode the trunk cannot be used for voice calls Installation Manual Page 187 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Wireless Card This card is supported by the Small Office Edition control unit only and allows the unit to act as an 802 11b wireless access point The card can be inserted into either of the control units two PCMCIA slots e These cards are not hot swappable Removal of the card while the IP Office control unit is powered is not recommended Wireless Card Country SAP Code Small Office Edition Wireless Card All 700289739 e Use of the card requires entry of a Small Office WiFi license P400 WiFi Access Point RFA into the IP Office configuration Installation Manual Page 188 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards These cards are supported o
311. s Avaya lP Office Manager Mame IP Address Type Vers Av Status IPOffice_1 IPOffice 1 192 168 42 1 IP 40605 3 1 63 3 29 Proceeding DIG DCPx3042 6 7 63 528 Proceeding Unit Eroadcast Address 200 200 200 200 Refresh Validate Upgrade Cancel Installation Manual Page 110 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation 13 Unvalidated Upgrade This method of upgrading should be avoided unless absolutely necessary It is only required for IP Office systems with pre 2 1 software and should only be done from a Manager PC with a fixed IP address running on the same LAN segment and subnet as the IP Office system During the upgrade the units and modules erases their current software and then request the new software file from Manager 14 Following the upgrade check that the upgrade wizard now shows that the selected units and modules have upgraded It may be necessary to select Refresh to update the information in the upgrade wizard display 15 Repeat the process as required For example if doing a multi stage control unit upgrade or if there are WAN3 modules in the system that are being upgraded separately 16 Proceed to 16 Configuring Security Settings Installation Manual Page 111 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 16 Configuring Security Settings The security method used by IP Office 3 2 and higher differs from previous IP Office software When a sys
312. s a 4mm screw located towards the right on the rear of the module REHE eA FREE DC IF VA EXPANSION CITE ca 16 24Y DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION 2 Sd DE 158 PHONE Ve On some older modules the dedicated ground point screw is not present In those cases the top center cover fixing screw 3mm can be used as an alternative ground connection point A toothed washer should be added to ensure good contact Page 105 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 15 Upgrading the Core Software The installed IP Office Manager includes bin core software files appropriate to the software level It can be used to load those bin file into the control unit and module within the IP Office system b WARNINGS e Check IP Office Technical Bulletins Check the latest IP Office Technical Bulletin for the IP Office software release before proceeding any further It may contain information relating to changes that occurred after this document was completed Bulletins are available from http support avaya com e WANS and WANS 10 100 Modules Upgrade each WANS module separately and only after having upgraded the control unit and any other expansion modules e Upgrading pre Level 2 1 Systems For IP Office Systems with software Level 2 0 or earlier the upgrade procedure must be done from a PC with a fixed IP address on the same subnet and LAN segment as the IP Office
313. s well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information identifying Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on Avaya s web site at http support avaya com ThirdPartyLicense Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya Products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support Trademarks Avaya and the Avaya logo are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc in the United States of America and other jurisdictions Unless otherwise provided in this document marks identified by and SM are registered marks trademarks and service marks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Documentation information For the most current versions of documentation go to the Av
314. select File Open Configuration from the menu bar 3 The Select IP Office window appears After a few seconds it should list the control unit that is being setup The default name used is the control units MAC address Select IP Office Mame IP Address Type Version Yersion 2 1 C 00E00701 9050 192 168 42 1 IP 406 D05 21 27 TCP Discover Progress Unit Broadcast Address e lf the system required was not found the address used for the search can be changed Enter or select the required address in the Unit Broadcast Address field and then click Refresh to perform a new search Click the check the box next to the system and then click OK The name and password request is displayed The name must match a Manager operator and the password must match the IP Office control unit s system password For a defaulted IP Office with pre 3 2 IP Office software enter Administrator and password IP Office Login IP Office TechStaft_Unt IF 412 Administrator Name Administrator System Password Cena o e The nameand password used above are applicable to new control units which are supplied with a basic IP Office 2 1 level of software Once upgraded to IP Office 3 2 the name and password required change 6 Successful receiving of the configuration is shown by the full configuration tree being shown in the left hand panel With no configuration loaded the configuration tree shows just BOOTP and Operator 7 Proceed to
315. sing the optional Rack Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Unboxed 3 0Kg 6 7lbs Boxed 4 3Kg 9 6lbs Maximum 256KB Configuration Size Installation Manual Page 179 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP406 V2 Connections AME IP406 Office FHOHE 1 ve TEUNK EWF 1 3d ics E ttt dba CF GIF TII A SSG BSS WAH ee EA E hP Bieta ntact DC NP EXPANSION a OTE WAN 1 2_ 3 4 5 a P ee a aaa da PO 1 54 SLOT A LOT EG Ports Description 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input Type 2 Compact Flash socket Used for optional embedded voicemail card DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya un earthed 45W external power supply unit supplied with the control unit RJ45 socket Digital Station port Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones Not suitable for out of building connections DTE 9 Way D Type socket Used for system maintenance Suitable for direct connection of P DTT Omce seral Por Feature key dongles EXPANSION RJ45 socket Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the expansion module EXT O P 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry 7 OF controls The port contains two independent switches controled by the IP Oi
316. sion Available Status IPOffice_1 IPOffice_1 192 168 42 1 IP 406 DS 3 1 63 3 2 9 DIG DCPx30 22 1 69 5 2 5 Unit Broadcast Address 255 255 255 255 v Validate For each the control unit and module found the UpgradeWiz displays the module type its current version of software installed in the unit and the software version of the bin file that Manager has available For those units and modules where manager detects that it has a higher version available the tick box next to the unit or module is automatically selected 7 If any of the modules have pre version 2 1 software installed untick the Validate option e If this is the case only continue with the upgrade process using a PC with a fixed IP address on the same LAN domain and physical LAN segment as the IP Office control unit 8 Ifa multi stage upgrade is necessary use the following additional steps to select the appropriate interim software a Right click on the upgrade wizard and click Select Directory e Upgrading an IP403 to between 2 0 and 2 1 27 inclusive Select the IP403 IP403V1_99 folder within the Manager program directory e Upgrading an IP403 to level 2 1 28 or higher Select the IP403 IP403V2_99 folder within the Manager program directory e Upgrading an IP406 V1 or V2 to level 3 1 Select the IP406v1 V3_0_99 folder or IP406V2 V3_0_ 999 folder within the Manager program directory e Upgrading an IP406 V2 to level 3 2 Select the IP406v2 V3_1_
317. socket A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit The unit is designed as a free standing module that can also be wall mounted via fixing brackets in the base Width 255mm 10 0 Depth 241mm 9 5 Height 76mm 3 0 Unboxed 1 2Kg 2 64lbs Boxed 2 17Kg 4 77lbs Maximum 192KB Configuration Size Installation Manual Page 185 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Small Office Edition Connections a ye Small Office _ gt ANALOG4 OSi 3 d DSS amp 7 8 PAR ERY at ER A R E gt Z d TAHALOGe FAOHE LAHI WAH Ports Description 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input external power supply unit supplied with the control unit Digital Station port Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones Not suitable for out of building extensions TE 9 Way D Type socket Used for system maintenance Suitable for direct connection of P Office Serial Port Feature Key dongle XT O P 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls The port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office LAN RJ45 socket These ports form an unmanaged layer 2 Ethernet switch The ports are full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing auto MDI MDIX ports PCMCIA Dual PCMCIA card slot Used for optional Embedded Voi
318. solid green ground wire connected to its functional ground screw Remove and discard this wire Connect a green yellow ground wire to the protective earth screw in the center of the Point on the back of the Barrier Box 3 The rack mounting strip has threaded M4 earthing pillars Connect the other end of the barrier box ground wire using M4 washers and nuts to the earthing pillar on that side of the rack mounting strip 4 Using 14AWG wire with green and yellow sleeve connect one of the earthing pillars to the buildings protective earth 5 Using 14AWG wire with green and yellow sleeve connect the other earthing pillar to the Phone module 6 Ensure that the following wires are not routed together in the same bundle e Earth lead from the barrier box to the IP400 Phone 8 16 32 e Internal wires e g wires going directly to the IP400 Phone 8 16 32 e Wires from external telephone going directly to the barrier boxes Installation Manual Page 149 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation External Output Port Using the External Output Door Port All the IP Office control units are equipped with a EXT O P port The port is marked as EXT O P and is located on the back of the control unit adjacent to the power supply input socket The port can be used to control up to two external devices such as door entry relay switches The usual application for these switches is to activate relays on door ent
319. stallation 4625SW The 4625 is similar in physical appearance and function to the 4621SW However the 4625SW includes a color display This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source 4625SW IP network 12 buttons x 2 pages Typical Off Hook Power 45W Class 3 Consumption 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels EU24 EU24BL nl lf Standard DCP Phone Keys SI SPEAKER d HEADSET v 4 MUTE zm VOLUME UP x E MESSAGES HOLD 4 l TRANSFER 7 x VOLUME DOWN SAP Code 1151C2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151C1 1151C2 Power Cord 405362641 Installation Manual Page 232 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components 5402D This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 2402D However the 5402 phone is only supported on IP Office In addition to the two physical programmable buttons the Ho FEATURE key plus 0 9 and can be used to access an addition 12 programmable slots Feature Detail Headset Socket Jx Display 24 characters x 2 lines Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware Standard DCP Phone Keys TUE CONFERENCE VEET SAP Code Installation Manual Page 233 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 5410 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the
320. supplied with a 2 Pin 40W external power supply unit which used a locale specific locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord not supplied with the unit The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions _ Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Weight Unboxed 2 8Kg 6 3lbs Boxed 4 1Kg 9 2lbs Installation Manual Page 209 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation WAN3 Module Connections AMAMA PAO WAN 3 DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module LAN RJ45 socket Used for direct connection to a LAN port on the IP Office control unit A LAN Interconnect cable is supplied with the module for that purpose When connecting to an IP412 control unit a LAN crossover cable should be used These ports support a single synchronous data connection which can be X 21 V 35 or V 24 V 28 The selection of the required interface is automatically determined from the pin out of the cable plugged into the WAN port This cable must be connected before power
321. t IF Office WSS WAM Service VAN Port Connection Point we Ze ae ae ate ae ae a fe fe ee ae ae ae fn ae eee D a a a a a a a a alan 34 44 DTR Data Terminal Ready DCD Data Carrier Detect _ ECTS Clear To Sena _ gt RTS Request To Send _ ERI Ring Indicator DSR Data Set Ready _ Twisted Pair ESILE o N Rx A Receive Data A Twisted Pair Twisted Pair eroe oa A H F C J E RxClIk B Receive Clock B SCTE A External Clock A Twisted Pair SCTE B External Clock B UO e SAP Code 700213424 e Cable 10 twisted pair screened cable each core is 7 0 203mm 24 AWG tinned copper stranded wire nominal capacitance of 98pF m impedance of 80 10 at 1MHz screened with aluminized tape and a tinned copper wire drain The maximum core to core capacitance must not exceed 800pF e Maximum Length 5m 16 5 This is the maximum length that should be used if the above cable is replaced with an alternate cable Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 i tit Page 295 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation X 21 WAN Cable This cable is used for connection from an IP Office control unit or WAN3 module WAN port to the X 21 service providers equipment IF Ottice M27 VAN Service VAN Port Connection Point ae yay 15 WWay D Type Plug D Type Flug a beters 94 Feet IP Office WAN Signal Wires X 21 WAN Port Service
322. t 244 245 246 251 298 T3 DSS Unit 244 245 246 251 298 T3 Headset 244 245 246 T3 Headset Link 244 245 246 T3 Headset Link Unit 298 T3 IP 13 16 175 176 244 245 246 AEl Headset Link 244 245 246 T3 IP Classic 244 T3 IP Comfort 245 T3 IP Compact 246 T3 IP DSS 244 245 246 Power Supply 244 245 246 T3 IP Phones 298 Index Power Supply Unit 298 T3 IP Power Supply Unit 244 245 246 T3 IPN 244 245 246 T3 Phones 40 T3 Series 26 36 40 277 T3 Series Phones 298 T3 UPN 244 245 246 Link 244 245 246 T3 UPN Classic 244 T3 UPN Comfort 245 T3 UPN Compact 246 Taiwan 40 TAPI 43 47 48 TAPI 2 1 47 TAPI 3 0 47 TAPI 3 0 47 TAPI Link Pro 272 TAPI WAV 47 177 179 181 183 185 272 TAPI WAV file 272 TAPILink Lite 43 47 TAPILink Pro 47 272 TAPI WAV 47 requires 47 Target Service Date 62 TCP 45 TCP IP 82 154 TDM 190 TDM Bus 190 Technical Bulletins 61 Technical Support Organization 320 Tek Tips 55 Telecom 325 telecommunications 324 telecoms 133 Telepermit 325 grant 325 Telepermitted 325 Telephone Companies 326 Telephone Extension 322 Telephone No 324 Telephone Numbers 62 157 320 Temperature Range 62 Terminal 172 Terminal Attachments 326 Page 339 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation Administrative Council 326 Tested 259 Text To Speech 49 Text to Speech 276 298 IP Office 276 298 TFTP 16 42 53 106 120 142 172 189 262 TFTP Se
323. t s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit The unit is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The unit can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional Rack Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Unboxed 2 5Kg 5 8lbs Boxed 3 85Kg 8 6lbs Maximum 192KB Configuration Size Installation Manual Page 183 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation IP403 Connections N AA PAOS Office EXPANSION EXT 1 2 3 BI HAA g ch 2A Ports Description 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input external power supply unit supplied with the control unit RJ45 Socket Digital Station port Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones Not suitable for out of building connections DTE 9 Way D Type socket Used for system maintenance Suitable for direct connection of IP Office Serial Port Feature Key dongle EXPANSION RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the expansion module EXT O P 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls The port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office LAN These ports form an Ethernet hub The ports are
324. t such as a power outage linkDown Transition of an interface PPP or Frame Relay from the up operational state into the down operational state linkUp Transition of an interface PPP or Frame Relay from the down operational state into the up operational state authenticationFailure SNMP request with mismatched community for the type of operation IPO MIB Trap Cause ipoGenEntityFailureEvent A physical entity has fails in its operation ipoGenEntitvOperationalEvent A physical entity becomes operational again after having failed ipoGenEntityErrorEvent A transitory error is detected for a physical entity ipoGenEntityChangeEvent A non error change event is detected for a physical entity ipoGenLKSCommsFailureEvent Loss of communication with a configured License Key Server established or reestablished Installation Manual Page 165 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation The traps above are generated for the physical entities as follows Expansion Modules ipoGeneEntityFailureEvent F vl Ti Ti M iooGenEntityOperationalEvent 44 EEE ER wf e ipoGenEntityFailureEvent and ipoGenEntityOperationalEvent traps are issued in relation to connecting cable disconnection and reconnection or power changes e ipoGenEntityErrorEvent trap is issued for transitory communication errors across the cabling to an expansion module e ipoGenEntityChangeEvent trap is issued for mismatch es in expansion
325. tallation IP406 V1 C SA A i ee 3 Ports Description AUDIO 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input external power supply unit supplied with the control unit Office Serial Port Feature Key dongle Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the expansion module controls The port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office LAN These ports form an Ethernet hub The ports are half duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing Port 8 can be switched from MDIX standard LAN to MDI crossover operation using the UPLINK button on the control unit In MDIX Out MDI Used for trunk cards of all types except Dual PRI trunk cards Normally Slot B should be used first Trunks cards are supplied with replacement external blanking plates suitable for the trunk card port connections WAN _____ 37 Way D Type socket Used for the connection of V 24 V 35 or X 21 WAN service Used for connection of a function or protective ground Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement On older modules where this screw is not present the left hand fixing screw of Slot B can be used All control units are available in either North America or Rest of World variants The choice controls various default settings of the unit For E911 support a North American variant control unit must be used The companding can be changed once a unit is installed Item Variant Co
326. tart up tasks 9 Close the terminal program session 10 Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and edit the control unit s now defaulted configuration Installation Manual Page 170 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Maintenance Defaulting Security Settings The following processes can be used to default the security settings of an IP Office system running IP Office 3 2 or higher 1 2 0 Procedure Defaulting Security Settings This process defaults the IP Office s security settings but does not alter its configuration settings Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK Enter AT SECURITYRESETALL 5 You will be prompted to confirm the control unit s MAC address before continuing Enter the 1 2 0 3 address The control unit will respond OK when the action has been completed Close the terminal program session Manager can now be used to receive and edit the control unit s now defaulted security settings Procedure Defaulting the Configuration and Security Settings via the Boot Loader This process defaults the IP Office security s
327. tector All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system Variant Country 700211360 700241680 700241698 700213382 700213374 NEMA1 15 700213390 700254519 700314172 700210800 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables on DT O Oo Q D Installation Manual Page 198 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP400 Digital Station V2 The IP400 Digital Station V2 also known as DS V2 is used to add additional DS ports to an IP Office system The DS V2 is available in 16 and 30 port variants referred to as DS16 V2 and DS30 V2 respectively The DS V2 supersedes the original IP400 Digital Station now referred to as a DS V1 The module version is indicated by labels both the base and the rear of the module Key changes are e The DS ports have been rotated 180 to allow easier connection access e The port status LED s have been moved and grouped adjacent to the ports e The DTE serial port on the rear of the module has been changed to a 9 pin D type socket e The DS V2 uses an earthed 3 pin 60W external power supply unit Feature Details Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition IP Office core softwa
328. ted scenarios in which wired extensions and devices outside the main building can be connected to the IP Office system In these scenarios additional protection in the form of protective grounding and surge protectors must be fitted l The fitting of additional protection does not remove the risk of damage It merely reduces the chances of damage to other internal equipment Main Building Control Unit Secondary Building CO Analog Lines Phone Module a Analog Digital Phone DS Module Station External Contact Closure Device Cabling Requirements Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Cables of different types for example lines extensions ground and power connections should be kept separate All cabling between building should be enclosed in grounded ducting Ideally this ducting should be buried A Primary Protection Box must be provided at the point where the cables enter the building This should be three point protection tip ring and ground Typically this would be gas tube protection provided by the local telephone company The ground wire must be thick enough to handle all the lines being affected by indirect strike at the same time Page 144 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Connection Type DS Phone Extensions Bh Digital Station Expansion module DS ports only Protection Device Type Avaya 146E DS2 IROB Supports up to 4 connections D
329. tem is upgraded to IP Office 3 2 it begins to use the new security settings at their default values The only previous security settings retained are the system password which is still used for software upgrades and the voicemail and monitor passwords if set You should read and understand the Security Settings section of the IP Office Manager documentation That section details the settings and operation of the IP Office security settings and is part of the Manager applications help file E Objective Make the control unit configuration settings secure from unauthorized changes by changing the default passwords Installation Manual Page 112 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 A Basic Installation 1 1 Procedure 1 Select Start Programs IP Office Manager 2 Select File Advanced Security Settings 3 The Select IP Office window appears After a few seconds it should list the control unit that is being setup The default name used is the control unit s MAC address Select IP Office Name IF Address Type Version Version 2 1 _ 00E00701905D 192 168 42 1 IF 406 D5 2 127 TCP Discovery Progress Unit Broadcast Address e Ifthe system required was not found the address used for the search can be changed Enter or select the required address in the Unit Broadcast Address field and then click Refresh to perform a new search 4 Click the check the box next to the system and then click OK
330. the firmware loaded on 2400 5400 Series phones against those available in the Manager directory and automatically upgrade if necessary There may be some rare cases where new firmware files are provided and it is necessary to force the phones to upgrade Information Required 1 O Planning Chart This should indicate which extension should connect to which ports on the IP Office system It should also include intended extension numbers and user details arts and Equipment Required L 2400 5400 Series Phone Each phone includes a handset and handset cord No line cord is included A plastic wedge is provided to change the phone s angle for wall or desk mounting In addition for XX10 and XX20 models an adjustable desk stand is included 2 O Phone connection cable These phones are not supplied with a line cord The cable required will depend on the ports provided at each user position 1 O RJ45 to RJ11 Cable This type of cable will be required if an structured cabling system has been used 2 LI RJ11 to RJ11 Cable This type of cable is required if a traditional RJ11 phone socket has been provided at the user position 3 O IP Office connection cable Typically an RJ45 to RJ45 cable is required for connection from the structured cabling system patch panel to the IP Office control unit or expansion unit DS port 4 O Wall Fixings The phone base is designed to fit directly onto a standard US telephone jack wall plate Outside the U
331. the system the first two details can be found in the Module settings in the system s configuration file 2 Ifan entry is not present create a new entry Then close and restart Manager Under File Preferences ensure that Manager is set to 255 255 255 255 Also check that Enable BootP Server is checked Select View TFTPLog Check that the required bin file is present in Manager s working directory Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit o SE of Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen 8 Arrange the program windows so that the Terminal program and Manager TFTP Log are visible at the same time 9 Switch off power to the IP Office control unit 10 Power on the control unit and press the escape key every second until you get a Loader message Below is an example P12 Loader 2 4 CPU Revision 0x0900 Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK Enter AT X The control unit should respond Multi Sector Erase The control unit will now request the bin file it requires from Manager This process appears in the TFTPLog 4 Ifthe file transfers does not appear to be taking place check that the IP address shown in the TFTPLog matches the BOOTP entry Adjust the BOOTP entry if necessary 5 When complet
332. tion 1 Gi Procedure Erasing the Configuration and Security Settings via the Boot Loader This process defaults the IP Office security settings and its configurations settings 1 l WARNING Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office s configuration before performing this action 2 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are Summarized across the base of the screen Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK Switch off power to the IP Office control unit Power on the control unit while repeatedly pressing the escape key until you get a Loader message Below is an example P12 Loader 2 4 CPU Revision 0x0900 Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter AT X3 A typical response is Sector Erases Config followed by a series of OK responses 7 To erase the backup configuration stored in non volatile Flash memory enter AT X2 A typical response if Sector 2 Erase NV Config followed by OK e IP Office 403 only If running an IP Office 403 control unit enter AT X4 8 Switch power to the control unit off and then back on Within the terminal program you should see various messages as the control unit performs various s
333. tion D5 J MU e A Channel Groups co Oo Oo OOO A 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 O 0 0 0 0 O 0 O 0 Lumsa D D D A A I m n S m n ms n Gn GG m GG m G m I a G m E m I m oo T1 T1 PRI and E1R2 Trunks Select the Channels tab Select those channels that are not used and click Edit PR 24 Line Channels Line Appearance r05 U6 ro S rig 10 Direction Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bearer Any Any Any Any Any e For T1 set the Type to Out of Service e ForT1 PRI set the Admin field to Out of Service e For E1R2 trunks set the Line Signalling Type to Out of Service Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Type Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out Of Service Out OF Service Uut Of Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Edit Page 136 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 C External Trunk Configuration Prefix Dialing Where a prefix has been implemented for outgoing calls that same prefix needs to be added to trunk settings The prefix is then used as follows e On i
334. tion i e IP400 Office Quad Analog Trunk LS is 9 0Y Disconnection You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line or lines Hearing Aid Compatibility The custom telephone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC Ringer Equivalence Number REN The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area Installation Manual Page 326 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Index A ACA 54 access 112 259 ContactStore 259 IP Office s 112 Access Control 62 Account Codes 62 Accunet 158 ACE 54 ACS 54 ACTA 326 Action 127 Action Data 127 Actual UPS 24 Add Remove Programs 78 156 Additional Power Supply Must Be Used 125 Additional Procedures 120 Additional Requirements 249 Additional Voicemail Pro 35 152 268 274 298 add ons 10 36 ADJ 248 Adjust 172 BOOTP 172 Admin 135 158 Admin CD Set 254 255 260 261 262 263 264 266 267 Admin Suite 78 run 78 Admin General Setup 158 Admin S
335. tion Manual IP Office 3 2 Page 190 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components The IP Office can be treated as having a telephony switching interface its TDM bus and a data networking interface its Packet bus e TDM Bus Used by devices attached to DS and PHONE POT ports analog and digital telephones and by external trunks Also used by internal devices such as the Tone Generator MOH source and Conference Chip e Packet Bus Used by IP devices attached to the system s LAN and WAN ports This includes IP extensions and trunks 24144154164 Analog External ISO Series Phones Phones Trunks Terminal DS POT Line 3 Conference Ports Ports Ports Ports Chip TOM Bus Voice Compression Channels voice Calls Data Calls Packet Bus Ports Wahl IF Trunks IP Phones Trunks Data Network Calls between the two buses will use available voice compression channels as detailed below When no voice compression channel is available busy indication is returned to the calling device From To Voice Compression Channels IP Phone Non IP 1 voice compression channel is required for duration of call or Trunk Phone or Trunk IP Phone IP Phone 1 voice compression channel is used during call setup Once the or Trunk or Trunk call is connected e lf the devices use the same audio codec and are set to Allow Direct Media Path the VCM channel is no longer used e lf the devices use differing audio codecs a voice compression
336. tional or protective ground if required ous All control units x various 10 100Mbps Ethernet LAN ports Analog Trunk expansion Analog power fails ports module x2 PHONE IP403 control unit x2 Analog phone extension ports On older units these ports POT IP406 V2 control unit x2 are labeled as POT ports Phones expansion modules x8 x16 x30 Single PRI trunk cards x1 PRI trunk ports Dual PRI trunk cards x2 WAN All control units x1 WAN interface ports V 24 V 35 and X 21 through cable WANS expansion module selection x3 Small Office Edition x1 RJ45 Ethernet port Acts as Layer 3 ethernet switch to the modules LAN ports Installation Manual Page 279 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation ANALOG Port These ports are analog trunk ports They are found on the rear of IP Office control units fitted with ATM4 Analog trunk cards and on the front of the ATM16 Analog Trunk expansion module The ATM4 analog trunk card only supports loop start trunks The ATM16 Analog Trunk module supports both loop start and ground start trunks switchable within the IP Office configuration ANALOG Pin Description ic o 6 Notused __ 8 Notused IMPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth e WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk a
337. tions e CAUTION Ports on the front of the Small Office Edition IP403 and IP406 V2 control units must not be used for extensions that are external to the main building IROB 146E devices should be installed as per the instructions supplied with those devices The ground points on the IP Office control unit and the DS modules must be connected to a protective ground using 18AWG wire with a green and yellow sleeve Typically the IROB s 2 RJ45 EQUIPMENT ports are straight through connected to the 2 RJ45 LINE ports This allows existing RJ45 structured cabling using pins 4 and 5 to be used without rewiring for up to two DS connection However each of these ports can be used to connect a second extension using pins 3 and 6 Main Building _ _ La Secondary Building 146E Control Unit Digital DS Module a station Earthed Ducted Approved Ground Paint Cabling Approved Ground Point EE aa LINE Signal Li Fa BE Ring II Optional E RNC BELCA E a_i Emir teem Installation Manual Page 146 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 D Additional Processes Analog Phone Barrier Boxes Where analog phone extensions are required in another building additional protective equipment must be used in the form of IP Office Phone Barrier Boxes and protective earth connections e The correct IP Office specific barrier boxes must be used These modules have been designed specif
338. try is not present create a new entry Then close and restart Manager 3 Under File Preferences ensure that Manager is set to 255 255 255 255 Also check that Enable BootP Server is checked 4 Select View TFTPLog 5 Check that the required bin file is present in Manager s working directory 6 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit 7 Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen 8 Arrange the program windows so that the Terminal program and Manager TFTP Log are visible at the same time 9 Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK 10 Enter AT DEBUG The control unit should response with the time and date and then Hello gt to show it is ready to accept commands 11 To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter upgrade 12 The IP Office will erase its current software and then send out a BootP request on the network for new software Manager will respond and start transferring the software using TFTP Installation Manual Page 172 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Maintenance a Procedure Erasing the Core Software via the Boot Loader et ii ee Run Manager In the BOOTP entries check that there is an entry that matches the MAC Address IP Address and bin file used by
339. tted internally within the control unit Cards are available for a variety of trunks types Analog E1 E1R2 T1 J1 BRI etc e Internal Cards Additional facilities can be added internally to the control unit Includes modem voice compression and wireless cards e External Expansion Modules Additional extension and trunk ports can be added using a number of external expansion modules The number of expansion modules supported depends on the control unit e Small Office Edition None e IP403 3 expansion modules plus 2 WAN3 modules e IP406 V1 6 expansion modules plus 2 WAN3 modules e IP406 V2 6 expansion modules plus 2 WAN3 modules e IP412 12 expansion modules plus 2 WAN3 modules e Power Supplies The IP Office control unit and external expansion modules are each supplied with an external power supply unit and require a power outlet In addition IP phones and some phone add ons also require their own power supply units e Power Cords Depending on the locale different power cords need to be ordered for the external power supply units e Cables The IP Office is designed primarily for connection to a structured cabling system using CAT3 UTP cabling This approach allows telephone and data traffic to share the same wiring infrastructure and simplifies equipment moves Installation Manual Page 10 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 VKOOnDd15SDvXoxkw9cR9x jOXr AWz9 Installation Ma
340. ture Key dongle 156 PoE 22 125 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 236 237 238 239 240 249 250 298 Point 149 324 center 149 Multi 324 Poland 40 Polish 267 268 Polling Support 163 Polycom 158 Polycom Video Module Settings 158 Polycom View Station 512 MP 158 Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Polycom Viewstation 158 routed 158 Port 164 Enter 164 Port Classification 322 Port Description 322 Port Name 322 Port Safety Classification 322 Port User Details 68 69 70 Ports SNMP 298 Portugal 40 Portuguese 40 189 264 266 267 268 Portuguese Brazilian 189 post installation 71 POT 20 30 69 144 147 165 183 185 190 203 205 211 279 290 291 PHONE 20 potPhone 165 power 88 90 92 98 100 169 171 172 226 228 231 298 4600 Series 298 IP Office 88 90 92 98 100 169 171 172 IP Office Control Unit 100 WANS 100 Power Adapator 218 219 Rack Mount Charger 218 219 Power Adaptor 218 219 298 Charger 218 219 298 Rack Mount Charger 298 Power Cords 23 62 298 Power Fail 322 Power Failure Operation 192 193 Power Outlet Plug Type 23 298 Power Supplies 22 96 179 185 197 201 245 Power Supply 4450 223 248 298 T3 IP DSS 244 245 246 Power Supply Backup 24 Power Supply Sockets 62 Power Supply Units 298 DSS 298 T3 IP Phones 298 Pozidrive No 61 PPP 164 165 pre 2 1 106 Pre 3 2 40 84 pre 3 2 IP Office 40 84 running 84 Pre 3 2 IP Office Control
341. umpkin Details Compact Contact Center 5 0 CD 700330962 IP Office 3 2 Applications DVD 700407612 Licensed application See below Additional Delta Server installed Minimum PC Requirements XP 2000 2000 YAU UR Variant RAM HD Pentium Celeron AMD Pro Server Server CCC Server plus VMPro 512MB 30GB Pentium 4 2 8GHZ Wallboard Server Wallboard 128MB 10GB PII Celeron 3 Client 800MHz 800MHz C Wallboard Call Center View CCV CC Reporter Any PC with Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher e If VM Pro and CCC are run on the same server CCC is limited to up to a maximum of 25 agents 8 ports of VM Pro and on Windows server operating systems only Installation Manual Page 256 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components e For all voicemail servers also allow 1MB per minute for messages and greeting storage e For Windows XP minimum RAM 256MB License Description RFAName SAP CCC Server Enables the CCC Server applications Archiver and CCC SVR 171994 Wallboard Manager with support for 1 Supervisor reporting on 5 agents and one PC Wallboard e This license is a pre requisite for all the following CCC licensing CCC Agents Enables various numbers of additional agents 5 10 20 CCC AGT 5 171995 50 for CCC reporting 74469 74470 74471 CCC Enables additional supervisors 1 5 10 20 up to the CCC SUP 1 171996 Supervisors maximum of 21 supported supervisors Each su
342. unit LAN port For an IP412 control unit this cable should be replaced with a LAN crossover cable e LAN Crossover Cable Black 700213473 LAN crossover cable Installation Manual Page 289 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation PF Port These ports are analog extension ports They are found on the rear of the Analog Trunk expansion module During power fail conditions PF1 is internally connected to ANALOG port 1 on the module PF2 is internally connected to ANALOG port 2 on the same module Any phones connected to these ports should be clearly labelled as power fail extensions in accordance with the appropriate national and local regulatory requirements PF Pin Description ni Pin 2 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor TE 6 Pin 6 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor 8 Notused SSS e Minimum Wire Size AWG 26 e Maximum Cable Length The maximum cable length is dependant on the wire size used as follows e AWG26 500m 1640 e AWG24 AWG22 1000m 3280 e On the Small Office Edition control unit ANALOG port 2 is connected to PHONE POT port 1 during power failure Installation Manual Page 290 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components PHONE POT Port These ports are analog extension ports They are found on IP403 and IP406 V2 control units and on Phone V1 V2 expansion modules On older units these
343. untry SAP Code IP406 V1 Office Rest of World 700234461 North America 700210776 IEC60320 C7 Power Cord CEE7 16 700213382 BS1363 United Kingdom 700213374 NEMA1 15 700213390 700254519 S 700314172 Rack Mounting Kit 700210800 Installation Manual Page 182 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Components IP403 Control Unit The front panel of the IP403 control unit includes eight digital extension DS ports two analog phone POT ports and an eight port 10 100Mbps Ethernet LAN hub The IP403 has been superseded by the IP406 V2 control unit but is still supported on IP Office 3 2 IP403 control units with integral DT rather than DS ports are still supported However use of devices on those ports is not supported Feature Capacity Maximum 100 of various types in combination Analog only 92 DS only 98 IP Extensions only 100 Conference Parties Trunks Cards 2 Trunk card slots All types supported except Dual PRI trunk cards subject to available Voicemail Pro Port and TAPI WAV licenses Software Level e IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file ip403 bin DT Port Support IP Office 3 0 and higher software does not support the use of DT ports IP403 DT modules are supported on IP Office 3 0 but use of the integral DT ports is not supported Power Supply The unit is supplied with a 2 Pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the uni
344. ust be available for the control unit and all the expansion modules plus any additional equipment in the rack Environmental Requirements Installation into a rack can restrict air flow and expose the equipment to temperatures that are higher than the general room ambient temperature Therefore the environmental requirements for the IP Office system must be checked within the rack If necessary additional rack cooling fans may need to be fitted e Temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F e Humidity 10 to 95 non condensing Rack Fixing Ensure that all the rack manufacturer s safety requirements have been followed For example check that the rack legs have been lowered and fixing brackets used to stop toppling Grounding Where units and modules are being grounded check that the rack has a specified ground point and that the rack ground point is correctly connected to the building s protective or functional ground C Parts and Equipment Required Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700210800 This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single control unit or expansion module This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module and bolts for securing the module in the rack Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700293905 Barrier boxes must be used for out of building analog phone extensions This bracket allows up to 8 IP Office barrier boxes to be rack mounted and simplifies the number of connectio
345. ve is optional but is recommended Installation Manual Page 28 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview IP Office Control Unit and Expansion Module Ground Points The ground point on IP Office control units and expansion modules are marked with a rh or symbol Ground connections to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve for a functional ground or green and yellow sleeve for a protective ground Small Office Edition On the Small Office Edition control unit the ground point is provided by a 3 5mm jack socket on the left of the rear panel Other Control Units On IP403 1P406 V1 V2 and IP412 control units the ground point is a 4mm screw located adjacent to trunk card Slot B EEE A LE 5 meee EEA DIT En En WAN EXPANSION 1 2 di 4 5 dii Mi gi ii ii Mg e Onsome older units the dedicated ground point screw is not present In those cases the left hand 3mm fixing screw on the Slot B blanking plate can be used as an alternate ground connection point A toothed washer should be added to ensure good contact Expansion Modules On expansion modules the ground point is a 4mm screw located towards the right on the rear of the module EHE eA 2 FRI DG WF Ea E OTE EXPANSION co 16 24 DC 5 048 MAS DIGITAL STATION Y2 244 DC 1 5 4 PHONE ve e Onsome older modules the dedicated ground point screw is not present In those cases the top center c
346. web site http www avaya com This guide is also available from the Avaya s support web site http support avaya com Support Telephone Numbers For initial help and support contact your distributor supplier The following contact points are for Avaya authorized partners e Inthe USA only Avaya provides a toll tree Customer Helpline 24 hours a day e Name Avaya Technical Support Organization TSO e Customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 e Address 8744 Lucent Blvd Highlands Ranch Colorado 80129 USA e URL http support avaya com If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system call the Helpline or your Avaya representative Consultation charges may apply e Outside the USA If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system contact your Avaya representative e URL http support avaya com Installation Manual Page 320 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 Safety Statements Compliance with FCC Rules Transmit and Receive Gain Settings for PRI T1 and Analog Ports The Gain settings are password controlled for use by qualified installation personnel only and must not be made available to the end user The default gain settings of OdB ensures compliance with FCC part 68 section 68 308 b 5 and TIA EIA IS 968 Section 4 5 2 5 Through transmission amplification from ports for the connection of separately registered equipment or from other network connection ports
347. wever connection at the line providers end may require use of a different plug type in order to match the line providers equipment e RJ11 Phone Connectors Many phones use RJ11 sockets and are supplied with RJ11 to RJ11 cables RJ11 plugs can be inserted into RJ45 sockets and in many case the connection will work However this is not recommended or supported as the connection lock is not truly positive and may become disconnected An RJ45 to RJ11 cable is available for these connections Installation Manual Page 26 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Standard IP Office Cables The following are Avaya standard cables available for use with IP Office systems The maximum length is applicable if the standard Avaya cable is replaced with an alternate cable Description SAP Code Length Maximum 25 Way DTE Cable Connects to a IP403 or IP406 V1 control 700213432 2m 6 6 2m 6 6 unit 25 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket 9 Way DTE Cable Connects to an SOE IP406 V2 or IP412 2m 6 6 2m 6 6 control unit 9 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket Structured Cabling Connects from RJ45 sockets to RJ11 700047871 4m 13 2 See table DS Line Cable socketed DS and analog phones below BRI PRI Cable Connects BRI PRI trunk ports to the line 700213440 3m 9 10 5m 16 5 providers network termination point RJ45 to RJ45 Red Expansion Connects the control unit to expansion 700213457 1m 3 3 1m
348. within those areas are e Avaya Certified Associate ACA e Avaya Certified Specialists ACS e Avaya Certified Expert ACE Key IP Office courses are Course Course Code IP Office Hardware and Applications Overview AVA00136WEN IP DECT Europe only AVA00757WEN IP Office Maintenance and Troubleshooting Workshop AVA00758H00 Installation Manual Page 54 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Web Sites Information to support the IP Office can be found on a number of web sites Avaya http www avaya com The official web site for Avaya The front page also provides access to individual Avaya web sites for different countries Avaya Enterprise Portal http partner avaya com This is the official web site for all Avaya Business Partners The site requires registration for a user name and password Once accessed the site portal can be individually customized for what products and information types you wish to see and to be notified about by email Avaya Support http support avaya com Contains documentation and other support materials for Avaya products including IP Office Copies of the IP Office CD images are available from this site and updated core software bin files Avaya University http www avaya learning com This site provides access to the full range of Avaya training courses That includes both on line courses course assessments and access to details of classroom bas
349. xcept dual PRI trunk cards The unit includes an 8 port ethernet LAN hub This module has been superseded by the IP406 V2 control unit above IP403 Control Unit This unit supports up to 3 external expansion modules plus 2 WANS modules It supports 2 trunk cards of any type except dual PRI trunk cards The unit has 8 Avaya digital DS phone ports and 2 analog phone ports plus an 8 port ethernet LAN hub This module has been superseded by the IP406 V2 control unit above Small Office Edition Control Unit SOE This is a single unit IP Office system It does not support any external expansion modules and only a single trunk interface card can be added However the Small Office is available in a number of models with differing numbers of integral analog trunk analog extension and Avaya digital DS ports The modules all have a 4 port ethernet LAN switch layer 2 unmanaged and an Ethernet WAN port Installation Manual IP Office 3 2 Page 12 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview Control Unit Summary The following table summarizes the IP Office control units Feature Small Office 1P403 IP406 1P406 IP412 Edition Digital Station DS Ports Oors Analog Phone PHONE Ports 2or4 Optional Embedded Voicemail Card Slot Integral WAN Port Expansion Ports DTE Port Audio In MOH Port External O P Switch Port Conference Parties 64 Configuration Memory 192KB 192KB 192KB 256KB 1024KB Maximum Extensi
350. y be necessary to use the Refresh option within the Upgrade Wizard to reconnect following the reboot Validate upgrade can then be attempted to again check the amount of available RAM memory for transfer of BIN files If the memory is still insufficient the option is offered to either do an unvalidated upgrade or cancel 2 The bin files required are transferred to the system and stored in temporary memory UpgradeWiz 5 2 8 C Program Files AvayallP Office Manager ok Name IP Address Type Vers Ayo Status IPOffice_1 IPOffice_1 192 168 42 1 IP 40605 3 1 63 329 Transfering DIG DCPx30 W2 5 1 63 229 Initial Check Unit Broadcast Address Cancel Installation Manual Page 109 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 IP Office Installation 3 Once all the files have been transferred the upgrade wizard will prompt whether it okay to UpgradeWiz 5 2 8 C Program Files Avaya lP Office Manager l alx Name IF Address Type Vers Ax Status IPOffice_1 IPOffice 1 192 168 42 1 IP 406 DS 3 1 63 2 29 Transferred DIG DCPx3042 5 17 63 229 Transferred Upgrade Files downloaded proceed with upgrade 4 Each module being upgraded will delete its existing core software restart and load the new software file that was transferred This process may take several minutes for each unit Do not cancel or close the upgrade wizard while this process is running UpgradeWiz 5 2 8 C Program File
351. ylyl isl Iceland Icelandic al w 4 x xix ind __findia UK English s x x vw vy vy v xvi ita italy italian Ot a a a Ta Pa Pe I kor Korea Korean s x xe x UT vy Jv x Tv lesm__ Mexico Latin Spanish s w vy vy vy vy v yivily nid Netherlands Dutch J s sdlgsgd lyglg a x New Zealand Py x oy oland ortugal audi Arabia UK English outh Africa UK English x x cht Taiwan Putonghua fJ s J x x x vyv v xe Tx x eng UK UK English fJ sy oy ey oy ay oe Pv tv Ly enu USA USEnglish J s oy x vy vy ye Pv Pv lvl esv___ Venezuela__ LatinSpanish_ v s x vy vy v v jyvtly i i nl i i on Riis SS 4 4 4 16 14 4 14 14 4 x 4 LX LX beef kh Kf lt bp dai U Z e o lt 4 4 Spe i i i E a ai ui gt v V D Ji Pf 4 Installation Manual Page 40 IP Office 3 2 15 601042 Issue 14a 26th June 2006 System Overview e Pre 3 2 These are the three character codes used by pre 3 2 IP Office systems to set locales In IP Office 3 2 they have been replaced by selection of the required country or language by name The special locale TTY may appear for some users This is used in conjunction with Voicemail Pro and TTY devices for visually impaired users Refer to the Voicemail Pro Installation manual for full details e Locale The country represented by the locale e Lan

IP Office 3.2 Installation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents